AND WHEREAS the contractor has supplied the

AND WHEREAS the contractor has supplied the
BIRLA INSTITIUTE OF TECHNOLOGY, MESRA
NEW BUILDING AND RENOVATION WORKS AT CAMPUS IN
SECTOR 1, NOIDA
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
NEW CONSTRUCTION OF ANNEXE BUILDING
AND ADDITION OF FLOOR IN MAIN BUILDING (4TH FLOOR)
WITH MODIFICATION IN EXISTING MAIN BUILDING
(CIVIL WORKS AND PHE WORKS)
TENDER NO. 1
ARCHITECTS and PMC Consultants:
ARCHLINE DESIGNS PVT. LTD.
2112, EXPRESS TRADE TOWERS-2, SECTOR-132,
NOIDA EXPRESSWAY, NOIDA
e-mail: [email protected], ph: 0120-4991777
DATE OF SUBMISSION
: 17TH FEBRUARY,2017 UPTO 1.00 PM.
ADDRESS FOR SUBMISSION : THE REGISTRAR,
BIRLA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY,
MESRA, RANCHI - 835215
PH: 0651-2275444
Page | 1
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1: TECHNICAL BID:
S.NO
I)
ITEM
PAGE NO.
NOTICE INVITING TENDER
5
APPENDIX TO TENDER
15
II)
DETAILED NOTICE FOR PREQUALIFICATION
17
III)
INFORMATION & INSTRUCTIONS FOR APPLICANTS.
18
IV)
QUALIFICATION INFORMATION &
DETAILS OF APPLICANTS (FORMS A TO I)
23
V)
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
29
Page | 2
VOLUME 2: TENDER AND FINANCIAL BID:
S.NO
I)
ITEM
TENDER FORM
PAGE NO.
31
II)
DRAFT AGREEMENT
33
III)
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
36
IV)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CIVIL WORKS)
58
V)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (PLUMBING WORKS)
153
VI)
SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES (CIVIL WORKS)
205
VII)
SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES (PLUMBING WORKS)
222
VIII)
LIST OF MAKES (CIVIL WORKS)
245
IX)
LIST OF MAKES (PLUMBING WORKS)
247
X)
LIST OF TENDER DRAWINGS
249
ARCHITECTURAL
STRUCTURE
PHE
(drawings are available in a separate attachment)
Page | 3
VOLUME 1 (TECHNICAL BID)
Page | 4
I).
NOTICE INVITING TENDER
1.1
Sealed item rate tenders are invited on behalf of BIT MESRA for the proposed
CONSTRUCTION OF ANNEXE BLOCK AND FOURTH FLOOR OF MAIN BUILDING
BLOCK ALONGWITH MODIFICATION IN EXISTING BUILDING at NOIDA campus in
Sector 1, Noida.
The work comprises of annexe block, fourth floor of main block, redoing the
elevation of main block, change in windows, addition of lift shaft etc. Elaborately
described in the Bills of Quantities and drawings hereinafter.
Project cost is approximately Rs. 4.8 Cr.
1.2
Tenders not properly filled, mutilated, with incorrect calculations or generally
not complying with the conditions may be rejected.
1.3
The tender shall be a two stage tender comprising of the following: Technical bid
and financial bid.
1.4
The technical bid and prequalification document (volume 1) shall be opened first
and only the top 5 who qualify as per the marking system shall be eligible for the
opening of the financial bid. This shall solely be on the discretion of the
managing committee based on the internal marking of the top 5.
1.5
The unopened financial bid of the unqualified bidders shall be returned.
1.6
Clarifications, if any, can be sought over mail from the consultants. If there are
any changes in the document, they shall be notified over the website.
1.7
The bidders are to deposit the two bids in two envelopes marked technical bid
and financial bid separately.
Technical bid should be part of envelope no.1 and marked clearly as TECHNICAL
BID
1. Mandatory Information (strictly in theprescribed Performa)
2. Other supporting documents & credentials of the bidder.
Must not contain any commercial information. Any Commercial disclosure in
the Envelope no. 1 will disqualify the bidder without any further
scrutiny.
The bidder shall submit the completed tender documents duly signed in a
separate envelope marked as “Commercial /Price Bid- Envelope No. 2”.
Page | 5
Envelope No.2 (TENDER AND FINANCIAL Bid):
Tender Bids received in any form other than mentioned above will be
disqualified.
1.8
Bidders should quote their rates both in figures and in words. The schedule of
quantities must be fully priced and the total of each page along with carried over
figures of the previous page shall be given in ink and signed by the bidder. No
blank space shall be left.
1.9
Sealed tenders with name of the Work and the name of the bidder written on
the envelope will be received in the office of Director, BIT Mesra, Noida Campus
on or before 25th January,2017 up to 3.00 P.M.
1.10
If the tender is made by or on behalf of a company incorporated under the
Companies Act (of 1956), it shall be signed by their Managing Director or one of
the Directors duly authorised on that behalf. If it is made by a partnership firm, it
shall be signed with the co-partnership name by a member of the firm who shall
sign his own name and give the name and address of each partner of the firm
and attach a copy of Power of Attorney with the Tender authorizing him to sign
on behalf of the other partners. A certified copy of the registered partnership
deed shall also be submitted along with the tender.
1.11
Acceptance Period:
The tender shall remain valid for acceptance for a period as stated in the
Appendix to Tender.
1.12
Site Inspection:
Every bidder is expected to inspect the site of the proposed Work before quoting
his rates. He must also go through the drawings and documents. It will be
construed that the Contractor has inspected the site and satisfied himself, at his
own cost, and the quoted rates shall hold good in all conditions. The site is an
operational college building. All precautions have to be taken to ensure the
normal functioning of the building while the construction work is on. Work has
to be done strictly in accordance with the instructions and schedule worked
out in coordination with the PMC and consultancy team.
1.13
Schedule of quantities
A bill of approximate quantities for various items accompanies this tender. It
shall be definitely understood that the Employer/Consultant do not accept any
Page | 6
responsibility for the correctness or completeness of the Bill of Quantities, in
respect of items and quantities and this schedule is liable to alterations by
omissions, deductions or additions at the discretion of the Employer/Consultant
without affecting the terms of the Contract. The Consultant reserves the right to
completely delete any item from the scope of the work without affecting the
terms of the Contract.
1.14
Contractor’s Rates
The Contractor’s rates must include the cost of transportation of material to the
site, handling and storage at site, all taxes such as Sales Tax, WCT, Excise duty,
Labour cess, Octroi and Service tax etc. and the fixing or placing in position for
which the terms of work is intended to be operated.
The Employer will not provide Form 30/31 or Form `C’ to the Contractor.
1.15
Interpretation
In interpreting the specifications, the following order of decreasing importance
shall be followed:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Drawings
Schedule of quantities
Particular or special specifications
General Specifications
Matters not covered by the specifications given in the Contract as a whole, shall
be covered by the relevant Indian Standard Codes. If such codes for a particular
subject have not been framed, the decision of the Employer/Consultant shall be
final and binding.
1.16
Alterations in N.I.T.
No alterations shall be made by the bidder in the Notice Inviting Tenders.
Instructions to the Contractors: Contract Form, Conditions of the Contract,
Drawings and Specifications, and if any such alterations are made or any special
condition attached, the tender is liable to be rejected.
1.17
Acceptance of Tender
The acceptance of the tender will rest with the Employer, who does not bind
himself to accept the lowest tender and reserves to himself the authority to
reject any or all of the tenders received, without assigning any reason(s).
Page | 7
The Employer reserves the right of accepting the whole or any part of the tenders
received and the bidders shall be bound to perform the same at their quoted rates.
The tenders received would be scrutinized and approved within a period of 90 days and
the successful Contractor would be intimated immediately to enable him to execute all
the required documents. The execution of all the documents would be required to be
completed maximum within a period of one week from the date of acceptance of the
tender.
1.18
Site Supervision
The Work shall be carried out under the direction and supervision of the
Employer/Consultant or their Representative at site. On accepting the tender, the
Contractor shall intimate the name of his accredited Representative who would be
supervising the construction and would be responsible for taking instructions for
carrying out the work on day to day basis.
The Employer/ Consultant or their Representative at site shall have access to the
workshops of the successful bidders so as to ensure themselves of the quality of
material and workmanship.
1.19
Quality
The Employer’s/Consultant’s decision with regard to the quality of the material and
workmanship will be final and binding, any material rejected by the
Employer/Consultant shall be immediately removed by the Contractor from the site.
1.20
Commencement of Work/Period of Completion
The Contractor shall commence Work on site within the time period stated in the
Appendix to Tender, from the date of issue of the work order. This date shall be
considered as the date of Commencement of the said Work.
Time is the essence of the Contract. All works as per this tender will be completed
within the time as stated in the Appendix to Tender from the date of commencement in
a phased manner as decided by the Employer/Consultant. Completion period includes
Monsoon period as well as festival period. Schedule of construction will be strictly
observed by the Contractor.
1.21
Income Tax
Every bidder shall furnish along with the tender the latest Income Tax Clearance
Certificate without which his tender is likely to be rejected. Employer will deduct
Page | 8
1.22
amount towards Tax Deducted at Source (TDS) as per the latest Income Tax Rules, from
all payments made to the Contractor.
Defects Liability Period
Any defects developed within `Defect Liability Period’ as stated in the Appendix to
Tender will have to be rectified by the Contractor. In case of failure to do so, the
Employer with the concurrence of the Consultant, shall get the rectification work done
by some other agency at the risk and cost of the Contractor. The rectification of such
defects shall be taken up immediately on receipt of written notice from the
Employer/Consultant and such defects will extend upto the end of ‘defect liability
period”.
1.23
Part Occupation/ remaining building to be operational
If Employers want to occupy areas in part, the Contractor shall have to complete the
work of the areas in conjunction with the Employer and hand over the same to the
Employer without affecting any of the Clauses of the Contract agreement. The
remaining building shall be fully operational while the work is on. The Contractor shall
make adequate provision for the safety of the occupants while the work is to be
accomplished. Any delay or problems arising out of the same shall be accounted for
within the working schedule. Work has to be carried out as per the schedule prepared
jointly with the consultants.
1.24
Contract Signing
After acceptance of the tender, the bidder shall sign the necessary Contract papers
within 10 days of the intimation. Expenses for the agreement including cost of stamp
papers etc. shall be borne by the Contractor. In case of delay the `Earnest Money’ may
be forfeited and the tender cancelled or the Contract enforced as per terms of the
tender and the bidder shall thus be bound even though the formal agreement has not
been executed and signed by the bidder.
1.25
b)
EMD
a) Earnest money, amount as stated in the Appendix to Tender, is to be submitted at
the time of submission of in the form of Bank Guarantee only in favour of the
Employer. Validity of the Bank Guarantee shall be for a period as stated in the
Appendix to Tender. The tender received without EMD may be rejected. The EMD
shall be refunded to the unsuccessful bidder within one month of the opening of the
tender. The EMD of successful bidder shall be returned after he submits
Performance Guarantee.
Retention money at a rate stated in the Appendix to Tender shall be deducted from
each running account payment.
Page | 9
c)
Within the time stipulated in the Appendix to Tender, the Contractor shall deposit
with the Employer a sum stated in the Appendix to Tender as PERFORMANCE
GUARANTEE (Security Deposit) in the form of a Bank guarantee valid for the
duration of the Contract period and until the end of date of completion of defects
liability period.
d)
The Retention Money/EMD/Performance guarantee amount shall not bear any
interest.
1.26
Refund of Deposit
a)
50% of the Retention money shall be refunded after issue of Completion
Certificate. Balance shall be returned at the end of defect liability period.
b)
Any money payable by the Contractor under the terms of the Contract
may be deducted from the above deposits.
1.27 Supply of materials
Employer does not bind himself to supply any materials whatsoever required for
the work. The quality/make of material to be purchased by the Contractor shall
have the approval of the Consultant before incorporation in the works. For the
purpose of compensation, actually recorded quantities shall be taken into
consideration.
The Contractor shall remove at once any rejected material from the site of work
at his own cost.
1.28 Insurance:
The successful Contractor shall take Contractor’s All Risk (CAR) insurance policy,
in the name of the Contractor, beneficiary as stated in the Appendix to Tender
and the original policy shall be deposited with the Employer. The policy shall
cover Clauses as under.
(i)
The Contractor shall at all times indemnify and keep indemnified the
Employer and its officers, servants, agents and any other guests or
persons moving in the site premises from and against all third party
claims whatsoever (including but not limited to property loss and
damage, personal accident, injury or death/of to property or person
of any Sub-Contractor and/or the servants or agents of the
Contractor, and any sub-Contractor(s) and/or the Employer or its
agents/representatives) and the Contractor shall at his own cost and
Page | 10
initiative at all times upto the successful conclusion of the defect
liability period specified in the Appendix to Tender take out and
maintain all insurable liabilities under the Motor Vehicles Act,
Workmen’s Compensation Act, Fatal Accidents Act, Personal Injuries
Insurance Act, Emergency Risk Insurance Act and/or other Industrial
legislation from time to time in force in India with insurance
company(ies) approved by the Employer, and such policy(ies) shall be
of not less limit than the limits hereunder specified with reference to
the matters hereunder specified, namely
a)
Workmen’s Compensation Insurance – to the limit to which
compensation may be payable under the laws of the Republic
of India.
b)
Third Party Insurance – body injury and property damage to
the limits for each accident and for all accidents shall be of
not less than the amounts stated in the Appendix to Tender.
Provided that the limits specified shall operate only as a
specification of minimum limits for insurance purposes, but
shall not in any way limit the Contractor’s liability in terms of
this Clause to the limit(s) specified.
1.29
(ii)
Should the Contractor fail to take out and/or keep afoot insurance as
provided for in the foregoing Sub-Clause, the Employer shall be
entitled (but without obligation to do so) to take out and/or keep
afoot such insurance at the cost and expense of the Contractor, and
without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Employer in
this behalf, to deduct the sum(s) incurred, from the dues of the
Contractor.
(iii)
Period of Policies: All insurance covers mentioned above shall be kept
alive during the completion period of Contract and defects liability
period.
Payments
Only one bill shall be prepared every month, based upon the joint measurement
by the Contractor and Employer’s Representative. Contractor shall submit 3
copies of the bill and 3 copies of the measurement sheet. Bill shall be
accompanied by the reconciliation statement of the material supplied by
Employer, if any.
Page | 11
1.30
Liquidated Damages
Entire project will be completed and handed over within the agreed time limit in
a phased manner approved by the Employer/Consultant. Employer shall levy
liquidated damages by way of penalty @ rate stated in the Appendix to Tender
per week of delay to a maximum as stated in the Appendix to Tender for 10
weeks of delay. After lapse of 10 weeks the Employer reserves the right to
terminate the Contract. All the dues on the day of pre-mature termination of the
Contract, if any, would stand forfeited. The Contractor will be responsible for all
such penalties whatsoever which may be caused due to violation of any of the
building rules and regulations framed by the Authorities.
1.31
Extra Items
Extra items shall be executed only after getting the instructions in writing.
i)
The rates of all authorised extra items or additional, altered or
substituted work shall be worked out as follows:
a) The rates shall be based on/derived from the existing rates in the
Contract as far as possible and to the maximum extent possible from
the same class & nature of work.
c) Where the rates cannot be derived in the manner of (i) (a) above,
the same shall be worked out on the basis of most competitive
market rates inclusive of all taxes, octroi etc. plus Contractor’s profit,
overheads and supervision charges as decided by the
Employer/Consultant.The same has to be limited as per :
Actual Cost+ taxes+ 15% for overheads and profits.
(ii)
1.32
The Contractor shall, within 3 days of the date of receipt of an order
to carryout the above work, or within 3 days after having carried out
the above work, submit the rates which he proposes to claim for such
items of work, supported by rate analysis and vouchers. The
Employer/Consultant shall with due analysis and justification
communicate to the Contractor the rates admissible for these items,
within a period of one month.
Water and Electricity
Water and Electricity shall be arranged by the Contractor at his own expense. If
arranged by the Employer the same shall be supplied at one point only, and
Page | 12
Contractor shall make his own arrangements for distribution lines required for
the work.
Recovery for the same shall be made at 1% (½% for water and ½% for Electricity) of the
work done amount from the bills. In case of failure of power, the Contractor shall have
alternate arrangement (DG set etc.) to keep the work in progress at his own cost and
Employer will not take any responsibility for the same. Generator employed shall have
sound proof canopy, so that noise is within permissible limits so that there is no
disturbance to the classes.
1.33
Escalation/Fluctuations
The approved quotation of the bidder will be valid for the duration of the contract and
no change in rates etc. would be acceptable under any circumstances by the Owner. The
quotations should be inclusive of Civil & Plumbing works, fittings and all types of taxes.
In case the Contractor desires to withdraw the Contract any time before the completion
of the Contract for any reasons, the same will be at the cost of the Contractor and he
will have to bear of the damages whatsoever are claimed by the Employer, besides
forfeiture of Security Deposit and encashment of the performance guarantee.
1.34
Quality of Construction & Brand of Material
The Employer/Consultant would ascertain the quality of material/construction from
time to time. In case the samples of the materials are found sub-standard, the decision
of the Employer/Consultant shall be acceptable to the Contractor.
All `branded quality’ material will be used by the Contractor as given in the list of makes
and BILL of quantities in conjunction and he will get the same approved by the
Employer/Consultant before incorporating the same in the works.
In case branded material is not available in market, temporarily at any time during the
construction, alternative equally good quality of branded material proposed to be used
will be got approved by the Employer/Consultant before the same is used.
1.35
Receipt of Tenders
Tenders along with all the copies, drawings etc. in sealed envelope will be received as
stated on the cover of this Volume.
1.36
E.S.I (Employees State Insurance) & Provident Fund
ESI charges & Provident fund charges, if applicable, shall be borne by the Contractor.
Page | 13
1.37
Work Tax/Labour Cess/ Service tax
The rate quoted by the contractor are inclusive of all taxes and duties including WCT,
Labour Cess, Service tax etc. and the rate quoted by the Contractor shall be deemed to
include the taxes and duties as said above.
Page | 14
A P P E N D I X TO TENDER
S. No.
Description & Clause Reference
1. Validity of tender for acceptance (clause 1.16 of
the NIT)
2. Date of commence work on site (clause 1.19 of
the NIT)
3. Time for completion of work (or Contract period)
(clause 1.19 of the NIT)
4. Defect Liability Period (Clause 1.21 of the NIT)
Limit
90 days from the date of
submission of tender
7 days from the date of issue of
work order
12 months from the date of
commencement
12 months from the date of issue
of completion certificate
5. Earnest Money Deposit (Clause 1.24 of the NIT)
Rs 2 lacs
6. Validity of the Bank Guarantee for EMD (Clause
4 months from the date of
1.24a of the NIT)
7. Rate of deduction of Retention Money (Clause
1.24b of the NIT)
8. Performance Guarantee (security deposit)
submission of tender
5% of value of gross value of
running bill
2% of the Contract value
rate/amount, in the form of Bank Guarantee
(clause 1.24c of the NIT)
9. Time limit for submission of Performance
Guarantee (clause 1.24c of the NIT)
10. Beneficiary of the Contractor’s All Risk (CAR)
14 days for the date of issue of
work order
BIT Mesra, Ranchi
insurance policy (Clause 1.27 of the Appendix to
Tender)
11. Third Party insurance limit for each accident
Rs 5 lacs
(Clause 1.27 ) of the NIT
12. Third Party insurance limit for all accidents
Rs 10 lacs
(Clause 1.27) of the NIT
13. Periodicity of payment of bills (Clause 1.28 of the
1 month
Page | 15
NIT)
14. Liquidated damages per week (Clause 1.29 of the
0.5% of the Contract value
NIT)
15. Maximum for Liquidated damages (Clause 1.29
5% of the Contract value
of the NIT)
16. Period for final measurement
3 months from the date of
submission of final bill
17. Employer’s issue materials
None
18. Water and Electricity by Employer
1% of the value of work done and
shall be deducted from the bills.
In case of failure of electricity for
any reason, the Contractor shall
make arrangement at his own
cost.
19. Price Escalation
No escalation on labour,
material, fuel, or on any item for
any reason whatsoever.However
if delay is because of Client
beyond the contract period, then
escalation, on the remaining
work will be mutually discussed
and decided.
20. Advance against material brought to site
No advance will be permitted
against material.
Page | 16
II) NOTICE FOR INVITING APPLICATIONS FOR TECHNICAL BID:
Birla Institute of Technology, Mesra invites applications from reputed, experienced and
Indian registered contractors / firms for technical Bid on for the following discipline:
Civil and PHE works.
The contractors are required for submitting bids against tendered works for the
Construction of the contractors should meet the minimum qualifying criteria as
mentioned in PQ document for the respective disciplines & category under different
monetary groups for getting qualified.
The detailed document can be downloaded from website www.bitmesra.ac.in . The
contractors should according to their eligibility apply for the specific discipline &
category of works only. Contractors who want to apply for more than one discipline &
category should do so through separate application including processing fee.
No Joint venture or Consortium of firms shall be allowed and the contractors should
meet the above criteria by themselves.
The value of free issue materials shall be taken while evaluating completion cost of
project. The value of such materials incorporated in the project should be certified by
the chartered accountant/owner.
The desired contractors should apply on the prescribed documents as per the PQ
document along-with documentary evidence for the following:
(1) Audited Balance Sheet for the last three years up to 31-3-16.
(2) Completion Certificates from Clients / Owners,
(3) Plant & Machinery holding,
(4) Manpower details,
(5) Details of pending litigation etc.
(6) Valid Electrical License, if applicable
(7) EPF Regn. No. along with copy of challan for the month of March 2016.
(8) PAN
(9) VAT Regn. No. along with Valid Clearance Certificate.
(10) Bank Solvency Certificate.
(11) Certificate of Incorporation in India.
Page | 17
III) QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 BIT MESRA invites application from reputed, experienced and Indian registered
contractors /firms for qualification to Civil and PHE works for extension of
existing campus at Sector 1, Noida.
2.0 INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR APPLICANTS
2.1
MINIMUM QUALIFICATION CRITERIA
The contractors should meet the following minimum qualifying criteria for getting
qualified:
1. Average turnover (over last 3 years ending 31-3-16)
: Rs. 4 cr.
2. Should have completed a single project of value
: Rs. 3.5 cr.
Or Two projects of each
: Rs. 2.5 cr.
Or Three projects each 1cr.
This should be within the last 5 years.
3. Net worth
: Rs. 2 cr.
4. Latest bank solvency
: Rs. 1.5- 2 cr.
5. They should have adequate manpower and resources.
6. They should have qualified civil engineer as part of the management team
(preferably the director/ propreiter of the company).
7. Should have previous experience in cladding works as an essential part of the
building works. Extra weightage would be given to previous experience in
handling work in addition/alteration in an existing building.
8. Experience certificates should show work done in Civil and Plumbing both.
2.2 No Joint venture or Consortium of firms shall be allowed and the contractors
should meet the above criteria by themselves.
2.2.1 The value of free issue materials (if any) shall be taken while evaluating
completion cost of project. The value of such materials incorporated in the project
should be certified by the chartered accountant/owner.
2.2.2 Desired agencies/ contractors should apply on the prescribed documents as per
the PQ document along-with documentary evidence for the following:
(1) Audited Balance Sheet for the last three years i.e. 2013-14, 2014-15 and 2015-16.
(2) Completion Certificates from Clients / Owners,
Page | 18
(3) Plant & Machinery holding,
(4) Manpower details,
(5) Details of pending litigation etc.
(6) Valid Electrical License, if applicable
(7) EPF Regn. No. along with copy of challan for the month of March 2016.
(8) PAN
(9) VAT Regn. No. along with Valid Clearance Certificate.
(10) Bank Solvency Certificate for 40% value of Qualification Limit issued not
before March 2013.
(11) Certificate of Incorporation in India.
2.2.3 The past experience in similar nature of work should be supported by certificates
issued by an Officer not below the rank of Executive Engineer or equivalent. In case the
work experience of other than Govt./Semi Govt./ PSUs, the completion certificate shall
be supported with copies of a) Work order and full payment TDS certificates issued by owner for the work
executed.
2.2.4 The gross annual turnover should be certified by the Chartered Accountant. Year
in which no turnover is shown would also be considered for working out the average.
2.2.5 The applicant should own sufficient construction equipment for the proper and
timely execution of the work. The applicant should submit details of same.
2.2.6 The applicant should have sufficient number of Technical and Administrative
employees for the proper execution of the contract. The applicant should submit details
of same with PQ Application.
2.3 Forms for giving details for qualification and Letter of transmittal are given.
2.4 All information called for in the enclosed forms should be furnished against the
relevant columns. If for any reason, information is furnished on a separate sheet, this
fact should be mentioned against the relevant column. Even if no information is to be
provided in a column, a “NIL” or “NO SUCH CASE” entry should be made in that
column. If any particulars / query is not applicable in case of the applicant, it should be
stated as “not applicable”. The applicants are cautioned that not giving complete
information called for in the application forms or not giving it in clear terms or making
any change in the prescribed forms or deliberately suppressing the information may
result in the applicant being rejected. Applications made by telegram or telex, E-mail,
and those received late or without processing fees will not be entertained.
Page | 19
2.5 The application should be type-written. The applicant should sign and stamp each
page of the application.
2.6 Overwriting should be avoided. Correction, if any, should be made by neatly
crossing out, initialing, dating and rewriting. They should be submitted as a package with
signed letter of transmittal.
2.7 References, information and certificates from the respective clients certifying
suitability, technical know how or capability of the applicant should be signed by an
officer not below the rank of Executive Engineer or equivalent.
2.8 The applicant may furnish any additional information which he thinks is necessary
to establish his capabilities to successfully complete the works. The applicants are
however, advised not to furnish superfluous information. No information shall be
entertained after submission of qualification documents unless it is called for by the
client.
2.9 Any information furnished by the applicant found to be incorrect either
immediately or at a later date, would render him liable to be debarred from
qualification /tendering / taking up of work .
FINAL DECISION MAKING AUTHORITY
BIT Mesra reserves the right to modify the eligibility criteria, to decide on cut off date of
implementation, to accept or reject any application, to annul the PREQUALIFICATION
process,to reject all applications or accept new applications at any time, without
assigning any reason or incurring any liability to the applicants.
2.10
EVALUATION CRITERIA FOR QUALIFICATION
2.10.1 For the purpose of qualification, applicants will be evaluated on the basis of
minimum stipulated financial and past experience criteria. The details of plant &
machinery holding, manpower employed, pending litigations shall also be evaluated for
qualification of the firms.
2.10.2 Even though an applicant may satisfy the above requirements, he would be
liable to disqualification if he has:
(a) Record of poor performance such as abandoning work, not properly completing the
contract, delay in completion of works, or financial failures / weaknesses etc.
(b) Made misleading or false representation or deliberately suppressed the information
in the forms, statements and enclosures required in the QUALIFICATION documents.
Page | 20
2.11 FINANCIAL INFORMATION
Applicant should furnish the following financial information:
(a) Annual financial statement for the last three years (in Form “C”).
This should be supported by audited balance sheets and profit and loss accounts (with
all schedules attached) along-with details required for assessing the net worth duly
certified by a Chartered Accountant, as submitted by the applicant to the Income Tax
Department.
(b) Name & Address of the bankers.
2.12 EXPERIENCE IN WORKS HIGHLIGHTING EXPERIENCE IN SIMILAR WORKS
2.12.1 Applicant should furnish the following:
(a) List of all similar works successfully completed during the last seven years
(in form “D”).
(b) List of the projects under execution or awarded (in Form “E”).
2.12.2 Particulars of completed works and performance of the applicant duly
authenticated / certified by an officer not below the rank of Executive Engineer or
equivalent should be furnished separately for each work completed or in progress (
preferably in Form “F” or as per Performa of concerned Clients covering the required
information as asked for in Form 'F'). The work completion/ experience certificates
issued by other than Govt. Deptt./PSU shall be supported by the copies of the TDS
certificates issued by the owner of the project.
2.12.3 The value of executed works shall be brought to the current level by enhancing
the actual value of work done at simple rate of 7% per annum, calculated from
the date of completion to last date of receipt of application for qualification.
2.12.4 Construction/Development of 'Own Real Estate' by developers shall not be
accepted as eligible project to meet the qualifying requirement of past experience as
construction contractor.
2.13 AVAILABILITY OF EQUIPMENT RESOURCE
Applicant is required to furnish the details of Plants & Machineries available with
the applicant as on date in form-"G".
2.14 ORGANIZATION INFORMATION
2.15.1 Applicant is required to submit the following information in respect of his
Page | 21
organization.
(a) Name & Postal Address, including Telephone and Telex, Fax numbers,E-Mail address
etc.
(b) Copies of original documents defining the legal status, place of Registration and
principal places of business.
(c) Name of Directors and Officers concerned with the work, with designation of
individuals authorized to act for the organization.
(d) Information on any litigation in which the applicant was involved during the last five
years, including any current litigation.
(e) Authorization for BIT MESRA to seek detailed references.
2.16 LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
The applicant should submit the letter of transmittal attached with Qualification
document (Section – 4) duly signed by him.
2.17 Any effort on the part of the applicant or his agent to exercise influence or to
pressurize the employer would result in rejection of his application. Canvassing of
any kind is prohibited.
2.18 CANCELLATION OF CONTRACT
The qualification of contractor shall be cancelled by BIT MESRA in case of their poor
performance, abandoning of the allotted work, and abnormal delay in completion of
work, bankruptcy and for activities detrimental to the interest of BIT MESRA. The
decision of BIT MESRA in this regard shall be final and binding on the contractor.
2.18.1 The qualified contractor / firm shall not effect any change in the constitution of
the firm without the prior approval of BIT Mesra. Such proposal, if any shall be
submitted in advance furnishing full details of the proposed change along with all
supporting documents. Any change in the constitution of the firm /company without the
prior approval of BIT MESRA will render the contractor/ firm liable for removal from the
approved list of contractors. The discretion to allow/disallow the proposed change shall
vest solely with BIT MESRA. In case, the original partners/constitution change by more
than 50% either due to substitution or due to retirement or death the enlistment of the
firm/ contractor by that name shall be cancelled.
2.18.2 In case of change of name of the qualified firm/contractor without change of
constitution/partners the same shall be intimated along with proof of such change to
BIT MESRA immediately but in no case later than 30 days from the date of such change
occurs failing which the enlistment of the firm/ contractor by that name shall be
cancelled.
Page | 22
IV) QUALIFICATION INFORMATION & DETAILS OF APPLICANTS
(FORMS A TO D)
FORM “A”
Important:
1. Please type or handwrite in capital letters.
2. Attach copies of the supporting documents.
3. Please use additional sheets if required.
Name of the Bidder
e-mail address
Telephone number office
Telephone number office
Fax no.
Address 1
Address 2
City
Pin code
Year of Establishment
Status of the Firm (Proprietary/Partnership/
Pvt. Ltd./Pub. Ltd.) :
Names of the directors/Partners/proprietor
Name and address of the Bankers – 1
Name and address of the Bankers – 2
Name and address of the Bankers – 3
Registration number and date with Registrar
of Companies/Firms
PAN Card Number
Sales Tax Number
Service Tax Registration No.
Financial turnover during the last 3 years,
ending 31st March of the previous financial year
2015-2016
2015-2014
2014-2013
Request copies of the Balance sheet
Current solvency certificate from your Banker
Empanelment with the other Companies/PSUs
Field of activities
Main Activity
Detail Description and value of work done
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Page | 23
Financial arrangements for carrying out the works (Own arrangements &Fund based &
Non Fund based sanctioned limits).
III. The following certificates are to be enclosed.
(a) Tax deducted at source, certificates in respect of completion certificate issued other
than Govt./PSUs .
(b) Solvency from Bankers of Applicant.
Signature of Chartered
Accountant with Seal
Seal and Signature of
Applicant
Financial Analysis: Details to be furnished duly supported by figures in Balance Sheet /
Profit & Loss Account for the last three years duly certified by the Chartered Accountant,
as submitted by the applicant to the Income Tax Department (certified copies to be
attached).
Page | 24
FORM “B”
DETAILS OF ALL OF SIMILAR WORKS COMPLETED DURING THE LAST FIVE YEARS
S.
No.
Name of
Work/
Project &
Location
Owner of
the
Organisation
Value of the
work in Lakhs
(INR) at
Completion
Date of
Commencement
as per contract
Stipulated
date of
completion
Actual Date
of
Completion
Litigation/
Arbitration
pending/in
progress
with details
Name and
address /
telephone
number of
officer to whom
reference may
be made.
Page | 25
Remarks
FORM “C”
PROJECT UNDER EXECUTION OR AWARDED
name &
address
and
telephone
Name
No. of
of work
Value
Slow
officer to
/
of
Upto date progress whom
Project
work Date of
Stipulated percentage if any, & reference
S.
&
Owner or
in
commencement date of
of progress reasons may be
No. Location organization lakhs as per contract
completion of work
thereof made
Remarks
Page | 26
FORM “D”
DETAILS OF PLANT AND MACHINERY AVAILABLE WITH THE APPLICANT
SNO
NAME OF
EQUIPMENT
MAKE/ MODEL/
CAPACITY
QUANTITY
CONDITION
Page | 27
AFFIDAVIT
(TO BE SUBMITTED ON NON-JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF MINIMUM RS.10/-DULY CERTIFIED
BY NOTARY PUBLIC)
Affidavit of Mr.………………………………….S/o……………………… R/o …………………………………….
I, the deponent above named do hereby solemnly affirm and declare a under:
1. That I am the Proprietor/ Authorised signatory of M/s…………………………. having its Head
Office/ Regd. Office at……………………………………………………
2. That the information/ documents/ Experience certificates submitted by M/s……………………….
along with this Application to BIT MESRA are genuine and true and nothing has been concealed.
3. I shall have no objection in case BIT MESRA verifies them from issuing authority(ies).I shall also
have no objection in providing the original copy of the document(s), in case BIT MESRA demand so
for verification.
4. I hereby confirm that in case, any document, information &/Or certificate submitted by me
found to be incorrect/false/fabricated, BIT MESRA at its discretion may disqualify/ reject my
application for qualification out rightly and also debar me/M/s………………… from
participating in any future tenders/ PQ.
DEPONENT
I,…………………………………., the Proprietor/ Authorised signatory of M/s…………………………., do
hereby confirm that the contents of the above Affidavit are true to my knowledge and
nothing has been concealed there from and that no part of it is false.
Verified at ……………. this……. day of ……………...
DEPONENT
Page | 28
V) LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
[ON THE LETTER HEAD OF APPLICANT]
From:
To
BIT MESRA,
RANCHI
Sir,
Having examined the details given in Notice for Qualification and Prequalification
Application documents for the above work, we hereby submit our qualification and relevant
documents.
1. We hereby certify that all the statements made and information supplied in the
enclosed forms “A” to ‟D” and accompanying statements are true and correct.
2.
We have furnished all information and details necessary for qualification and have no
further pertinent information to supply.
3. We have submitted the requisite banker’s certificate/ performance reports and
authorize BIT MESRA or their representatives to approach individuals, employers, firms
and corporations to verify our submittals, competency and general reputation.
4. We hereby confirm that we have read and understood all the stipulations given in this
prequalification documents and the decision of BIT MESRA with regard to our
prequalification shall be final and binding on us.
5. We have submitted the following certificates in support of our meeting the minimum
qualifying criteria of completed work(s) specified in para 2.1 of Section 2 for having
successfully completed the following works:
NAME OF WORK CERTIFICATE FROM
1.
2.
3.
Enclosures:
Date of Submission
(Seal of Applicant)
(Signature of Applicant)
Page | 29
VOLUME 2
TENDER AND FINANCIAL BID
Page | 30
I).
TENDER FORM:
Archline Designs Pvt. Ltd.,
2112, Express Trade Towers-2,
Noida Expressway, Sector-132,
NOIDA, Delhi NCR
Dear Sirs,
Sub: tender document for new construction of annexe building and addition of floor in
main building (4th floor) with modification in existing main building (civil works and phe
works).
With reference to the tender invited by you for the above proposed work, I/we
write this after having:
a)
examined the designs, drawings, details, specifications, schedule of quantities,
instructions to bidders, draft agreement and the conditions of Contract annexed
thereto (here-in-after called the Contract Documents) relating to construction.
b)
Visited and examined the site of the proposed work and,
c)
Acquired the requisite information as affecting the tender.
I/We undersigned, hereby offer to construct the proposed work in strict
accordance with the Contract documents for the consideration to be calculated
in terms of the priced schedule of quantities.
I/We undertake to complete the whole of the works as per the attached
schedule from the date of issue of intimation by you that our tender has been
accepted and upon receiving possession of the site. I/We further undertake that
on failure subject to the conditions of the Contract relating to extension of time,
I/We shall pay the agreed `Liquidated Damages’ for the period during which the
work shall remain incomplete.
I/We hereby deposit with you as `Earnest Money’ of Rs.5,00,000/- (Rupees Five
Lacs only) carrying no interest and I/We do hereby agree that this sum shall be
forfeited in the event of the Employer accepting my/our tender and I/We fail to
take up the Contract when called upon to do so.
I/We further agree to the deposit of 5% of Contract value as PERFORMANCE
GUARANTEE (Security Deposit) within fourteen days of the award of the Contract
Page | 31
in the form of a Bank guarantee valid for the duration of the Contract period
until the end of date of completion of defects liability period.
I/We further agree to the deduction of 5% from the `Interim Payment’ towards
the `Retention Money’ which will be returned as per the relevant Clauses in the
agreement.
Yours faithfully,
Name of the partners of the firm
OR
Name of the persons having
Power-of-Attorney to sign the Contract.
Page | 32
II).
DRAFT AGREEMENT
ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT
Made this
Between
day of
20.........
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
(hereinafter called `The Employer’) on the one part
and
M/s ____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
(hereinafter called ‘The Contractor’) on the other part
WHEREAS the Employer is desirous of proposed construction of Extension of BIT
Mesra, Noida Campus – Civil & Plumbing works (hereinafter called `the Work).
And has caused Drawings and Schedule of Quantities showing and describing the
work to be done prepared by ArchLine Designs Pvt. Ltd., 2112, Express Trade
Towers-2, Sector-132, Noida .
AND WHEREAS the Contractor has supplied the Employer with a fully priced copy
of the said Schedule of Quantities (which copy is hereinafter referred to as “The
Contract Bills”) AND WHEREAS the said Drawings (hereinafter referred to as the
`Contract Drawings) and the Contract bills have been signed by or on behalf of
the parties hereto, AND WHEREAS the Contractor has deposited the sum of
Rs.____________(Rupees
_________________________________________________) with the Employer
as Bank Guarantee for the due performance of this Agreement.
Page | 33
NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH AS FOLLOWS:
1.
In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings
as are respectively assigned to them under Section `Definitions in the General
Conditions of Tender Document issued by the Employer and accepted by the
Contractor while submitting his bid dated _____________________.
2. a)
The following documents included in the tender bid shall be
deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement
along with amendments hereinafter:
i)
Notice Inviting Tender
ii)
Tender Form
iii)
Contract agreement and General conditions of Contract
iv)
Special Conditions
v)
Specifications
vi)
Schedule of Quantities and Rates
vii)
Tender drawings
viii)
Construction Programme
b)
The following documents shall also be deemed to form and to be read
and construed as part of this Agreement and shall be
complementary
to
one another.
i)
Letter
No.__________________
tenders.
dated_____________
inviting
ii)
Letter
No._______________
dated___________________
Contractor submitting the tender bid.
iii)
_____________________
iv)
Work Order No._______________ dated _______________
v)
Letter of Intent no. ......................... dated .................................
of
Page | 34
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED AS FOLLOWS:
1.
For the consideration hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor will upon
and subject to the conditions annexed carryout and complete
the
work shown upon the Contract drawings, specifications and described by
or referred to in the Contract Bills and in the said conditions.
2.
The Employer will pay the Contractor the sum of Rs.________ (Rupees
____________________________) (hereinafter referred to as the
Contract sum) or such other sum as shall become payable hereunder at
the times and in the manner specified in the said conditions.
3.
The term “the Consultant” the said conditions shall mean the said
ArchLine Designs Pvt. Ltd. or in the event of his death or ceasing to be
the Consultant for the purpose of this Contract, such other person as the
Employer shall nominate for that purpose, not being a person to whom
the Contractor shall object for reasons considered to be sufficient by an
arbitrator appointed in accordance with the said conditions. Provided
always that no person subsequently appointed to be the Consultant
under this Contract shall be entitled to disregard or overrule any
certificate or opinion or decision or approval or instruction given or
expressed by the Consultant for the time being.
4.
The said Conditions and appendix thereto shall be read and construed as
forming part of this Agreement, and the parties hereto shall respectively
abide by, submit themselves to the conditions and perform the
agreements on their parts respectively in such conditions contained.
AS WITNESS our hands this _________________ day of .....................
Signed by the said
in the presence of
Employer
Witness
Name :
Address
:
Signed by the said
in the presence of
Witness
Name
:
Contractor
Address
:
Page | 35
III)
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
1.
DEFINITIONS
The following terms shall have the meaning hereby assigned to them except
where the context otherwise requires:
a)
Employer means authorised representative of Birla Institute of Technology,
Mesra, Ranchi.
b)
Consultant shall be the person for the time being or from time to time duly
appointed by the Employer to act as `Consultant’.
c)
Contractor, shall mean the successful bidder to whom the Contract has been
awarded.
d)
Sub-Contractor shall mean the person named in the Contract for any part of the
work or any person to whom any part of the Contract has been sublet with the
consent in writing by the Consultant and the legal Representative of BIT Mesra,
successors and assigns of such person.
e)
Contract, shall mean and include the following:
f)
i)
Notice Inviting Tender
ii)
Tender Form
iii)
General Conditions of Contract
iv)
Specifications
v)
Schedule of Quantities
vi)
Drawings
vii)
List of Makes
viii)
Any other letters issued to complete the contract agreement.
Site, shall mean the actual place in, over or under which work is to be done,
allotted by the Employer for Contractor’s use.
Page | 36
g)
Work of the Contractor shall also include materials or labour or both.
h)
Contract Price shall mean the sums referred to in the formal agreement, if any or
the work order.
2.
ASSIGNMENT AND SUB-LETTING
2.1
Assignment
The Contractor shall not assign the Contract or any part thereof or any benefit or
therein or hereunder without the written permission of the
Employer/Consultant.
2.2
Sub-letting
The Contractor shall not sub-let the whole of the Contract. The Contractor shall
not sublet any part of the works without the written consent of the Consultant
and the Employer, and such consent if given, shall not relieve the Contractor
from any liability or obligation under the Contract and the Contractor shall be
responsible of the acts, defaults and neglects of the sub-Contractor, his agents,
employees or workmen as fully as if they were the acts defaults or neglects of
the Contractor or his agents, servants, or workmen.
3.
DRAWINGS
3.1
Issue of Drawings
Three sets of drawings approved for construction will be issued to the Contractor
progressively during the Contract period and the Contractor shall arrange for the
execution of the works and the procurement of materials accordingly. The
Contractor shall give adequate notice in writing to the Consultant or his
Representative for any further drawings or specification that may be required for
the execution of the works or otherwise under the Contract.
3.2
Copies of Drawings to be kept at site
One copy of the drawings furnished to the Contractor as aforesaid shall be kept
at the site and the same shall at all reasonable times be available for inspection
and use by the Consultant/Employer or his Representative and by any other
person authorised by the Consultant in writing. The Contractor may request for
additional copies on payment of Rs.150/- per drawing.
Page | 37
3.3
Issue of further drawings and instructions
The Employer/Consultant shall have full power and authority to supply to the
Contractor from time to time through his Representative, during the progress of
the works such further drawings and instructions as shall be necessary for the
purpose of proper and adequate execution and maintenance of the works and
the Contractor shall carry out and be bound by the same.
3.4
Ownership of Drawings
All drawings supplied to the Contractor are deemed to be the property of the
Consultant. The Contractor agrees both on behalf of himself and his employees,
and sub-Contractors, whether during or after completion of the Contract not to
divulge or use, except for the purpose of this Contract, any information
contained in the drawings.
3.5
Execution as per Drawings
The Contractor must not vary or deviate from the drawings in any respect while
executing the work or executing any extra work of any kind whatsoever unless
advised by the Employer/Consultant.
3.6
Plans and drawings to be submitted by the Contractor
The Contractor shall submit the following information in triplicate to Consultant
for approval within the time stipulated against each item below:
a)
A general tentative layout plan of construction plant and equipment for the
execution of work within 7 days of the award of work.
b)
Drawings or prints showing the location of major plants and other facilities which
he proposes to put up at the site, including any changes in the general layout, at
least 7 days prior to the commencement of the respective work.
c)
Layout and details of temporary works that the Contractor wants to carry out to
fulfil his obligation under the Contract.
Within 7 days the Consultant will give their approval/comments sufficient to
proceed with the work or objections/instructions to the Contractor based on
which the drawings shall be revised and re-submitted for approval by the
Consultant.
Page | 38
4.
All these plans and drawings submitted by the Contractor and approved by the
Consultant shall become part of the Contract.
GENERAL OBLIGATIONS
4.1
The Contractor shall inspect and examine the site and its surroundings, and shall
satisfy himself before submitting his tender, as to the nature of the ground, form
and nature of the site, the quantities and nature of work and materials required
for the completion of the works, the means of access to the site, the local labour
conditions, the accommodation he may require and in general shall obtain all
necessary information as to risks, contingencies and other circumstances which
may influence or affect his tender.
4.2
Sufficiency of Tender
The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself before tendering as to
the correctness and sufficiency of his tender for the works and of the rates and
prices stated in the priced Schedule of quantities and the schedule of rates and
prices, if any. The tender rates and prices shall cover all his obligations under the
Contract and all matters and things necessary, or the proper completion and
maintenance of the work.
4.3
Clarification before submitting tenders
Should the Contractor notice any discrepancy or error in the statement made or
quantities or units shown against items, he shall immediately bring to the notice
of the authorities and obtain the clarification before submitting the tender. The
tender shall be based on such clarifications received and shall be recorded as
such in the covering letter to the tender, failing which the Employer shall have
the right to ask the Contractor to execute the work according to the statement
made or quantities or units shown in the tender, without any compensation.
4.4
Rates quoted for finished work
The rates quoted in the tender by the Contractor must be for the finished work
as per the drawings and specifications.
4.5
Location of work
Unless specifically mentioned in the item, the work described therein may be at
any location or elevation.
Page | 39
4.6
The tender shall remain open for acceptance for a period as stated in the
Appendix to Tender.
4.7
Commencement of work:
The Contractor shall commence the work at site immediately after being advised
by the Employer of the acceptance of the tender and shall proceed with the
same with due expedition.
4.8
Programme of work
Soon after the award of Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the
Employer/Consultant for his approval a programme to match with the planned
completion of the whole job showing the order of procedure and method in
which he proposes to carry out the works and shall whenever required by the
Employer/Consultant or his Representative furnish further detailed programme
and particulars in writing of the Contractor’s arrangements for carrying out the
work and of the construction plant and temporary works which the Contractor
intends to supply, use or construct a the case may be. The submission and
approval by the Consultant or his Representative of such programmes or
particulars shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities
under the Contract.
4.9
Contractor’s Employees
The Contractor shall provide and employ sufficient manpower and equipment at
site in connection with the execution and maintenance works:
a)
Only such technical assistants as are skilled and experienced in their respective
callings and such sub-agents, foremen and leading hands as are competent to
give proper supervision to the work they are required to supervise and,
b)
Such skilled, semi-skilled and un-skilled labour as is necessary for the proper and
timely execution and maintenance of works.
4.10
Removal of Workmen
The Employer/Consultant shall be at liberty to object to and require the
Contractor to remove forthwith from the works any person employed by the
Contractor in or about the execution or maintenance of the works who in the
opinion of the Employer/Consultant to be undesirable and such person shall not
be again employed upon the works without the written permission of the
Page | 40
4.11
Consultant. Any person so removed from the works shall be replaced by the
Contractor without delay by a competent substitute approved by the Consultant.
Misconduct of Employee of the Contractor/poor workmanship shall be a valid
reason for suspension of the Contract by Employer/Consultant and in that case,
no compensation of whatsoever nature shall be paid to the Contractor.
Communications to be in writing
All references, communications, correspondences made by the Employer, the
Consultant, and their Representative or the Contractor concerning the works
shall be in writing and no reference, communication, or complaint which is not in
writing, shall be recognized.
4.12
Occupation and use of land
No land or building belonging to or in the possession of the Employer shall be
occupied by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not use, or be allowed to use,
the site for any purpose other than that for executing the works.
4.13
Construction of site shed
Any site shed, proposed to be temporarily constructed by the Contractor for his
office work, storage of materials etc. shall conform to the standard sketch, or to
the plan approved by the Consultant. Permission for the construction of such
shed shall be obtained in writing.
4.14
Materials, tools and plant
All materials required for the execution of the works other than those
mentioned in the Notice Inviting Tender shall be supplied by the Contractor.
Materials so supplied shall have the approval of the Consultant before used on
the works. All the rejected materials shall be removed at once from the site of
work at the Contractor’s own cost. The Contractor shall supply all tools, tackles,
and equipment like compressors, concrete mixers, vibrators, pumps, welding or
pneumatic tools, tar boilers etc. required for the execution of the works.
4.15
Tollages etc.
The Contractor shall pay all tollages, royalties, rent and other payments or
compensations, if any, of for getting stone, gravel, sand, clay and all other
materials required for the works.
Page | 41
4.16
Setting out
The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the
works and for the correctness of the position, levels, dimensions, and alignment
of all parts of the works and for the provision of all necessary instruments,
appliances, and labour in connection therewith. If any time during the progress
of the works any error shall appear or arise in the position, level dimensions or
alignment of any part of the works, the Contractor on being required so to do by
the Consultant or his Representative, shall at his own cost rectify such error to
the satisfaction of the Consultant or his Representative. The checking of any
setting out or of any line or level by the Consultant or his Representative shall
not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the correctness
thereof. The Contractor shall provide all necessary instruments, appliances, and
labour required by the Consultant or his Representative for checking, if any, of
the setting out. The Contractor shall carefully protect and preserve all bench
marks, site levels, pegs and other things used in setting out the works. The rate
quoted for the work shall also include the cost of all reference and level pillars
and their dismantling when no longer required.
4.17
Damage to persons and property
The Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Employer against all
losses and claims for injuries or damages to any person or property whatsoever
which may arise out of or in consequence of the construction and maintenance
of works and against all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges,
expenses, whatsoever in respect thereof in relation thereto.
4.18
Co-operation with other Agencies
The Contractor shall co-operate with the work of other agencies or contractors
that may be employed or engaged by the Employer and as far as it relates to the
Contractor’s work. The sequence of work shall be so arranged that the works of
other agencies also progress simultaneously.
4.19
Barricading around excavated trenches etc.
The Contractor shall at his own cost provide around excavation, temporary
barricading with pipes with warning signals during day and night and shall
maintain it so long the trenches are not filled up. Similar barricades shall also be
provided at all dismantling work, erection of structural, sheeting work etc. No
extra claim shall be entertained for providing, maintaining and removing such
barricades.
Page | 42
4.20
Protection of underground services
The Contractor must take all precautionary measures to protect the
underground and other service lines viz., cables, water and sewer lines etc. and
observe any specific instructions which may be given in this regard by the
Consultant.
4.21
De-watering trenches and pits
The tendered rates shall always be deemed to have taken into account the cost
of removal of silt and materials that may slip in the trench and pit and dewatering the trenches or pits of water accumulated or collected through seepage
or subsoil water or rain water. The Contractor shall in no case be entitled to
claim any extra amount for the above work. The Contractor shall remain
prepared with necessary pumps and equipment for de-watering the trenches or
pits so as to avoid unnecessary delay and possible damage to the property etc.
4.22
Work in or around operating plant or offices etc.
Where the work is being carried out in or around an operating plant where the
plant must run uninterrupted, the Contractor shall work only at specified places
and at times mutually arranged between the Contractor and the Consultant.
Similar arrangement must be made while executing works inside the offices,
buildings etc. without causing disturbance to the office work. For this the work
may be required to be done during off-hours and Sundays. No extra payment on
this account will be allowed beyond the rates quoted for doing work in the
manner described above.
4.23
Work in shifts and off-days
The Contractor shall work in one or more shifts as also on Sundays and off days
to complete the work in time, if so required by the Consultant for which the
Employer shall not be liable to pay any extra.
4.24
Site Order Book
The Contractor shall maintain a Site Order Book always available at site for the
Consultant or his Representative to record instructions. The Contractor muse see
that the instructions noted therein are properly carried out.
4.25
Delay in obtaining materials supplied by the Employer
Page | 43
If the Employer has undertaken to supply any material specified in the special
conditions at rates and conditions cited therein, the Contractor shall keep
himself in touch with day to day position regarding the supply of materials from
the Employer and so adjust the progress of the works that labour may not
remain idle nor there be any other claim due to or arising from delay in obtaining
the materials.
4.26
Record of materials supplied by the Employer
The Contractor shall maintain an account of different materials obtained from
the Employer for executing the works under the Contract. The
Employer/Consultant shall have the power to check the position of materials at
all times and verify stocks as and when desired.
4.27
Safe storage of materials
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of materials supplied by
the Employer for execution of the works. Surplus materials or materials lost or
damaged or unaccounted for or made unserviceable by the Contractor shall be
charged at one and a half times the prevailing market price.The contractor will
obtain the CAR (contractors All risk policy)for the duration of work plus the
defect liability period which shall be 12 months from the date of completion.
4.28
Transport of materials
Unless otherwise specified all the materials supplied by the Employer shall be
transported by the Contractor from the Employer’s store/yard to the site of work
at no extra cost.
4.29
Site to be kept clear
The surplus spoil and dismantled debris shall be removed to a place as directed
by the Consultant and stacked, levelled and dressed as directed.
4.30
Conflict in meaning of between schedule of rates and specifications
The schedule of rates shall be read in conjunction with the specifications, and in
the event of conflict in meaning between the two the corresponding item in the
schedule shall always have precedence over the specifications.
Page | 44
4.31
Conflict in meaning between general conditions of Contract and the terms and
conditions
In case of any inconsistency between the General conditions of Contract and the
Special Conditions, the Special Conditions of Contract shall have precedence over
the General Conditions.
5.
LABOUR
5.1
Labour Rules
In respect of all labour directly or indirectly employed on the works by the
Contractor, the Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Contract
labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970, Minimum Wages Act 1948, Payment
of Wages Act 1936 and any amendments thereof and all legislations and rules of
the State and/or Central Government or other local authority, framed from time
to time, governing the protection of health, sanitary arrangements, wages,
welfare and safety for labour employed on building and construction works and
for bonus, retirement benefits, retrenchment/lay off, compensation and all other
matters involving liabilities of Employers to employees. The rules and the other
statutory obligations with regard to fair wages, welfare and safety measures,
maintenance of register etc. will be deemed to be part of the Contractor’s
obligation under the Contract. The contractor will obtain labour .........from the
appropriate authority before commencing the work. Before Commencing the
work, the contractor will obtain CAR policy covering the ........and material upto
the duration of the defect liability period (date of virtual completion plus twelve
months) and workmen compensation policy for the duration of the work.
5.2
Reporting accident of labour
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all employees and/or
workers employed or engaged by him on and in connection with the works and
shall forthwith report all cases of accidents to any of them, however caused and
whenever occurring to the authorities concerned required as per law and to the
Employer/Consultant or his Representative and shall make every arrangement to
render all possible assistance and aid to the victim of the accident.
5.3
Provision of workmen’s compensation act
The Contractor shall at all times indemnify and keep indemnified the Employer
against all claims for compensation under the provisions of the workmen’s
compensation act 1923 or any other law for the time being in force by or in
Page | 45
respect of any workmen employed by the Contractor in carrying out the Contract
and against all costs and expenses or penalties incurred by the Employer in
connection therewith. In every case in which by virtue of the provisions of the
said act, the Employer is obliged to pay compensation to a workmen employed
by the Contractor in executing the works, the Employer shall recover from the
Contractor the amount of the compensation so paid and without prejudice to
the rights of the Employer under the said act. The Employer shall be at liberty to
recover such amount or any part thereof by deducting it from the security
deposit or from any due by the Employer to the Contractor, whether under this
Contract or otherwise without prejudice to any other remedy that may be
available to the Employer in law. The Employer shall not be bound to contest any
claim made against it under the said Act, except on the written request of the
Contractor and upon his giving to the Employer full security for all costs for
which the Employer might become liable on consequence of contesting such
claim.
5.4
Accident or injury to workmen
The Employer shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages or
compensation payable at law in respect or in consequence of any accident or
injury to any workmen or other person in the employment of the Contractor or
his sub-Contractors, and the Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified
the Employer against all such damages and compensation and against all claims,
demands, proceedings costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect
thereof or in relation thereto.
5.5
Provision of mines Act
The Contractor shall observe and perform all the provisions of the Mines Act
1952 where applicable or any statutory modifications thereof and shall
indemnify and keep indemnified the Employer from and against any claim under
the said Act.
5.6
Preservation of peace
The Contractor shall take requisite precautions to prevent any riotous or
unlawful behaviour by or amongst his workmen and/or others employed on the
works by him, for the preservation of peace and protection of the inhabitants
and security of property in the neighbourhood of the works.
Page | 46
5.7
Age limit of labour
The age limit for employment of labour shall be in strict accordance with the
existing labour legislations.
5.8
Return of labour employed
The Contractor, if required by the Consultant, shall submit return in detail in such
form and at such interval as the Consultant may prescribe showing number of
different classes of labour employed on the works from time to time by the
Contractor.
5.9
Observance by sub-Contractors
The Contractor shall be responsible for the observance of the provisions of
aforesaid Clauses by the sub-Contractors employed by him in the execution of
the Contract.
6.
MATERIAL TESTS AND WORKMANSHIP:
6.1
Quality of materials, workmanship and tests
All materials and workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the
Contract and in accordance with the Consultant’s or his Representative’s
instructions and shall be subjected from time to time such tests as the
Consultant or his Representative may direct at the place of manufacturer or
laboratory or on the site at all or any of such places. The Contractor shall provide
such assistance instruments, machines, labour and materials as are normally
required for examining measuring, and testing any work and the quality, weight
or quantity of any material used and shall supply samples of materials before
incorporation in the works for approval as may be required by the Consultant or
his Representative.
Contractor shall arrange for compression testing machine at site for testing of
concrete cubes/bricks etc. However this provision does not bind the Consultant
or his Representative for getting the testing done from outside at Contractor’s
expense.
6.2
Construction of ‘mock-ups’ or samples of work
Page | 47
a)
The Contractor shall construct ‘mock-ups’ or samples of work as laid down in the
Contract or as instructed by the Consultant. Such mock-ups or samples of work,
after approval by the Employer/Consultant shall serve as the standards to be
achieved in the final construction.
b)
Mock-up room: Contractor has to prepare a mock-up room for the items
selected by Client/Consultant. The finishing of all items shall be approved, so
that desired finishing/quality shall be maintained in other rooms as well.
6.3
Cost of samples
All samples shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own cost.
6.4
Cost of tests
The cost of making any test as per specifications shall be borne by the Contractor
and Contractor shall arrange for all requirements like cubes etc. to take the
samples by Employer/Consultant.
6.5
Inspection of operation
The Employer/Consultant or his Representative or any person authorised by him
shall at all times have access to the works and to the site and to all workshops
and places where work is being prepared from where materials, manufactured
articles or machinery are being obtained for the works and the Contractor shall
afford every facility/assistance in obtaining the right to such access.
6.6
Examination of work before covering up
No work shall be covered up or put out of view without the approval of the
Employer/Consultant or their Representative and the Contractor shall afford full
opportunity to the Consultant or his Representative to examine and measure any
work which is about to be covered up or put out of view and to examine
foundations before permanent work is placed thereon. The Contractor shall give
due notice to the Consultant’s Representative wherever any such work or
foundations is or are ready or about to be ready for examination and the
Consultant’s Representative shall without reasonable delay, unless he considers
it unnecessary and advises the Contractor accordingly, attend for the purpose of
examining and measuring such work.
Page | 48
6.7
Uncovering and making openings
The Contractor shall uncover any part or parts of the works or make openings in
or through the same as the Consultant may from time to time direct and shall
reinstate and make good such part or parts to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
If any such part or parts have been covered up or put out of view after
compliance with the requirements of clause 6.5 hereof and are found to be
executed in accordance with the Contract the expenses for uncovering making
openings in or through, reinstating and making good the same shall be borne by
the Employer, but in any other case all such expenses shall be borne by the
Contractor and shall be recoverable from him by the Employer and deducted by
the Employer from any moneys due or which may become due to the
Contractor, without prejudice to any other remedy that may be available to the
Employer in law.
6.8
Removal of improper work and materials
The Employer/Consultant or his Representative shall during the progress of the
works have power to order in writing from time to time:
a)
The removal from the site within such time or times as may be specified in the
order of any material which in the opinion of the Consultant or his
Representative is not in accordance with the Contract.
b)
The substitution of proper and suitable materials.
c)
The removal and proper re-execution (notwithstanding a previous test thereof or
interim payment thereof) of a work which in respect of materials or
workmanship is not in the opinion of the Consultant or his Representative in
accordance with the Contract.
6.9
Suspension of work
The Contractor shall on the written order of the Employer suspend the progress
of the works or any part thereof for such time or times and in such manner as
the Employer may consider necessary and shall, during such suspensions,
properly protect and secure the work, so far as is necessary in the opinion of the
Employer.
7.
TIME OF COMPLETION, AND TAKING OVER:
Page | 49
7.1
Possession of site
Save in so far as the Contract may prescribe the extent of portions of the site of
which the Contractor is to be given possession from time to time and the order
in which such portions will be available to him and subject to any requirement in
the Contract as to the order in which the work shall be executed, the Employer
shall give to the Contractor possession as may be required to enable the
Contractor to commence and proceed with the works in accordance with such
reasonable proposals of the Contractor as he will make in writing to the
Employer/Consultant and shall, from time to time as the work proceeds, give the
Contractor possession of such further portions of the site as may be required to
enable the Contractor to proceed with construction of the works in accordance
with the said programme or proposal.
7.2
Time of completion
The whole of the works shall be completed within the time stipulated or within
such extended time as has been allowed in the Appendix to Tender and under
clause 7.3
7.3
Extension of time of completion
Should the amount of extra or additional work of any kind or changes in scope of
work or other special circumstances of any kind whatsoever which may occur, be
such as to fairly justify the Contractor’s request for extension of time for the
completion of the works the Contractor shall submit within two weeks of such
occurrence a written request to the Consultant with full substantiation and
support document his entitlement for extension of time. The Consultant shall
determine the amount of such extension and shall intimate the Contractor in
writing. Provided that the Consultant is not bound to take into account any extra
or additional work has been commenced or such circumstances have arisen, and
the Contractor has not submitted to the Consultant full and detailed particulars
for request to extension of time to which he may consider to be justified.
7.4
Extension of completion
weather/accidents etc.
time
due
to
govt.
Orders/fire/strike/bad
If in the opinion of the Employer/Consultant the progress of the work has at any
time been delayed due to causes beyond the control of the Contractor, then the
time of completion of the work may be extended for such reasonable time as the
Consultant may decide upon written request of the Contractor in writing, and if
such request has been made within two weeks of the start of occurrence of such
incident.
Page | 50
7.5
Work treated as complete
The works shall not be treated as complete until:
i)
The site is clear from all materials, site sheds, debris etc. and the
Employer/Consultant is satisfied with the job done by the Contractor.
ii)
The Contractor has submitted a reconciliation statement regarding the stores
received from the Employer, and all the surplus and salvaged materials are
returned to the Employer’s stores, and the Employer has agreed to the same.
iii)
All equipment, tools, plants etc. taken from the Employer have been returned by
the Contractor.
iv)
Any other material, taken on loan/transfer from other agency has been returned
by the Contractor.
v)
All power and water supply connections taken for the execution of the works
have been disconnected by the Contractor.
vi)
Rectification of any damage done by the Contractor to the work executed has
been satisfactorily done by the Contractor.
7.6
Taking over
After completion of works or of any substantial part of the works before the
completion of the whole of the works if the Contract provides for partial
completion, the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing who within 15
days of receipt of the notice shall issue a ‘Completion Certificate’ with respect to
any substantial part of the works which has been both completed to the
satisfaction of the Consultant and occupied or used by the Employer or refuse to
issue the same stating the reasons thereof in writing.
If the Consultant issues reasons for not issuing a ‘Completion Certificate’, the
Contractor shall immediately agree a time schedule for remedying such reasons
and shall accordingly remedy the same. Three days before such remedy is likely
to be done, the Contractor shall again notify the Consultant in writing who within
7 days of receipt of the notice shall issue a ‘Completion Certificate’ if the remedy
has been done to the satisfaction of the Consultant, or again refuse to issue the
same stating the reasons thereof in writing. This process shall continue until such
certificate is issued by the Consultant.
Page | 51
When any such certificate is given in respect of a part of the works, such part
shall be considered as completed for the purposes of taking over and
computation of the period of maintenance of such part of the works are
certified. The works in whole or part shall not, however, be treated as completed
for the purpose of other relevant clauses hereof unless and until the provisions
of Clauses 7.5 hereof are fully complied with.
7.7
Maintenance (defect liability period):
For a period stated in the Appendix to Tender as the Defect Liability Period, the
Contractor’s liability shall be to replace the defective parts, rectify/reconstruct
the defective work that may develop in his own or his sub-contractor’s Works,
approved by the Employer/Consultant arising solely from faulty material or
workmanship or for any other reason.
If it is necessary for the Contractor to rectify/reconstruct any defective portions
of the work under the Contract, the provision of this condition shall apply to the
portions of work so replaced or renewed until the expiration of three months
from the date of such replacement or renewal or until the end of the above
mentioned period of six months, which ever may be later. If any defects be not
remedied within a reasonable time the Employer may proceed to do the work at
Contractor’s risk and expense, but without prejudice to any other rights which
the Employer may have against the Contractor in respect of such defects.
The Contractor shall bear the cost of such repairs/rectifications carried out on his
behalf at site.
Immediately upon expiry of the maintenance period the Employer shall issue a
final certificate indicating that the Contractor has completed his obligation under
the Contract.
The decision of Consultant regarding workmanship shall be binding on the
Contractor and the Contractor has to abide by the decision.
The deduction of expenditure for rectification shall be made from the security
deposit of the Contractor in case Contractor does not carry out the remedies in a
reasonable time mutually agreed between the Consultant and the Contract and
in case of failure to do so, as decided by the Consultant.In case this amount falls
short of expenses incurred then the employer will be at liberty to encash
performance guarantee.
Page | 52
8.
TERMINATION OF CONTRACT
8.1
Termination of Contract
If the Contractor has abandoned the Contract or has failed to proceed with the
work with due diligence or the progress on any particular item or items is slow or
he has failed to execute the work in accordance with the terms and conditions of
the Contract, is persistently or flagrantly neglecting to carry out his obligation
under the Contract, then it shall be lawful for the Employer to terminate the
Contract forthwith under written notice and to proceed with the balance of the
work through any other agencies. During the course of execution of the job, in
case the Contractor has done any substandard work, he shall be asked in writing
to dismantle and re-do the same at his own expenses. If the Contractor fails to
comply with the above instructions immediately, then the Employer shall
proceed with the above rectification work, through another agency or agencies.
Similarly, if the Contractor goes slowly on any particular item or items of work,
the Employer shall have the right to execute these items through another agency
or agencies, including its own department at the cost and risk of the Contractor.
8.2
Back charging the Contractor
Extra cost and expenses incurred for completing the work or balance work or
carrying out the rectification of any work as mentioned above through another
agency or agencies including its own department shall be debited to Contractor’s
account and shall be recovered from any money due or that may subsequently
become due to the Contractor without prejudice to any other remedy that may
be available to the Employer in law.In case the amount of deposit falls short of
expenses, the employer is at liberty to encash the guarantee.
9.
ALTERTATIONS, ADDITIONS, AND OMISSIONS:
9.1
Variations:
The Employer/Consultant shall be entitled to make any variation of the quality or
quantity of the works or any part thereof that may, in his opinion, be necessary
and for that purpose, or if for any other reason it shall, in his opinion be
desirable, he shall have power to order the Contractor to do and the Contractor
shall do any of the following:
a)
Increase or decrease the quantity of any work included in the Contract.
b)
Omit any such work.
Page | 53
c)
d)
Change the character or quality of kind of any such work.
Change the levels, lines position and dimensions of any part of the works and,
e)
Execute additional work of any kind necessary for the completion of the works,
and no such variation shall in any way initiate or invalidate the Contract but the
value, if any, of all such variations shall be taken into account in ascertaining the
amount of the Contract Price.
9.2
Order for variations to be in writing
No such variation shall be made by the Contractor without an order in writing of
the Consultant, provided that no order in writing shall be required for increase or
decrease in the quantity of any item of work where such increase or decrease is
the result of the actual quantities exceeding or being less than those stated in
the Schedule of quantities which are estimates. In such cases, the Contractor
shall be paid only for the actual quantity of work done as certified by the
Consultant at the accepted unit item rates and no compensation shall be
allowed. Provided also that if for any reason the Consultant shall consider it
desirable to give any such order verbally, the Contractor shall comply with such
order but it must be followed by confirmation in writing of such verbal order
given by the Consultant, which shall be deemed to be an order in writing within
the meaning of these clauses.
9.3
Extra Items
Please refer Clause No.1.26
9.4
Rebate/extra over original item
If there is a deviation in the specification of particular item of the tender,
rebate/extra over the quoted rate shall be generally derived as follows :
For items not covered in the schedule, rebate/extra shall be derived based on
observation/analysis of labour and materials involved in such items. Overheads
plus profit to be calculated at 15%.
9.5
Items of ad hoc nature
The Contractor shall procure necessary materials and carry out miscellaneous
work of ad hoc nature specifically required, with necessary tools and tackles as
may arise during execution of the Contract. The actual quantum of work shall be
certified and settled by the Consultant and payment for the same shall be
decided by the Employer/Consultant.
Page | 54
9.5
Claims
The Contractor shall send to the Consultant’s/Employer’s Representative an
account, giving full and detailed particulars with proper analysis, of all claims for
any additional expense to which the Contractor may consider himself entitled
and of all extra items of work ordered by the Consultant, which he has executed,
within one month of commencement of execution of such work, and no claim for
payment for any such work will be considered which has not been included in
such particulars. Provided always that the Employer/Consultant shall be entitled
to authorise payment to be made for any such work notwithstanding the
Contractor’s failure to comply with this condition, if the Contractor has at the
earliest practicable opportunity notified the Employer/Consultant in writing that
he intends to make a claim for such work.
10.0
MEASUREMENTS:
10.1
Quantities.
The quantities set out in the Schedule of quantities are the estimated quantities
of the work. They are not to be taken as the actual and correct quantities of the
works to be executed by the Contractor in fulfilment of his obligation under the
Contract.
10.2
Works to be measured
The Consultant shall, except as otherwise stated, ascertain and determine by
measurement the value in terms of the Contract. He shall when he requires any
part or parts of the works to be measured, give notice to the Contractor, who
shall forthwith attend or send a qualified agent to assist the Consultant or his
Representative in making such measurement, and shall furnish all particulars
required by either of them. Should the Contractor not attend or omit to send
such agent then the Consultant shall proceed with the measurements and they
shall be taken to be correct and as if they were taken jointly. If after examination
of such measurements, records or drawings, the Contractor does not agree to
the same or does not sign the same as agreed, they shall nevertheless be taken
to be correct, unless the Contractor shall within fourteen days of same being
sent to the Contractor, notify the Consultant in writing of the respects in which
such records and drawings are claimed by him to be incorrect. Within fourteen
days of receiving such notification, the Consultant will convey his decision in
writing to the Contractor which shall be final and binding upon the Contractor.
Page | 55
10.3
Method of measurement
The works shall be measured net in accordance to IS: 1200 (all parts),
notwithstanding any general or local custom, except where otherwise specifically
described or prescribed in the Contract.
10.4
Provisional sums
“Provisional Sum” means a sum include in the Contract and so designated in the
Schedule of quantities for execution of works or the supply of goods, material or
services or for contingencies, which sum may be used, in whole, or in part or not
at all, at the discretion of the Consultant. The Contract price shall include only
such amounts in respect of the work, supply or services to which provisional
sums relate as the Consultant shall approve or determine.
The Contractor shall when required by the Consultant, produce all quotations,
invoices, vouchers, and accounts or receipts in connection with expenditure in
respect of provisional sums.
11.
SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES:
11.1
Matter to be settled by Employer
All disputes and differences of any kind whatsoever arising out of or in
connection with the Contract, whether during the progress of the works or after
their completion shall be referred by the Contractor to the Employer and the
Employer shall within a reasonable time after their presentation make and notify
decisions thereon in writing.
The decisions, directions, clarifications, measurements, drawings and certificates
with respect to any matter the decision for which is specially provided for by
these or other special conditions to be given and made by the Employer or by
the Consultant on behalf of the Employer are matters which are referred to
hereinafter as Expected matters and shall be final and binding upon the
Contractor and shall not be set aside on account of non-observance of any
formality, any omission delay or error in proceeding in or about the same or on
any other ground or for any reason and shall be without Appeal.
11.2
In the event of any dispute or difference between the parties hereto as to the
construction or operation of this Contract, or the respective rights and liabilities
of the parties on any matter in question, dispute or difference on any account or
as to the withholding by the Employer of any certificate to which the Contractor
may claim to be entitled to or if the Employer fails to make a decision within a
Page | 56
reasonable time, then and in any such case, but except in any of the Excepted
matters referred to in the above clause, the Contractor after 90 days of his
presenting his final claim on the disputed matters, may demand in writing that
the dispute or difference be referred to arbitration. Such demand for arbitration
shall specify the matters which are in question, dispute or difference, and only
such dispute or difference other than Excepted Matters of which the demand
has been made and no other dispute or difference shall be referred to the
arbitration of an officer to be nominated with the consent of both the parties
and the provisions of the Indian Arbitration Act and Reconciliation Act 1996, for
the time being in force or of any other Act of the Legislature passed in
substitution thereof or modification thereof and for the time being in force shall
apply to such arbitration.
11.3
Arbitration
The Contractor shall not except with the consent in writing of the Employer, or
the Consultant, in any way delay the carrying out of the work by reason of any
such matter, question or dispute being referred to arbitration but shall proceed
with the work with all due diligence and shall until the decision of the arbitration
is given, abide by the decision of the Consultant and no award of the arbitrator
shall relieve the Contractor of his obligation to adhere strictly to the Consultant’s
instructions with the regard to the actual carrying out of the work except as
specifically affected by such award.
12.
NOTICES:
12.1
Service of notice on Contractor
All certificates, notices or written orders to be given by the Employer or by the
Consultant to the Contractor under the terms of the Contract shall be served by
sending by Registered Post or delivering the same to the Contractor’s place of
business or delivering the same to the Contractor’s Representative or such other
address as the Contractor shall notify for this purpose.
12.2
Service of notice on Employer
All notices to be given to the Employer under the terms of the Contract shall be
served by sending by Registered Post or delivering the same to the Employer’s
address.
Page | 57
IV)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CIVIL WORKS):
PREAMBLE TO SPECIFICATIONS
These specifications shall be read in conjunction with the conditions of contract and the
drawings. Matters referred to, shown or described in one are not necessarily repeated
in the other. These specifications are comprehensive and may exceed the requirements
of this project. Any ambiguity between the General Specifications, the Bill of quantities
and contract drawings, shall be referred to the Consultant for clarification not later than
10 days before the date fixed for delivery of Tenders. Any ambiguity may be referred to
the Consultant after signing of the contract and Consultant shall give a ruling which shall
prevail. No claim for additional cost due to above, however, will be entertained.
Notwithstanding the sub-division of the specification into various headings, every part of
it is to be deemed supplementary to every other part and is to be read with it, so far as
it may be practicable so to do, or when the context so admits. In these specifications,
reference is made to the Indian Standards and these references shall be deemed to
include the latest editions or issue of standards, specifications or by-laws including all
revisions upto the date of invitation of Tenders. The contractor shall ensure that all
materials and workmanship in so far as they apply to this contract shall comply in every
specifications or any other equivalent or specification approved by the Consultant.
The Contractor shall keep at site copies of all relevant standards and codes of practice
referred in these specifications throughout the period of contract. These shall be the
latest editions and shall include all revisions/addendums thereof.
Names of approved manufacturers are given in the specifications. Reference in the
specifications to approved manufacturers shall be construed as establishing a standard
of quality and not as limiting competition. The Contractor shall include in his prices for
supplying the item or materials from the approved manufacturers listed or equal and
obtain approval.
All items or materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturers original
unopened containers with the manufacturers brand and name clearly marked on. All
items or materials shall be assembled, mixed, fixed, applied or otherwise incorporated
in the works in accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer of the item
or materials.
Contractor shall mix all mortar and concrete by way of mechanical means and
measurement boxes of standard size to be used for measuring coarse/fine aggregate.
Cement shall not be measured in any boxes or taslas etc.
Contractor shall follow the pour card/check list for all the concrete/finishing items. Date
of construction to be written on all respective works for monitoring curing.
Page | 58
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
This specification applies to the Civil Engineering and building works to be
executed by the Contractor. It is to be read in conjunction with and subject to
the conditions of contract and in conjunction with the drawings, the schedule of
rates and such other documents as may from time to time be agreed upon as
comprising part of this contract. Where these specifications are not clear, CPWD
specifications shall be followed.
1.2
Clearing
The contractor shall clear the site of all rubbish and old buildings, remove all
grass and low vegetation and remove all bush wood, trees, stumps of trees, and
other vegetation only after consultation with the Consultant/Project Managers
as to which bushes and trees shall be saved. All disused foundations, drains or
other obstructions met with during excavation shall be dug out and cleared.
1.3
Site Levels
The contractor shall carry out the survey of the site and shall establish sufficient
number of grids and level marks to the satisfaction of the Consultant/Project
Manager, who shall decide on the basis of this information, the general level of
the plot and the plinth.
1.4
Bench-marks
Prior to commencement of construction, the contractor shall in consultation with
the Engineer, establish several site datum bench-marks, their number depending
on the extent of the site. The bench-marks shall be sited and constructed so as to
be undisturbed throughout the period of construction.
1.5
Site investigation
The Consultant/Project Manager might have got the soil investigation done and
if so, the report will be handed over to the contractor for their scrutiny. The
contractor shall however inspect the site and study the findings from the trial
pits or bores in order to assess the problems involved in and methods to be
adopted for excavation and earth work. The contractor shall ascertain for himself
all information concerning the sub-soil conditions, Ground water table periods
and intensity of rainfall, flooding of the site and all data concerning excavation
and earth work.
Page | 59
1.6
Setting out the work
The contractor shall set out the works and during the progress of the building
shall amend at his own cost any errors arising from inaccurate setting out.
During the execution of the work contractor must cross check his work with the
drawings. The contractor shall be responsible for all the errors in this connection
and shall have to rectify all defects and/or errors at his own cost, failing which
the Consultant/Project Manager reserves the right to get the same rectified at
the risk and cost of the contractor.
1.7
Cleaning up and handing over
Upon completion of the work all the areas should be cleaned. All floors, doors,
windows, surface, etc. shall be cleaned down in a manner which will render the
work acceptable to the Consultant and Employer. All rubbish due to any reason,
shall be removed daily from the site and an area of up to ten metres on the outer
boundaries of the premises will be cleaned by the contractor as a part of the
contract. Upon completion of the project, the contractor shall turn over to the
employer the following:
a)
b)
c)
1.8
Written guarantee and certificates.
Maintenance manuals, if any, and
Keys.
Samples
The contractor shall submit to the Consultant/Project Managers samples of all
materials for approval and no work shall commence before such samples are
duly approved. Samples of precast concrete panels, masonry units, building
insulation, finished hardware, metal window and door frames, terrazzo flooring,
kota stone, marble etc. and every other work requiring samples in the opinion of
the Consultant/Project Managers shall be supplied to the Consultant/Project
Managers, and these samples will be retained as standards of materials and
workmanship. The cost of the samples shall be borne by the contractor.
Throughout this specification, types of material may be specified by
manufacturers’ name in order to establish standard of quality, price and
performance and not for the purpose of limiting competition. Unless specifically
stated otherwise, the bidders may assume the price of `approved equivalent’
except that the burden is upon the contractor to prove such quality, in writing.
Page | 60
A detailed programme shall be submitted by the Contractor for the material,
approvals, within four weeks of the Consultant/Project Managers’ order to
commence. The detailed programme shall include but not limited to:
Date/s of submitting the various material samples
Date/s by which the Consultant/Project Managers approval is required
Date/s of placing orders on the manufacturers suppliers.
Date/s of arrival of the approved material/s on to the site
Date/s of the completion of the `Mock-ups’ wherever required
Date/s by which the Consultant/Project Managers inspection of such `Mock-ups’
should be completed
Date/s by which the Consultant/Project Manager should fully approve the said
Mock-ups.
1.9
Tests
All materials and methods of tests shall conform to the latest rules, regulation
and/or specifications of the following authorities where specified herein as
applicable. Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), British Standards Code of Practice
(BS) in case no equivalent BIS is available The Consultant/Project Managers will
have the option to have any of the materials tested and if the test results show
that the materials do not conform to the specifications, such materials shall be
rejected. A reasonable number of representative tests will be deemed to be
included in the rates tendered.
1.10
Rates
The item rates quoted in schedule of quantities are deemed to be included to
execute the works in strict accordance with the relevant specifications read in
conjunction with the appropriate Standard Specifications.
1.11
Mode of Measurements
All measurements will be taken in accordance with IS 1200 latest issue unless
otherwise specified.
Page | 61
2.0
Earth Work
2.1
General
This specification deals with the clearance of the Site of Works and preparation
of the same to commence the proposed construction activities. Wherever
applicable, this is deemed to include all preliminary works like
Dismantling/Demolition, Site Clearance, General Levelling etc.
The contractor shall visit the site, inspect the same and decide for himself the
nature of the ground and the sub-soil to be excavated. No claim on account of
extras will be entertained in consequences of any misunderstanding or incorrect
information or ignorance of the existing conditions.
2.2
Dismantling/Demolition
Existing buildings and structures within the boundary of the site, and as indicated
in the drawings or as instructed by the site, and as indicated in the drawings or as
instructed by the Consultant/Project Manager, shall be carefully and gradually
dismantled or demolished, as the case may be.
i)
The contractor shall furnish to the Consultant/Project Manager, a
detailed scheme as well as a programme of these works, atleast one
week prior to the commencement of the actual demolition works and get
the latter’s approval of the same.
ii)
On approval of the above programme and scheme, the contractor shall
serve notices to concerned authorities, owners, etc. as and wherever
applicable, informing them of the proposed demolition and get their
approval of the same, prior to the demolition/dismantling.
iii)
The whole of the building/structures that are to be demolished shall be
evacuated and cleared off any valuable life and/or property to the
satisfaction of the Consultant/Project Manager. Where required, the
employer shall provide alternative arrangements to house those who
have been evacuated.
iv)
The site of demolition shall be well cordoned off from the other areas to
the satisfaction of the Consultant/Project Manager, with all necessary
warning and signals, erected in the vicinity by the Contractor.
v)
Such of those parts of the building/structures that ate likely to fetch some
returns from the market and/or those parts which are likely to be reused
Page | 62
elsewhere, shall be first carefully removed from the existing buildings and
them stored away properly to the complete satisfaction of the
Consultant/Project Manager. Such parts shall include items like wood
work, built in furniture, electrical fittings, sanitary wares etc. and all
others that are listed out by the Consultant/Project Manager.
vi)
The demolition work shall then commence preferably from the top and
proceed
downwards, gradually. In case of buildings comprising
more than one floor, the demolition shall commence from top and shall
be dismantled floor by floor in such a way that all the debris are collected
in the next lower floor. Dismantling of external walls/cladding shall be
done from outside inwards. The dismantling of the next lower floor shall
commence only after the clearance of all debris collected in that floor
from the floor above, is completed.
All dismantling/demolition works shall include excavation of the ground,
wherever necessary, to dismantle the existing foundations, and back filing,
including compacting to the satisfaction of the Consultant/Project Manager. The
material used for back filling shall be as per specifications and as approved by the
Consultant/Project Manager.
All dismantling/demolition works shall be carried out in such a manner, so as not
to cause any damage, whatsoever, to the properties or persons in the vicinity of
the site. If such damages occur, the contractor shall be liable for full
reinstatement, of all such damages, at his own cost.
All services, like electrical, water supply and sanitary lines/connections, to the
existing buildings or structures that are to be dismantled and/or demolished,
shall be properly cut off at points as per the instructions of the
Consultant/Project Manager. If any such service lines are feeding adjacent
plots/sites premises as well as within the premises, the contractor shall inform
the Consultant/Project Manage, well in advance, and shall follow up with the
Authorities concerned, to provide necessary reconnections to the users of these
service lines.
Wherever applicable, the contractor shall apply for the various permits, for
executing such works as may be required, from the relevant authorities.
Disposal of demolished/dismantled materials
Demolished/dismantled materials shall NOT be stacked or dumped in such a
manner, as to present a hazard to vehicles or pedestrians or properties or to
cause blockage in drainage channels etc. In case Contractor fails to clear the
Page | 63
malba from the site the same shall be cleared by the owner at Contractor’s risk
and cost.
The contractor shall obtain necessary permission from the local Government
Authorities, pay the necessary deposits, for the location and the manner in which
the debris to be disposed and then carry out the disposal, as directed by the
Consultant/Project Manager.
Demolished/Dismantled debris shall be dumped/stacked in an area, primarily
within the site, if required, subject to the approval of the Consultant/Project
Manager and shall can’t way and dispose off, within the shortest possible time,
as directed by the Consultant/Project Manager.
All dismantling works shall be carried out by crow bar, chiselling or by Jack –
hammering BUT IN NO CASE BLASTING OPERATION IS PERMITTED AT SITE.
All debris shall be transported from the site on daily basis during prescribed
hours as approved by local authorities for transportation.
All dismantling works shall be carried out during day time so that there will not
be any disturbance to Hotel guests.
2.3
Classification of Soils
The earth shall be classified under the following categories and measured
separately for each category:
2.3.1 Hard dense soil
1.
2.
3.
4.
Generally any soil which requires the close application of picks or jumpers
or scarifiers and rippers to loosen the same such as:
Stiff clay, hard shale or compact moorum requiring grafting tool and/or
pick and shovel.
Shingle and river or nallah bed boulders.
Lime concrete, stone masonry in lime or cement mortar
below ground level.
Soft, conglomerate or soft uterite when the stone can be detached from
the matrix with picks and shovel.
2.3.2 Ordinary/Soft/Decomposed rock (not requiring blasting)
Page | 64
Rock or boulders, which may be quarried or split with crow bars or
wedges/picks; such as lime stone, sand stone, hard laterite, hard
conglomerate or other soft or disintegrated rock.
(If required, approved chemical may be used for loosening the materials).
2.3.3
Hard rock (requiring blasting) :
Rock which is in solid beds, which can only be removed either by wedging
or chiselling, shall be treated as hard rock. An isolated boulder or
detached rock, measuring one cubic meter or more, shall also be treated
as hard rock, if the same cannot be removed without wedging or
chiselling.
Blasting is totally prohibited and will not be allowed under any
circumstances.
2.3.4
Authority for classification of Soils/Rocks
The classification of excavation shall be decided by the
Consultant/Project Manager and his decision shall be final and binding on
the contractor.
2.3.5
Blasting
Blasting shall not be permitted under any circumstances. Alternately
chemicals can be used to split rock. The bidder/contractor shall submit
with his tender, the method which he intends to adopt for execution of
the work of rock excavation. A list of specialized tools and plants to be
used for rock excavation shall be enclosed.
2.3.6
Trimming of Slopes
All slopes shall be trimmed by hand or mechanically true to line and,
profile and consolidated to the Consultant/Project Managers’
satisfaction. Any rock or boulders appearing on the face or likely to be
unstable shall be removed and the void thereof filled with approved
material and compacted.
2.3.7
Shoring/Earth work support
Page | 65
The contractor shall shore and strut the sides of excavation to the
satisfaction of the Consultant/Project Manager. Should there be any slips
or settlement, not withstanding the shoring, the contractor shall make
good the same at his own expense, with concrete or other approved
material, as directed by the Consultant/Project Manager. Shoring shall be
removed gradually side by side with backfilling to prevent any settlement
and under no circumstances, until such time as the foundation concrete
has hardened enough, to take any loads, brought on by the removal.
Under special circumstances, shoring shall be left in place, if so directed
by the Consultant/Project Manager. No extra payment shall be made for
shoring. The rate for the same shall be included in the excavation items.
2.3.8
Dewatering
All excavation shall be kept free from water from any source. The
contractor shall provide and clear away on completion, all drains, pumps
and other equipment, for this purpose. The contractor shall be
responsible for preventing any subsidence of adjoining ground due to
pumping.
Contractor shall keep site dewatered till all construction works in
basement and other areas are completed, including waterproofing. No
extra amount shall be claimed by the contractor on this account and his
quoted rates shall be deemed to have been included for total dewatering.
2.3.9
Contractor to keep excavation clear
Should any sand, mud, weed, rubbish or other materials be deposited on
excavated area, by sandstorm, rain, flood, landslips or from any cause,
whatsoever, such materials shall be removed by the contractor at his own
expense.
2.3.10
Back Filling
All materials used as fill shall be to the Consultant/ Project Managers’
approval. Filling materials shall be well graded clean stone, gravel and
other approved non-plastic granular material, all not more than 100 mm,
in any direction and shall be well consolidated in layers not more than
150 mm thick. Final compacting must be done just before concrete is to
be laid.
Page | 66
All fill materials shall be compacted at moisture content appropriate to
the material being used. The compacted filling shall achieve a density
which shall not be less than 96% of the maximum dry density obtained.
Filling shall be free of any wood, organic matter or any other deleterious
material.
Sand, soil, gravel etc. from the excavation may be used for backfilling of
pits and trenches or for making up levels subject to approval of the
Engineer-in-charge and subject to selection of proper materials. The
contractor shall take instructions of the Consultant/Project Manager
regarding the location in which each type of excavated material is to be
used according to its quality.
In case the excavated materials are not approved for backfilling, either
totally or in part or if their quantity falls short of the quantity required for
filling, suitable materials shall be brought to site from an approved
source.
2.3.11
Disposal of surplus
Surplus excavated materials and all excavated materials rejected for
backfilling shall be carted away from the site by the Contractor at his own
cost.
2.3.12
Measurements
i)
Where excavation is in trenches or from borrow pits in a firmly uniform
ground, measurements of cutting in trenches or borrow pits shall be
made to the outer line of building wall.
ii)
Diagonal ridges, cross ridges, or dead man shall be left in position shown
by the Consultant/Project Manager to enable accurate measurements
being taken o the completion of one work. Where the ground is not
uniform or where the site is required to be levelled, levels shall be taken
before the start of the work and after the completion of the work and the
quantity of excavation in cutting computed from these levels. These
ridges or dead man shall be removed by the contractor at his own cost
after the measurements.
iii)
Where soil, soft rock, and hard rock are mixed, the measurements for the
entire excavation shall be computed from the levels as described (ii)
above.
Page | 67
iv)
Excavated materials from `HARD ROCK’ and SOFT ROCK shall be stacked
separately, measurement reduced by 50% to allow for voids to arrive at
the quantity payable under `hard rock’ and `soft rock’ respectively.
v)
The difference between the entire excavation (worked out from the
levels), and the of the quantities payable under `hard rock’ and `soft rock’
shall be paid for as excavation in all kind of soil.
vi)
2.4
Wherever rock excavation is encountered, contractor will be paid only up
to required level, and any extra excavation if carried out due to any
reason, no payment shall be done for the extra quantity.
Excavation in all Soils
Excavation and/or removal of any other material on the site, shall be carried out
the accurately to the lines, levels and dimensions shown in the drawings or as
ordered by the Consultant/Project Manager, so as to allow proper and efficient
concrete work and other work in clean and dry condition. The method of
excavation shall be at the discretion of the Consultant/Project Manager but
should the dimensions of any excavation exceed those shown on the drawings or
ordered by the contractor shall fill such extra space with concrete or other
approved material, at his own expenses.
All founding levels will be inspected by the Consultant/Project Manager and
suitability for bearing of the bottom shall be determined before the concrete is
placed. Records of all foundation levels shall be submitted by the contractor to
the Consultant/Project Manager.
The final 150 mm depth of excavation shall be taken out by hand unless
otherwise permitted by the Consultant/Project Manager. Extra depth of
excavation, if any, beyond those shown in the drawings or ordered by the
Engineer, shall be filled up with Grade 10 concrete for which payment shall not
be made.
The contractor shall excavate soft patches or rock outcrops below the founding
level and refill with M-10 concrete. The founding stratum shall be trimmed to
required level and rammed to the satisfaction of the Consultant/Project Manager
before concrete is placed.
Foundations within any one building shall not rest on soil strata with differential
bearing capacities. Strip foundations shall not be stepped along the length of the
foundations. When excavating for individual footings at different levels care shall
be taken not to disturb the bearing stratum of the higher foundations. The
Page | 68
excavation bottom shall be watered as directed by the Consultant/ Project
Manager before the foundations are laid.
2.5
Sweet Earth
The Sweet earth for plantation areas shall be from an approved source
and
shall be mixed with natural or artificial manure, as directed by the
Consultant/Project Manager.
2.6
Polythene layer
Wherever directed, all concrete pours resting directly over prepared soil or hardcore, shall be placed over “Shivathene 1000”, or equivalent, heavy polythene
sheeting. All joints in the sheeting shall be double welt folded joints, made by
placing the edges together and folding over twice.
The folds shall be held in place by placing temporary weights and the sheets will
be protected from damage during concreting operations. All damaged sheets will
be replaced. Where necessary, the polythene film shall be returned to overlap
the damp proof course in walls.
2.7
i)
Pre-construction Anti-termite treatment
Chemicals
The chemicals used for the soil treatment shall be any one or a combination of
the following with concentration shown against each in aqueous emulsion:
Chemical
Chlorpyriphos
equivalent)
(Pyramid
Concentration
or 20% (by weight)
Chemicals are available in concentrated form in the market and concentration is
indicated on the sealed containers. To achieve the percentage of concentration
specified above, chemical should be diluted with water in required quantity
before it is used. Graduated containers shall be used for dilution of chemical with
water in the required proportion to achieve the desired percentage of
concentration. E.g. to dilute chemical of 30% concentration add 59 parts of water
to one part of chemical to achieve 0.5% concentration.
Page | 69
Chemical shall be brought to site of work in sealed original containers. The
material shall be brought in at a time in adequate quantity to suffice for the
whole or at least a fortnight’s work. The materials shall be kept in the joint
custody of the contractor and the Consultant/Project Manager/Representative.
The empties shall not be removed from the site of work, till the relevant item of
work has been completed and permission obtained from Consultant/Project
Manager/his representative. The empties shall not be removed from the site of
work, till the relevant item of work has been completed and permission obtained
from the Consultant/Project Manager/his representative.
Hand operated pressure pump shall be used to carry out spraying operations to
facilitate proper penetration of chemicals in the earth. To have proper check for
uniform spraying of chemical, graduated containers shall be used. Proper check
should be kept that the specified quantity of chemical is used for the required
area during the operation.
ii)
Time of application
Soil treatment should start when foundation trenches and pits are ready to take
mass concrete in foundations. Laying of mass concrete should start when the
chemical emulsion has been absorbed by the soil and the surface is quite dry.
Treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or soil is wet with rain or
sub-soil water. The foregoing applies also in the case of treatment to the filled
earth surface with the plinth before laying the sub grade for the floor.
The treated soil barrier shall not be disturbed after they are formed. If by chance,
treated soil barriers are disturbed, immediate steps shall be taken to restore the
continuity and completeness of the barrier system.
iii)
Treatment for masonry foundation and basement
The bottom surface and sides (up to a height of 30 cm From the bottom) of the
excavations made for masonry foundations and basements shall be treated with
the chemical emulsion mentioned above at 5 litres per sqm of surface area.
iv)
Treatment to backfill earth
After the masonry foundations and retaining walls of the basement come up, the
back fill in immediate contact with the foundation structure shall be treated with
the chemical emulsion at the rate of 7.5 Litres of the vertical surface of the substructure for each side. The earth is usually returned in layers and the treatment
shall be carried out in similar stages. The chemical emulsion shall be directed
Page | 70
towards the concrete or masonry surface of the columns and walls so that the
earth in contact with these surfaces is well treated with the chemical.
v)
Treatment for RCC foundation and basements
The treatment described in (iii) & (iv) above applies essentially to masonry
foundations where there are voids in the masonry through which termites can
seek entry in to the superstructure. Hence the foundation requires to be
completely enveloped by a chemical barrier. In the case of RCC foundations the
concrete is dense being a 1:2:4 mix or richer, the termites are unable to
penetrate it. It is therefore unnecessary to start the treatment from the bottom
of excavations. The treatment shall start at a depth of 50 cm. Below the ground
level except when ground level is raised or lowered by filing or cutting after the
foundations have been cast. In such cases the depth of 50 cm shall be
determined from the new soil level resulting from filling or cutting mentioned
above and soil in immediate contact with the vertical surface of RCC foundations.
From this depth, the back fill around the columns, beams and RCC basement
walls shall be treated at the rate of 7.5 Litres per sqm The other details of the
treatment shall be as laid down in (iv) above.
vi)
Treatment of top surface of plinth filling
The top surface of the consolidated earth within the walls shall be treated wit
the chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 Litres of the surface before the sand bed
or sub-grade is laid. If the filled earth has been well rammed and the surface
does not allow the emulsion to seep through, holes up to 50 to 75 mm deep at
150 mm centres both ways may be made with 12 mm dia MS rod on the surface
to facilitate absorption of the emulsion.
vii)
Treatment at junction of walls and floor
Special care shall be taken to establish continuity of the vertical chemical barrier
on inner wall surfaces from the ground level (where it has stopped with the
treatment described in (iv) above up to the level of the filled earth surface. To
achieve this, a small channel 3 x 3 cm shall be made at all the junctions of wall
and columns with the floor (before laying the subgrade)
And rod holes made in the channel up to the ground level 15 cm. Apart and the
rod moved back ward and forward to break up the earth and chemical emulsion
poured along the channel at the rate of 7.5 Litres per sqm of the vertical wall or
column surface of the sub structure so as to soak the soil right to the bottom.
The soil should be tamped back into place after this operation.
Page | 71
viii)
Treatment to soil along external perimeter of building
After the building is complete, the earth along the external perimeter of the
building should be rodded at intervals of 15 cm. and to a depth of 30 cm. The
rods should be moved back ward and forward parallel to the wall to break up the
earth and chemical emulsion poured along the wall at the rate of 7.5 Litres per
sqm of vertical surfaces. After the treatment, the earth should be tamped back
into place. Should the earth outside the building be graded on completion of
building, this treatment should be carried out on the completion of such grading.
In the event of filling being more than 30 cm. the external perimeter treatment
shall extend to the full depth of filling up to the ground level so as to ensure
continuity of the chemical barrier.
ix)
Treatment for walls retaining soil above floor level
Retaining walls like the basement walls or outer walls above the floor level
retaining soil need to be protected by providing chemical barrier by treatment of
retained soil in the immediate vicinity of the wall, so as to prevent entry of
termites through the voids in masonry, cracks and crevices etc. above the floor
level. The soil retained by the walls shall be treated at the rate of 7.5 Litres per
sqm of the vertical surface so as to effect a continuous outer chemical barrier in
continuation of the one formed under (iii).
x)
Treatment of soil under apron along external perimeter of building
Top surface of the consolidated earth over which the apron is to be laid shall be
treated with chemical emulsion @ 5 Litres of the vertical surface before the
apron is laid. If consolidated earth does not allow emulsion to seep through,
holes upto 50 to 75 mm deep at 150 mm centres both ways may be made with
12 mm dia mild steel rod on the surface to facilitate saturation of the soil with
the chemical emulsion.
xi)
Treatment of soil surrounding pipes, wastes and conduits
When pipes, wastes and conduits enter the soil inside the area of the
foundation, the soil surrounding the point of entry must be loosened around
each such pipe waste or conduits for a distance of 15 cm. and up to a depth of
7.5 cm before the treatment is commenced. When they enter the soil external to
the foundations, they shall be similarly treated unless they stand clear of the
walls of the building by about 7.5 cm. for a distance of over 30 cm.
xii)
Treatment for expansion joints
Page | 72
Expansion joints at ground floor level are one of the biggest hazards for termite
infestation. The soil beneath these joints should receive special attention when
the treatment under (v) is carried out. This treatment should be supplemented
by treating through the expansion joint after the subgrade has been laid, at the
rate of 2 Litre per linear metre.
xiii)
Safety precautions
All chemicals used for anti termite treatment are poisonous and hazardous to
health. These chemicals can have an adverse effect upon health when absorbed
through the skin, in haled as vapours or spray mists or swallowed. Person using
or handling these chemicals should be warned of these dangers and advised that
absorption through the skin is the most likely source of accidental poisoning.
They should be cautioned to observe carefully the safety precautions given
below:
These chemicals are usually brought to site in the form of emulsifiable
concentrates. The containers should be clearly labelled and should be stored
carefully so that children and pet cannot get at them. They should be kept
securely closed.
Particular care should be taken to prevent skin contact with concentrates.
Prolonged exposure to dilute emulsions should also be avoided. Workers should
wear clean clothing and should wash thoroughly with soap and water, especially
before eating and smoking. In the event of severe contamination, clothing should
be removed at once and the skin washed with soap and water. If chemicals
splash in to the eyes they shall be flushed with plenty of soap and water and
immediate medical attention should be sought.
The concentrates are oil solutions and present a fire hazard owing to the use of
petroleum solvents. Flames should not be allowed during mixing.
Care should be taken in the application of chemicals to see that they are not
allowed to contaminate wells or springs which serve as sources of drinking
water.
xiv)
Spraying equipment
A pressure pump shall be used to carry out spraying operations to facilitate
proper penetration of chemicals in to the earth.
xv)
Measurements
Page | 73
All dimensions shall be measured correct to a cm. The measurement for all the
operations described above shall be the plinth area of the building in squaremetres at floor 1 level (Ground Floor). Nothing extra shall be measured for
payment.
xvi)
Rate
The rate for the anti-termite treatment shall include the cost of labour material
and all other inputs involved in all the operations described above.
Page | 74
3.0
CONCRETE WORKS
3.1
All concrete included in the works shall comply with the General requirements of
this section of the specification except where those requirements are modified
by the provisions of later Clauses relating to specialized uses for concrete in
which case the requirements of those Clauses shall take precedence.
3.2
Supervision
A Competent person shall be employed whose first duty will be to supervise all
stages in the preparation and placing of the concrete. All test on materials, the
making and testing of cubes and the maintenance and calibration of all mixing
and measuring plant shall be carried out under his direct supervision.
3.3
Materials
a)
Cement
i)
Types
The cement used shall be ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 269
(Latest revision) of grade 43 for all works except where specifically
mentioned in the Drawings, Bill of Quantities, and/or directed by the
Consultant/Project Manager.
All cement shall be fresh when delivered. Cement shall be delivered in
sound and properly secured bags or other packages ready for immediate
use and shall be used direct from the bag. The contractor shall maintain
for Consultant/Project Managers’ inspection a record of receipts and
consumption of cement indicating the source, the age and the date of
receipt of cement. Cement containing lumps which cannot be broken by a
light touch of fingers shall not be used in the works. Admixtures shall not
be used without written consent of the Consultant/Project Manager.
ii)
Sources
Cement shall be obtained from sources which are approved by the
Consultant/Project Manager. Makes and sources of cement shall not be
varied from those used for trial mixes; should a change be unavoidable
the contractor shall submit his proposals for the prior approval of the
Consultant/Project Manager and then carry out new trial mixes unless
otherwise directed by the Consultant/Project Manager. Cement of
different kinds shall not be mixed at any stage.
Page | 75
b)
iii)
Manufacturers’ Test Certificates for Cement
The Contractor shall request the cement manufacturer to forward to his
site office the Certificate of conformity in accordance with IS. 269 (Latest
Revision), and he shall cause a copy to be supplied to the
Consultant/Project Manager within 48 hours of the arrival of the
certificate, which shall not be later than 14 days from the day of delivery
of the relevant consignment. The test certificate shall be related to the
date of delivery at site of consignment. The frequency of deliveries shall
be such as to ensure that no cement is more than 4 months old when
used in the works.
iv)
Samples of Cement
Samples of cement to be used in the works shall be deposited with the
Consultant/Project Manager for his approval together with a certificate
stating the name and address of the manufacturer, the name and address
of the supplier from whom it was purchased. The Consultant/Project
Manager may from time to time take samples of the cement being used
in the works for testing.
v)
Storage of Cement
The contractor shall provide a proper separate weatherproof store
building with raised floor for cement on the site and shall at all times
protect the cement from damp or any other deleterious influences. Each
consignment of cement shall be kept separately and the contractor shall
be careful to ensure the consignments are used in the order in which they
are received.
Aggregates
i)
Materials used as aggregates shall be obtained from a source known to
produce aggregates satisfactory for concrete and shall be chemically
inert, strong, hard, durable, of limited porosity and free from adhering,
coating, clay lumps, coal residues and organic or other impurities that
may cause corrosion of reinforcement or may impair the strength or
durability of the concrete. Aggregates shall be tested in accordance with
the requirements of IS. 383 or IS. 515 and the results of such tests shall
be as hereinafter specified, the percentages being by weight unless the
context indicates otherwise.
ii)
Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or sand derived by crushing material
like gravel or stone and shall be free from coagulated lumps. Sand
derived from stone unsuitable for coarse aggregates shall not be used as
Page | 76
fine aggregates. The caustic soda test for organic impurities shall show a
colour not deeper than that of the standard solution. The amount of fine
particles as ascertained by the Laboratory Sedimentation test shall not
exceed 10% for crushed stones. The settling test for natural sand or
crushed stone shall be made, and after being allowed to set in for three
hours the thickness of the layer of silt deposited on the coarser material
shall not exceed 10%.
The grading of a natural sand or crushed stone i.e. fine aggregates shall
be such that not more than 5 (five) percent shall exceed 5 mm in size, not
more than 10% shall pass IS sieve No.150 not less than 45% or more than
85% shall pass IS sieve No.1.18 mm and not less than 25% or more than
60% shall pass IS sieve No.600 micron.
Only washed sand of quality and grading specified herein above shall be
used. Admixture of sand obtained by crushing natural stone may be
permitted by the Consultant/Project Manager, provided the mixture
satisfies the requirements for the fine aggregates here in above specified.
But not more than one part of the sand obtained by crushing natural
stone may be added to two parts of washed sand.
iii)
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse Aggregates shall be crushed stone. The pieces shall be angular,
rounded in shape and shall have granular or crystalline or smooth (but
not glossy) non-powdery surface. Fragile, flaky and laminated pieces and
mica shall not be present.
The “Aggregates Crushing Value” shall not exceed 45%. The amount of
fine particles occurring in a free sate or as a loose adherent shall not
exceed 1$. When determined by the laboratory sedimentation test, after
twenty four hours immersion in water. A previously dried sample of the
coarse aggregates shall not have gained in weight more than 5%.
Size of coarse aggregate shall be maintained within tolerance limit of
2.5%.
The grading of coarse aggregate shall be such that not more than 5% shall
be larger than 20 mm and not more 10% shall be smaller than 5 mm and
not less than 25% or more than 55% shall be smaller than 10 mm.
Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be 20 mm unless otherwise
noted.
Page | 77
The grading of coarse aggregate of nominal size of 40 mm shall be such
that not more than 5% shall be larger than 40 mm and not more than 5%
shall be smaller than 5 mm and not less than 10% or more than 35% shall
be of 10 mm size.
Aggregate (Fine and Coarse) shall be thoroughly washed with clean water
if so directed by the Consultant/Project Manager.
Fragile, flaky and laminated pieces and mica shall not be present.
Aggregate should be free from fine holes and stone should not be
weathered.
3.4
Steel Reinforcement
Type
Steel for bar and fabric reinforcement shall conform to mild steel tested quality
conforming to IS. 432 (Latest), or high yield strength deformed bar conforming to
IS. 1786 or 1139 (Latest) as specified in the drawings. The steel shall be kept
clean and free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, oil, grease, earth, paint or any
material which may impair the bond between the concrete and the
reinforcement or which may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or
deterioration of the concrete. Fabric reinforcement (IRC weld mesh or
equivalent) shall be delivered to site in flat sheets only.
Storage of Reinforcement
Before and after bending, reinforcement shall be stored on raised racks in
separate lots by size and type and protected from damage, contamination and
the effects of the weather. For the purposes of identification each lot shall be
marked plainly and securely by approved methods.
Fabrication
Fabrication shall be accurately done to the dimensions, spacing and minimum
cover as per structural drawings. Spacers shall be of cement mortar (1:2) cubes.
MS chairs, spacer bars shall be used in order to ensure accurate positioning of
reinforcement. All joints in mild steel reinforcement up to and including 16 mm
diameter may be welded if permitted by the Consultant/project Managers in
writing.
Page | 78
Welded Laps
Wherever specified, welded laps shall be provided and paid for separately unless
specifically included in the item of work. The welding of bars shall be carried out
as per IS: 2751-1979, IS: 9417-1979. Before doing welding of bars at site, the
contractor shall make minimum 3 joints and get them tested in an approved
laboratory at his own cost. The following precautions shall be taken:
a)
If the cold twisted deformed bar has an untwisted end
at lapping point, then this portion shall be cut off prior to welding.
b) Bars shall be free from rust at joints to be welded.
c)
Bars shall be aligned and kept in proper axis in order to minimize
crookedness in bar after welding.
3.5
Water
Type
Water for mixing concrete shall be clean and free from harmful material and
comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3 of IS: 456 (Latest Revision).
Water shall be brought only from sources approved by the Consultant/Project
Manager, and shall be used in a manner as directed by the Consultant/Project
Manager.
Testing of Water
Prior to the commencement of the works, or whenever there is a change in the
source of supply or when directed by the Consultant/Project Manager, the
contractor shall arrange for samples of water, for mixing concrete, to be
submitted to an independent Government authorised testing laboratory,
acceptable to the Consultant/Project Manager for tests to determine that the
water complies with this specification and is satisfaction in all other respects for
the manufacture of high quality concrete.
3.6
Grade and Strength Requirements of Concrete
General
Concrete shall consist of the material described under previous sections, using
separate coarse and fine aggregate in an appropriate combination determined in
the course of the preparation of mix design described hereinafter. The overall
grading shall be such as to produce a concrete of the specified quality which will
work readily in to position without segregation and without the use of excessive
Page | 79
water. In the case of mass concrete or blinding concrete specified by nominal
mix the use of “all-in” (20 mm and down) aggregate may be approved by the
Consultant/ Project Manager. No addition of water shall be made at site. It shall
be a homogenous mix before use at site.
Slump
Only sufficient water shall be added to the cement and aggregate during mixing
to produce concrete having a sufficient workability to enable it to be well
consolidated, to be worked in to the corners of the shuttering and around the
reinforcement to give the specified surface finish, and to have the specified
strength. Water cement ratio shall be maintained as per IS : 456-1978 when a
suitable amount of water has been determined, the resulting consistency shall
be maintained through out the corresponding parts of the work and tests shall
be conducted to ensure the maintenance of this consistency according to the
standard method of test for consistencies of concrete (slump test) as below :
Description of work
Description of work
Beams and slabs
Columns and walls
Slabs and stairs
Footings
Maximum slump in mm.
Maximum slump
25 to 75mm
50 to 100mm
Upto 25mm
upto 25mm
Slump for RMC
The slump for RMC will be permitted from 125 mm to 150 mm to make it
pumpable concrete.
Concrete Grades
Grade of concrete used in the works shall be shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Consultant/Project Manager. For each grade of concrete the
requirements are set out In the following Table:
a)
Nominal Concrete
By Volume Mix
1:2:4
1:1½:3
1:1:2
b)
Min. Cement
318 kg/cum
405 kg/cum
565 kg/cum
7 Day Strength
14.0 N/sqmm
17.5 N/sqmm
21.0 N/sqmm
28 Day Strength
21.0 N/sqmm
26.5 N/sqmm
31.5 N/sqmm
Controlled Concrete
Page | 80
Grade
Min. Cement
7 Day Strength
28 Day Strength
M 10
170 kg/cum
7.0 N/sqmm
10.0 N/sqmm
M 15
270 kg/cum
10.0 N/sqmm
15.0 N/sqmm
M 20
330 kg/cum
13.5 N/sqmm
20.0 N/sqmm
M 25
370 kg/cum
17.0 N/sqmm
25.0 N/sqmm
M 30
420 kg/cum
20.0 N/sqmm
30.0 N/sqmm
M 35
460 kg/cum
23.5 N/sqmm
35.0 N/sqmm
M 40
490 kg/cum
27.0 N/sqmm
40.0 N/sqmm
Note: This is only minimum quantity of cement to be used and the contractor
should actually use the required quantity of cement without any extra
cost. If the mix with minimum cement content gives higher strength,
nothing extra will be paid to the contractor.
The concrete cubes will be collected as given in IS: 456 and will be tested
for 7 days and 28 days strength.
3.7
Batching and Mixing
The quantity of cement, the quantity of fine aggregate and the quantities of the
various sizes of coarse aggregate should be measured by weight.
A separate weighing device should be provided for weighing the cement.
Alternatively, the cement may be measured by using a whole number of bags in
each batch, 50 kg Bag of cement contains 35 Litres.
The amount of water should be measured by volume or by weight. Any solid
admixtures to be added should be measured by weight. Liquid or paste
admixtures may be measured by volume or weight.
The batch weights of aggregate should be adjusted to allow for moisture content
typical of the aggregate being used.
The accuracy of the measuring equipment should be within plus or minus 3% of
the quantity of cement, water or total aggregates being measured and within
plus or minus 5% of the quantity of any admixture being used. All measuring
equipment should be maintained in a clean, serviceable condition.
The mixing time should not be less than that used by the manufacturer in
assessing the mixer performance. In the case of mixes of low workability or high
cement content this may not ensure maximum strength, and it may be advisable
Page | 81
to determine a satisfactory mixing time by comparing the strength of samples
mixed for different times. However in no case shall it be less than 2 minutes.
A mixer shall be cleaned out before any further concrete is mixed:
a) When it has been out of use for more than 30 minutes, or
b) When the class of concrete to be mixed is changed.
Hand mixing will only be permitted in exceptional circumstances and then with
the specific arrangement of the Consultant/Project Manager.
No water shall be added to mixed concrete other than the quantity of water
allowed for in the mix design and incorporated in batching, unless with the
approval of the Consultant/Project Manager.
Concrete or mortar which has commenced to et shall not be remixed with
additional water and in no circumstances shall such concrete or mortar be used
in the work.
3.8
Transporting Concrete
Concrete and mortar shall be transported speedily in water tight skips, trucks or
barrows, and deposited in its place in the works without contamination, loss of
ingredients or segregation. If segregation has nevertheless occurred during
transport, the materials shall be remixed before deposit. Skips shall be large
enough to contain an integral number of batches from the mixer. Any trucks or
barrows shall have pneumatic tyres. In no case shall a period of more than 30
minutes elapse between the first wetting of cement in a batch and the
completed use of the concrete or mortar in the works, the contractor shall
arrange his mixing, transporting, placing, compacting and finishing techniques
accordingly. No concrete shall be placed in the works until the contractors’
proposed method of transporting concrete have been approved. When concrete
is conveyed by chutes, the equipment shall be of such size and design as to
ensure a continuous flow in the chute. The chute shall be of metal or metal lined,
and if two or more lengths are used they all shall have approximately the same
slope. If the distance of the discharge end of the chute above the surface of the
concrete is more than 1 metre, a spout or “elephant trunk” shall be used and the
lower and positioned as near to the surface of deposit as practicable. The chute
or “elephant trunk” shall be thoroughly cleaned before and after each run. The
debris and any water used shall be discharged outside the forms.
3.9
Concrete placement
General
Page | 82
Concrete, when deposited, shall have a temperature of not less than 5C (41F)
and not more than 32C (90F).
The concrete shall be placed in the positions and sequences indicated on the
drawings, in this specification and/or as directed by the Consultant/Project
Manager.
Contractor shall give adequate notice to the Consultant/Project Manager of his
intention to concrete any section of the works.
Except where otherwise directed, concrete shall not be placed unless the
representative of the Consultant/Project Manager is present and has previously
examined and approved the positioning fixing and condition of the reinforce or
any other items to be embedded and the cleanliness, positioning and suitability
of the concreting surface.
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position. It shall
be placed in such a manner as to avoid segregation of the concrete and
displacement of the reinforcement, other embedded items, or formwork. It shall
be brought up in horizontal layers not exceeding 450 mm in compacted thickness
unless otherwise authorised or directed by Consultant/Project Manager.
Concrete shall not be placed simultaneously on each side of large horizontal
specified or approved construction joints.
Shutters for walls or thin sections of considerable height shall be provided with
openings or other devices that will facilitate the cleaning of the accumulation of
hardened concrete on the shutters or on the metal reinforcement above the
level of the concrete and the removal of concrete in the case of segregations.
Placing concrete in cold weather
No concrete shall be mixed or placed while the ambient temperature is above 40
degree C. on a rising thermometer or below 4 degree C. on a failing
thermometer. The contractor shall supply an accurate maximum and minimum
thermometer and hang it in an approved position on the works. Aggregates that
have been exposed to frost shall not be used until completely thawed. Concrete
shall be maintained by approved means at a temperature of not less than 4
degree C. during placing, and for a period of three days thereafter. All concrete
placed during cold weather or when a frost is predicated or is likely to occur or
occurs contrary to expectation, shall be protected from freezing by approved
means.
Page | 83
Placing of concrete in wet weather
Concrete shall not be mixed and or placed in rainy weather or when there is
likelihood of impending heavy showers. If it becomes necessary to place
concrete during rainy weather, the contractor shall provide adequate protection
by means of tarpaulin or similar other water proof material to immediately cover
fresh concrete to prevent rain falling over it. This protection shall be left on the
concrete for a period of 24 hours after placing of concrete.
3.10
Concrete placement under water
Concrete placed under water shall be deposited through a tremmie pipe the
diameter of which shall be atleast 8 times the size of the largest aggregate used
in the concrete mix.
The construction of and the method of handling the tremmie pipes shall be
approved by the Consultant/Project Manager. The pipes shall be waterproof and
sufficiently strong to withstand severe handling conditions and any joints must
be sealed with adequate gaskets.
At the commencement of tremmie work the bottom of the pipe shall be sealed
before being lowered in to position. The seal shall only be broken by the
concrete being placed. The concrete placed in contact with a horizontal
construction joint shall have a lower proportion of coarse aggregate and a higher
proportion of cement than the remainder of the concrete. The proportion shall
be agreed with the Consultant/ Project managers’ Representative.
All underwater concrete shall be placed in still water within a cofferdam or
formwork which shall extend above water level.
The proportions of the mixes shall be agreed in accordance with the strength and
workability required by the specification. To allow for losses and addition of 10%
of cement shall be added to mixes of concrete scheduled to be placed under
water.
3.11
Maintenance of Plant and Equipment
The contractor shall keep all weight batching machines, mixing machines,
compressors, vibrators and other plant and equipment for concrete and mortar
work clean, well maintained and adjusted and where appropriate, shall check the
accuracy of the measuring devices at regular intervals, all to the approval of the
Consultant/Project Managers’ Representative. Mixer blades shall be replaced
when worn down by 20 mm.
Page | 84
3.12
Night Work
Concrete shall not be mixed, placed, compacted or finished during the hours of
darkness, except where necessary to complete a pour. However, concreting in
darkness for these exceptions shall be only after obtaining the express
permission in writing from the Consultant/Project Managers’ representative and
in his presence only.
3.13
Compacting Concrete
The concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the layer. It
shall be thoroughly worked against the moulds, and around any reinforcement
and other embedded items without displacing them, and in to corners of the
moulds. Successive layers of the same lift shall be thoroughly worked together
adjacent to the common face. The date of laying concrete shall be marked for
curing and removal of form work.
Immersion vibrators shall be of approved type and shall have frequency of not
less than 10000 oscillations per minute. They shall penetrate the full depth of the
concrete to be vibrated and be immersed at sufficiency close spacing so that the
whole volume of the concrete is satisfactorily and uniformly compacted.
Where the underlying layer is of fresh concrete, immersion vibrators shall also
penetrate that layer to ensure homogeneity. Immersion vibrators shall be
withdrawn slowly to prevent formation of voids. Vibrators shall not be used to
work the concrete along the moulds or in such a way as to damage shuttering or
other parts of the structure or to displace the reinforcement or other embedded
items. Immersion vibrators shall only be operated by those who have received
proper instruction and training in their use.
External vibrators shall be of approved type and shall have a frequency of not
less than 3000 oscillations per minute. They shall be securely and rigidly clamped
to the shuttering. External vibrators shall only be used on shuttering which is
strong enough to withstand the vibration without displacement, distortion or
other damage.
The contractor shall ensure that sufficient stand by vibrators and ancillary
equipment are available during concreting operations.
3.14
Quality Control
Page | 85
i)
In order to ensure that the quality of materials and the mix proportions are
suitable for the particular grade of concrete required are so maintained,
sampling and testing shall be carried out regularly during the course or the
works.
ii)
As frequently as the Consultant/Project Managers’ representative may require
and in any care atleast once a day while concreting is in progress, the contractor
shall sample and carry out a determination of the moisture content and a
mechanical analysis of the fine aggregate and each nominal size of coarse
aggregate shall lie within the respective limits specified and should the fraction
of aggregate in the size differ from the corresponding fraction of aggregate in the
approved mix by more than 2% of the total quantity of fine and coarse
aggregate, the Consultant/Project Manager may instruct the contractor to
modify the relative proportions of the aggregates in the mix immediately to
allow for such differences.
iii)
Workability testing shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 456. The results
shall lie within the range upon which the accepted mix design is based. Testing
shall be carried out at such a frequency that the required workability is
consistently achieved.
iv)
Samples of concrete shall be taken at random in accordance with IS: 516 at the
time and place of deposition of the concrete at a frequency of sampling for each
grade of concrete and from each concrete mixing plant at six cubes of 150 mm
nominal size per 50 cubic metres of concrete placed in the works or twice per
week.
v)
Notwithstanding the foregoing, additional samples shall be taken by the
contractor when directed by the Consultant/Project Manager. The test cube
procedure shall be in accordance with IS: 516 throughout.
vi)
Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be assumed if:
a)
Each of the six cubes in a group has a test strength
not less than the characteristic strength or,
b)
Not more than one cube has a test strength less than
the specified characteristic strength but not less than 85% of the
specified characteristic strength and the average strength of the group of
four test results is not less than the specified characteristic strength plus
the standard deviation of the group.
Page | 86
3.15
Seven day cube tests
Acceptance of concrete is based on the 28 th day results. However, the contractor
shall establish a relationship between 7 days and 28 days strengths by carrying
out 7 days tests at the time of performing the laboratory testing and from
subsequent quality control testing. This relationship shall be used in interpreting
any further test results to predict the probable value of the corresponding 28
days cube strengths. The contractor shall without delay advise the
Consultant/Project Manager of any sample that appears likely to fail to meet the
specification and the contractor shall take any necessary action to minimize the
effect of such failure.
3.16
Acceptance Criteria
The general Acceptance Criteria of any and all of the concrete work shall be as
per the relevant clauses of IS.456.
If any of the works tests are not up to the standard, the Consultant/Project
Manager shall have the power to stop the work until the reason is investigated
and steps taken to prevent further low results. The contractor shall not be
entitled to any claims on account of such delays. Any concrete carried out from
the batch that is afterwards found to be faulty, will be liable for rejection and if
so directed, the contractor shall at his own expenses dismantle and replace the
defective work and any work built thereon or shall take such other measures as
may be deemed necessary by the Consultant/Project Manager. At the discretion
of the Consultant/Project Manager, the contractor may be allowed to prove by
means of a load test to be carried out at his own expense, that the concrete is
capable of safely withstanding the load as specified in the test.
3.17
Construction joints
Construction joints shall be provided in the position described on the drawings or
elsewhere and where not so described on the drawings or else shall be in
accordance with the following :a) A joint shall be formed horizontally at the top of a foundation and 75 mm
below the lowest soffit of the beams meeting at the head of a column.
b) A joint shall be formed in the rib of a large tee beam and all beams 25 mm
below the soffit of the slab.
Page | 87
c) Concrete in a haunch or a splay on beam or a brace, and in the head of a
column where one or more beams meet, shall be placed without a joint at
the same time as that in the beam or beams or brace.
d) Concrete in the splay at the junction of a wall and slab shall be placed
throughout without a joint, but if the provision of a joint is unavoidable, the
joint shall be vertical and the middle of a span.
e) A joint in a slab shall be vertical and parallel to the principal reinforcement,
where it is unavoidable, at the right angles to the principal reinforcement,
the joint shall be vertical and at the middle of the span.
f) Expansion joints, hinges or other permanent structural joints shall be
provided in the positions and of the form described in the drawings or
elsewhere. Before placing new concrete against concrete that has already
hardened the face of old concrete shall be cleaned and roughened and
scrubbed and loose aggregate removed from the form. Immediately before
placing the new concrete the face shall be thoroughly wetted and a coating
of neat cement grout applied thereto. The new concrete shall be well
rammed against the prepared face before the grout sets.
3.18
Form Work
Form work construction
The contractor should submit detailed drawing of the centring and shuttering
and get the same approved from the Consultant/Project Manager/Client and
before laying concrete also he should get the centring shuttering approved in
writing before start of concreting. The concreting should be done in the scientific
and methodical manner so as to give a uniform finish in line and level, so that
minimum rendering or plastering is done. The work found defective, should be
dismantled & redone and site cleared.
Form work shall be so constructed that concrete can be properly placed and
thoroughly compacted. Form work shall be firmly supported and adequately
strutted, braced or tied. It shall be capable of adjustment to the lines and
dimensions of the finished concrete, ad it shall be sufficiently strong to resist
without excessive distortion under the influence of the weather.
All form work shall be constructed to be rigid during the casting of concrete and
constructed so that the surfaces adjacent to the concrete are with plus minus 6
mm or the required surfaces when supporting the concrete and sufficiently
watertight to prevent loss of liquid from the concrete, and it shall be capable of
Page | 88
being removed without shock or vibration to the concrete. Forms shall be
cleaned with compressed air immediately before placing concrete to remove all
rubbish. Te inside faces of the form work shall be treated with a mould oil of type
to be approved by the Consultant/Project Manager ad every care shall be taken
to prevent mould oil from getting on to the reinforcement.
Shuttering shall be braced and strutted to prevent deformation under the weight
and pressure of the wet concrete, constructional loads, wind and other forces.
The deflection shall not exceed 3 mm bottoms of beams boxes shall be erected
with an upward camber of 6 mm for each 3 M. of span.
Removal of Form work (Striking Time)
Unless certainly specified in the drawing, or directed by the Consultant/Project
Manager, the following shall be minimum intervals of time which should be
allowed between the placing of the concrete and the striking of the mould where
ordinary Portland cement is used.
Items
Time for Removal of
Forms
a) Walls, columns & vertical faces 24
to 48 hours as may be
of all structural members
decided by the Consultant
b) Slab
i) Spanning upto 4.5m
7 days
ii) Spanning over 4.5 m
14 days
c) Beams and arches
i) Spanning upto 6m
14 days
ii) Spanning 6 to 9m
21 days
iii) Spanning over 9m
28 days
Note: 1.
For other types of cement, the stripping time recommended for ordinary
Portland cement may be suitably modified. If Portland pozzolana or low
heat cement has been used for concrete, the stripping time will be 10/7
of the period stated above.
2.
The number of props left under, their sizes and disposition shall be such
as to be able to safely carry the full dead load of the slabs, beam or arch
as the case may be together with any live load likely to occur during
curing or further construction.
However, the Contractor shall delay the removal of shuttering as long as
necessary in order to avoid damaging the work. Where shuttering to soffit is
removed prior to the props this is only permissible if the design of the shuttering
Page | 89
allows such a sequence of operations without the props being in any way
disturbed. If the shuttering and props are not independent, both must be left in
place until propping is no longer required.
Where shuttering to sides is removed prior to the shuttering soffit, the side
shuttering shall be removed without disturbing the shuttering to the soffit.
No concrete structure shall be loaded until the concrete is atleast 21 days old
and only then with the approval of the Consultant/Project Manager and subject
to such conditions as may be imposed.
The contractor may be required to produce evidence that the concrete has
attained strength sufficient to support the live and dead loads to which that part
of the structure may be subjected. This evidence shall consist of reports of
compression tests made on job cured test cubes. The cost of such tests shall be
borne by the contractor. The foregoing provisions of this clause shall not relieve
the Contractor of his responsibility to ensure that the stability and strength of
any structure or part of a structure is not impaired by the release of shuttering.
Proposals for form work
Not less than 8 days before the contractor proposes to construct any form work
his detailed proposals thereof shall be delivered to the Consultant/Project
Manager. Proposals shall comprise all relevant information including
calculations, detailed drawings, rates of placing of concrete, sequence of placing
of concrete and details of any external vibrators which are proposed to be used.
No form work shall be constructed until the Contractors’ proposals have been
received and approved by the Consultant/Project Manager.
Type of form work
Two quantities of form work shall be used i.e. Rough form work and wrought
form work, as noted on the Consultant/Project Managers’ drawings or described
hereafter.
Rough form work may be constructed of sawn timber or other material as agreed
by the Consultant/Project Manager. The edges of the boards shall be planned or
otherwise rendered grout tight. Provided it remain grout tight, rough form work
may be used any number of time.
Wrought form work, to all surfaces for which a smooth fair faced finish is
required, shall be constructed of purpose-made metal, fibre glass, water proof
Page | 90
ply wood panel, hardboard lined form work or of planed timber with edges shot
so that tight joints can be formed which will prevent loss of liquid from the
concrete. The use of a particular material for wrought form work shall be
consistently maintained throughout the structure. The surfaces of the form work
in contact with the concrete shall be smooth and free from all blemishes. The
number of times wrought form work may be used shall be subject to the
surfaces, joints and edges being clean and undamaged.
Surfaces of concrete
The contractor shall ensure that the finished face of concrete offers a suitable
keyed surface for the application of the finishing media, e.g. plaster, sand and
cement screed, etc. The contractor shall also ensure that where thin films
finished, e.g. skim coats “Snowcem”, paint, etc. are to be applied that the
previous provisions regarding supporting of form work are complied with, so that
the concrete faces to be treated are left smooth, unblemished and true to line
both vertically and horizontally and require no making good before applying the
finish.
Should the contractor fail however, to comply with the provision of this Clause,
he shall submit details of his proposed method of redoing the situation to the
Consultant/Project Manager to the obtain written consent from the
Consultant/Project Manager and must obtain written consent from the
Consultant/Project Manager to the proposals before continuing with any further
work on the affected surfaces.
Tolerances in concrete surfaces
The permissible tolerance in the surface of the hardened concrete shall not
exceed the following limits:
Type of irregularity
Description
Maximum tolerance
Position and level
+12 mm
Cross sections
+6mm
Sharp changes in plane
+2mm
3m straight edge
+3mm
Page | 91
3.19
Curing
Canvass, Hessian or other approved screens shall be erected at all points where
concrete is being placed to shade the concrete from the direct sun or from
drying winds and such screens shall be kept in position until the surface of the
concrete has been protected as specified in the following Clauses. The contractor
shall be responsible for removing such screens and preparing surface of
concrete.
As soon as possible after it has been placed and concrete shall be covered with
Hessian or other approved material to protect it from the sun and all concrete
surfaces shall be kept visibly west continuously for 14 days after placement, the
Hessian being kept in position throughout this period. Surfaces cast against
forms shall also be kept moist and covered with Hessian for these periods if the
form work is removed before the periods have elapsed.
The top surface of slab shall be kept flooded with water at all times till the curing
period of 14 days is over. Columns, wall and beam sides and other surface shall
be completely covered by gunny bags and kept thoroughly wet continuously for
the period specified for curing. The ceiling of slabs shall be frequently sprayed
with water until the end of curing period.
The contractor shall ensure that all times there is an adequate supply of fresh
water available for curing the concrete.
3.20
Examinations and Repairs
The contractor shall not proceed with the surface finish or making good of
concrete surfaces until he has received the Consultant/Project Managers’ written
permission to do so and he shall not apply cement slurry or mortar or any other
coating to the concrete surfaces as struck from the shuttering or do anything else
which would hinder the proper inspection of the concrete by the
Consultant/Project Manager.
Concrete which is defective has honeycombs, or which contains defective parts
shall be cut out completely unless the Consultant/Project Manager agrees that a
repair may be satisfactorily effected. This agreement shall not preclude
subsequent condemnation of the repaired work.
The method of repairing defective concrete which the contractor proposes to
adopt shall be submitted to the Consultant/Project Manager for his prior written
agreement in each particular case.
Page | 92
No repairs or remedial work shall be carried out without prior inspection and
instructions of the Consultant/Project Manager for his prior written agreement
in each particular case. No extra shall be paid to the contractor for the repair
works.
3.21
Fair face finish to concrete surfaces
Concrete surfaces shall be finished smooth fair faced where indicated as such on
the drawings. These areas shall be entirely free from honey combing, stains, fins,
lipping, nail or screw marks, raised grain marks, air holes or any other
imperfections.
They shall also be of even texture throughout. Very slight variations between
member and member may be acceptable but any such variations within a single
member cannot be tolerated. The concrete faces shall not be marked with mould
oil.
The form work to these areas shall be wrought form work as specified herein.
Following inspection by the Consultant/Project Manager the whole surface shall
be rubbed down by hand. Any surfaces with major imperfections, i.e. greater
than can be easily, completely and permanently obliterated by rubbing down
shall be reported immediately to the Consultant/Project Manager.
Remedial work is not normally possible to the above fair faced finish surfaces
and the contractor will be required to demolish and recast defective works.
3.22
Reinforcement Fabrication
Bending Schedules
The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant/Project Manager, for the
Consultant/Project Managers’ approval, bending schedule for all the works, not
less than Ten days before the contractor intends to bend the reinforcing steel.
The approval of the Consultant/Project Manager shall in no way absolve the
contractor of his responsibilities under the Contractor.
Programme of reinforcement details required
The Contractor shall provide a programme which gives the Consultant/Project
Manager atleast 28 days prior notification of any reinforcement details required.
The contractor shall justify the practicability of his programme to the
Page | 93
Consultant/Project Manager should it seem unreasonable before the programme
be regarded as valid notification. If progress on site falls behind the contractors’
programme. If progress on site falls behind the contractors’ programme, the
issue of reinforcement details may be delayed by a period corresponding to the
delay in construction.
Bending and placing reinforcement
Reinforcement shall been cut and bent to the shapes and dimensions shown on
the finally agreed bending schedules in accordance with the requirements of IS:
2502 and to the tolerances set out therein.
Bending shall be carried out with an appliance which provides a continuous and
uniform application of the bending deformation at every section of the bend.
There shall be provision for the free movement of the surface of the bar during
bending and the bends shall follow the contour of the former without peaking.
High Yield reinforcement must be bent without the application of artificial
heating.
Mild Steel reinforcement may be sent either hot or cold but shall not be heated
to a temperature greater than 85 C., and if heated not cooled by quenching.
Mild steel reinforcement temporary left projecting from the concrete at
construction or other joints shall not be bent out of position unless shown on the
drawings or agreed by the Consultant/Project Manager. Where such bending and
subsequent rebinding takes place the radius of the bend shall not be less than 4
bar diameters.
Reinforcement shall be fixed without forcing in the position shown on the
drawings within a tolerance of 5 mm or 5% of the minimum dimension of cross
section, whichever be the greater and maintained so that it is not displaced
during concreting or other operations.
Horizontal bars shall be supported sufficiently to prevent displacement. This may
be plastic spacers, chairs bent from steel bar, or by concrete blocks. The method
and sufficiency of the support shall be subject to the approval of the
Consultant/Project Manager.
Where concrete blocks are used, they shall be precast from concrete (not
mortar) of the same class as the concrete in which they are to be embedded,
except that the largest size of aggregate shall be 10 mm. Each block shall be
secured to the reinforcement with wire or a clip embedded in the centre of the
block so that, it shall not be in contact with the shuttering or subsequently cause
Page | 94
rust marks on the concrete. Intersections of reinforcement shall be bound
together with 16 gauge annealed soft iron binding wire.
Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, no intersections of reinforcement may
be fixed by welding without the permission of the Consultant/Project Manager.
High yield and cold worked steel shall, in no circumstances, be welded together.
Should any difficulty arise during the placing of steel in obtaining the appropriate
cover, the contractor shall immediately draw the attention of the
Consultant/Project Manager to the difficulty and shall carryout such corrective
measures a the Consultant/Project Manager may suggest.
Protection of reinforcement and concrete
The contactor shall ensure that movement of men and material subsequent to
steel fixing is organized so that reinforcement is not thereby displaced.
Reinforcement left projecting from any concrete shall be protected so that there
is no risk of corrosion staining to any exposed concrete surface or to any other
part of the works. For this purpose a stiff grout wash will normally be acceptable
to the Engineer, this wash shall be wire-brushed vigorously before further
concrete is placed to remove any ill – bonded material.
3.23
Precast concrete units
Precast concrete materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with
specifications unless indicated otherwise. Where different tolerances are
indicated in this specification or on the drawings from these in the more severe
tolerances shall apply. The units shall all be cast in properly made strong moulds
to form the shapes required. For work described as “finished fair” the mould
shall be lined with sheet steel or other approved material and care should be
taken to ensure no damage is caused to edges or surfaces when units are
removed from the moulds.
The concrete shall be of the mixes given on the drawings and shall be thoroughly
vibrated in the moulds.
All precast work shall be cast under cover and shall so remain for seven days and
shall be kept damp in order that the units are properly matured. No units shall be
lifted until 18 days have elapsed since casting and no unit shall be erected until it
has been approved by the Consultant/Project Manager as free from defects.
No cracked units will be accepted for incorporation in the works.
Page | 95
All reinforced structural precast units shall have the tops clearly marked.
Unreinforced precast units, such as sills and copings, shall be lightly reinforced as
necessary to facilitate handling.
3.24
Lime sand mortar pad
Where specified lime mortar padding shall be provided. Lime for padding shall be
in the form of a fine dry powder produced by treating quick lime in any suitable
form with sufficient water so as to produce a completely hydrated but dry and
sound product. It shall be brought from approved manufacturers and it shall be
used within 3 months of its date of manufacture. It shall be supplied in suitable
containers such as jute bags lined with polythene or high density polythene
woven bags. The hydrated lime shall bear the type of lime, brand, and make of
approved manufacturer, net weight and date of manufacture.
Sand: As described in cement concrete.
Proportioning: The ingredients in specified proportions shall be measured using
boxes of suitable sizes. Sand shall be measured on the basis of their dry volume.
Mixing: The mixing of ingredients of mortar shall be done in a Mechanical mixer.
However, project engineer can relax this condition at his discretion, taking into
account the nature, magnitude and location of the work, practicality of the use
of these machines etc. The ingredients of the mortar shall be fed into mechanical
mixer mix dry before adding water. After dry mixing is complete, just sufficient,
quantity of mortar shall be added to bring it to a working consistency. The
mortar shall be mixed at least for three minutes after the addition of water.
If the mortar is to be used for padding below foundations or floor very litter
water shall be added to dry mortar to make stiff consistency and shall be laid in
100 mm thick layers thoroughly compacted. During compaction small quantity of
water shall be sprinkled according to requirements.
Precautions: Lime mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing or
grinding. As a rule mortar shall be used on the day it is made. If eminently
hydraulic lime (Class-A) is present as an ingredient, the mortar shall be used
within four hours after mixing or grinding in mortar mill or mixture. Lime mortar
made with semi-hydraulic lime (Class-B) or fat lime (Class-C) and Pozzolana as
ingredients shall be used within 36 hours of mixing of grinding and lime sand
mortar within 72 hours. After the close of each day’s work, mixing trough pans
shall be thoroughly washed and cleaned. Lime mortar shall be keep damp with
wet sack or by any other suitable means and shall on no account be allowed to
dry.
Page | 96
4.0
MASONRY WORKS
4.1
Stone Masonry
i)
Stone masonry shall be of hard stone obtained from approved quarry. Stone
used shall be of the type specified. It shall be hard, sound, free from decay,
weathering, and defects like cracks, flaws and holes. Stone with round surfaces
shall not be used.
ii)
Normally, stone used should be small enough to be lifted and placed by hand.
The length of stone shall not exceed three times the height.
iii)
All stones shall be wetted before use. The wall shall be carried up truly plumb.
Every stone shall be carefully fitted to the adjacent stone as to form a neat and
close joint. Bond or through stone shall be provided not exceeding 1.5 meter
apart, in each course, and shall be staggered. Bond stone shall be from the front
to the back of the wall.
iv)
The interior filling shall be with flat bedded stones laid
in mortar. Chips, spells shall be used to void thick mortar
joints and shall not exceed 10% of he quantity of stone masonry.
v)
Unless otherwise mentioned, the mortar used shall be 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse
sand). All surface joints will be raked and filled with cement mortar 1:3 coarse
sand).
4.2
Brick Works
i)
The bricks shall conform to the IS No.1077-1986 of minimum crushing strength
of 75 Kg/sqm.
ii)
The building bricks are to be the best quality table moulded kiln burnt, patent
bricks, hard sound, square with sharp arises, even and uniform in shape and
colour free from cracks, stones, flaws and other defects. Samples of bricks are to
be submitted to the Consultant/Project Manager for approval before full
quantity is ordered. All supply of brick to conform to the sample approved. No
brick after 24 hours immersion in water shall absorb water more than 15% of its
own weight.
iii)
The cement and sand shall be as described under `Cement Concrete’ and the
mortar unless specified otherwise in BOQ is to be composed of one part cement
to four parts of coarse sand by volume, thoroughly mixed by hand. Hydrophobic
Page | 97
iv)
cement used in mortar shall be thoroughly machine mixed. No mortar that has
started to set shall be used in the work.
Every brick shall be thoroughly soaked in water before use. Broken bricks shall
not be used except as closers. The courses shall be truly horizontal and the work
strictly plumb, joints shall be broken vertically and they shall not exceed 10mm in
thickness. All joints in brick work are to be well filled with mortar.
v)
The brick work shall not be raised more than 12 single courses per day and shall
be built in English bond, except brick on edge and half brick thick walls shall be
built in stretcher bond. Except for brick on edge work, the bricks shall be placed
with “frog” facing upwards.
vi)
All joints in brick work shall be raked out 10mm deep as the work proceeds, and
before the mortar sets.
vii)
The brick work is to be carried out with all necessary set backs. Projections,
cuttings and toothings in conformity with the drawings.
viii)
The brick work shall be cured by watering and continuously
kept wet for 10 days, and the work shall be well protected during rainy season.
ix)
All uneven, irregular and bad brick work poor in workmanship
shall be demolished if deemed necessary by Consultant/ Project Manager and
rebuilt by the contractor at the contractors’ expenses. If necessary the
contractor will have to provide wooden plug, etc. for his own work and for which
there will be no special payment on that account. The work will have to be
executed at any height and lift will not form the criterion for any extra amount.
x)
Should any efflorescence be observed in brick work, it should be washed down
by clean water and brick surface treated with such chemicals as are deemed
necessary y the Consultant/Project Manager without any extra charge and at the
contractors’ own expenses, till efflorescence persist, the brick work shall be
demolished if deemed necessary by the Consultant/Project Manager and the
work rebuilt with new bricks including making good all the work disturbed
without any extra charge.
xi)
Half brick masonry
All brick work under 115 mm thick shall be reinforced with hoop iron, 16 gauge
25 mm wide, or 2 Nos. 6 mm dia bars, in every coarse in the bottom for the first
four courses and in every fourth coarse thereafter. The said bars shall be cast in
or securely fixed to adjoining concrete walls or columns. 75 mm thick RCC bond
with 1:2:4 mix concrete and 2 Nos. 10 mm dia MS bars with`U’ shaped 6 mm dia
Page | 98
4.3
MS strips @ 150 mm centres, shall be provided at every 2 metre height or as
directed. RCC will be measured and paid for separately but its area will be
deducted from brick work. No extra for the cost of hoop iron will be paid.
Hollow Block Masonry
i)
Cement concrete hollow blocks shall be made so as to conform IS: 2185. They
will be free from cracks, and flows. They shall have plane rectangular faces with
parallel sides and have sharp straight angled edges. They shall gave a fine,
compact and uniform texture.
ii)
All blocks used in construction, shall be dry prior to their being placed in position.
The blocks shall be placed on each other, true plumb and mortar placed so that
the mortar does not fall in the cavities. Walls shall be raised not more than 1 m
Above another at one time.
iii)
All block work shall be sprayed with clean water for atleast seven days after
being laid. During this period, no cutting or chasing shall be permitted nor shall
the block work be disturbed in any way.
iv)
Cement mortar for block work shall be 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) by volume.
Joints shall be 10 mm thick, and on faces of walls to be plastered, shall be raked
to a dept of 10 mm as the work proceeds.
v)
All junctions between block work and concrete members shall have galvanized
mild steel butterfly ties, to be cast in concrete at 400 mm vertical spacing and
then built in to the mortar bed joint of the wall. The junctions will be asked to a
depth of 10 mm and tied with chicken wire mesh to a distance of 150 mm on
either side before plastered. Wherever indicated by the Consultant/Project
Manager, a groove will be made in the plaster at the junction, without any extra
cost.
4.4
Mortar
The mortar for masonry work shall be cement and sharp coarse sand and shall be
made in small quantities so as to be used up within 30 minutes. The cement and
sand of the required proportion shall be first mixed dry thoroughly and water
added and mixed to a sufficiently thick consistency as required by the
Consultant/Project Manager. No left over mortar shall be used. Unless otherwise
specified the mortar shall be of the following proportions.
a)
One cement and five coarse sand for 230 mm thick masonry work and above.
Page | 99
b)
One cement and four coarse sand for piers, half brick walls, honeycombed brick
work, hollow blocks.
4.5
Walls under structural members
Allowance shall be made for leaving, temporarily, open courses immediately
below all structural members built in
to the walls. The open courses shall be left to permit full deflection of structural
members. The open courses shall then be made good, and pointed up after the
structural members have been fully loaded and before the completion of the
works.
Page | 100
5.0
CARPENTER AND JOINERY
5.1
Timber
All timber shall be of the kind and of first class quality as described and indicated
on drawings and schedules. It shall be uniform in texture, free from large, loose
head or cluster knots, veneer, injurious open shakes, bore holes, rot, decay
discoloration, soft or spongy spots, hollow pockets, pit and all other defects and
blemishes. The sizes shown or described are to be taken as net sizes when
finished.
5.2
Seasoning
All timber shall be fully seasoned, if necessary, in kilns,
and the contractor shall produce satisfactory proof of the same.
The moisture content in the Timber shall not exceed 12% for internal work and
16% for external work. The timber shall remain stable, free from expansion or
contraction or any other movements, when fixed in position. The timber shall be
free from drying defects and shrinkage.
5.3
Rough carpentry
Material
All framing and other concealed wood members shall be of
sound wood or approved specials and shall be seasoned. All surfaces in contact
with masonry or concrete, and in general, all surfaces hidden from view, shall be
treated with two coats of approved wood preservative paint.
Workmanship
All carpenters’ work shall be done by skilled workmen, with the longest nails that
may be used without splitting the wood. In longest nails that may be used
without splitting the wood. In general top nailing and cross nailing shall be used.
Wherever it is necessary, or an, adequate joint can not be formed by nailing, the
members shall be lapped or jointed by GI straps or extra wood blocks. All jointing
and nailing shall be done with neatness, especially in exposed positions. Joints
and nailing shall be approved by the Consultant/Project Manager and done
according to his direction when required. Cross bracing, solid blocking and
bracing shall be provided according to best practice.
Page | 101
5.4
Joinery
Materials
Finished wood work and joinery including doors, shall be with straight grained
Indian Teak of approved quality, unless noted otherwise. Wood shall be free
from knots, and other blemishes and imperfections. All finished wood for joinery
shall be seasoned as prescribed before. All joinery work shall be securely
mortised and tenoned and glued with best quality synthetic waterproof glue
equivalent of FEVICOL or MOVICOL. All sections and dimensions shall be as
shown on drawings. For all joinery work, nails shall not be used. Wherever
practicable, means of fastening the various parts together shall be concealed.
Installation
Doors and cabinet work shall be installed in position only after the plaster in the
section for which it is intended, is sufficiently dry.
All interior and exterior doors, cabinet work and other fixed wooden equipment
shall be fixed plumb and true. Wherever possible, the joints shall be bevelled. All
exterior angles shall be mitred. Adjoining interior wood members shall match
and harmonize. All wood work in contact with masonry shall be painted with
approved bitumen paint before placing in position. All concealed wood members
shall be treated with anti-termite coating before placing in position.
5.5
Description
Maximum tolerance
Disclorin 18% LC
2 litres
Pantachlophenol 12%
5 litres
Kerosine oil
93 litres
Measurements
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for accuracy of all measurements and
shall verify all dimensions given on the drawings, and shall make such site
measurements as are necessary to complete the work properly.
5.6
Doors and Windows
Doors and windows and ventilator frames shall be made of first quality seasoned
timber specified under the head of timber for doors and window frames, and a
Page | 102
shown on the drawing or as directed by the Consultant/Project Manager/Client.
These shall be properly framed mortised together, and set solidly in the masonry
with MS holdfasts. Holdfasts will be 30 x 4 cms and 5 mm flat fixed to the jamb
and embedded in masonry with PCC 1:2:4. Windows 1 m High will have
minimum of 6 number holdfasts. Each holdfast will be fixed to the frame with 3
Nos. of 5 cm. long galvanized iron screws. In case the frames are to be fixed to
RCC members, suitable rawl plugs shall be used as directed by the
Consultant/Project Manager.
5.7
Flush Doors
All flush doors shall be solid core as specified. It shall conform to the relevant
specifications to IS: 2202 and shall be obtained from ISI approved manufacturers.
The finished thickness of the shutter shall be as mentioned in the items. Face
veneers shall be of the pattern and colour approved by the Consultant/Project
Managers and an approved sample shall be deposited with the
Consultant/Project Managers and an approved sample shall be deposited with
the Consultant/Project Managers for reference. The solid core shall be wood
laminates prepared from battens of well seasoned and treated good quality
wood having straight grains.
5.8
Plywood
Plywood shall be best quality closed grained suitable for veneering, painting or
bonded with plastic laminate. It shall be resin bonded and of waterproof and boil
proof (WBP) brand. Exposed edges shall be finished with an edge strip of solid
teakwood.
Page | 103
6.0
METAL WORKS
6.1
Metal Casements
Frames of casements shall be of hot rolled sections. Both fixed and operable
frames shall be constructed of sections which have been cut to length, mitred
and electrically flush but welded at corners. Subdividing bar units shall be
tenoned and riveted in to the frames. All frames shall have the corners welded to
a true right angle and welds shall be neatly ground down smooth. Couplings,
mullions, transom, and weather bar shall be provided, as directed by the
Consultants. Outer frames shall be provided with fixing screws and lugs shall be
used for fixing the frame to the masonry. Mastic cements shall be used for
making the joints watertight.
Hinges shall be of the strong projecting type. If directed, friction type hinges shall
be used in which case windows shall not be fitted with peg stays. Projecting type
hinged shutter shall be fitted with bronze, or brass peg stays, 30 cms long with
pegs and brackets welded/reverted to the frame. All windows shall be provided
with handles of brass or bronze, fixed with a square head bolt, which can be
tightened if required after the glazing has been fitted. Top hung ventilators shall
be fixed with plain hinges, riveted or welded to the fixed frame. A brass or
bronze peg stays 30 cms. Long as in windows, shall be provided.
Centre hung ventilators shall be hung on two pairs of brass or lead-tin-bronze
cup pivots, riveted to the inner and outer frames of the ventilators, to permit the
ventilators to swing through an angle of approximately 85. The opening position
of the ventilator shall be so balanced to keep it open at any desired angle under
normal weather conditions. A bronze spring shall be fitted in the centre of the
top bar of the ventilator for the operation of the ventilator. This spring catch
which shall be closed in to a mild steel iron catch plate, riveted or welded to
outside of the outer ventilator bar. A brass chord pulley wheel in mild steel or
malleable iron brackets shall be provided along with the chord pulley wheel in
mild steel or malleable iron brackets shall be provided along with the chord eye.
The windows and ventilators shall be painted with approved paint. All the steel
surface shall be thoroughly cleaned free of rust, scale or dirt and mill scale by
picking or phosphating and before erecting painted with the coat of approved
primer and after erection painted with two finishing coats of synthetic enamel
paint of approved shade and quality. Glazing of special thickness shall be
provided on the outside of frames and unless otherwise specified, metal beading
of approved shape and section shall be used for fixing glasses. Special metal sash
putty of approved make shall be used as directed.
Page | 104
6.2
Aluminium Doors, Windows, Curtain Wall etc.
Shop Drawings
Contractor shall submit to the Consultant/Project Manager for their approval,
shop drawings within 15 days of confirming the opening sizes. The drawings
must indicate construction details, materials, fixing clamps etc. The contractor
shall however make his own measurements to ascertain the actual openings on
site and they will be responsible for the correctness of the sizes of the windows,
louvers etc.
Protection against Wind and Weather
Contractor shall ensure that the members of the doors/windows/walling shall
withstand 150 kg/sqm wind pressure, without deformation. The openable
windows must not warp in the extreme climatic conditions. All calculations for
the sizing of the members must be lodged with the Consultant/Project
Managers. The contractor is however, responsible to replace any damaged
member at their cost, if the same is found to be inadequate for extreme
weather. The contractor must guarantee that the windows are completely
waterproof.
The contractor shall submit one sample of each item for inspection and scrutiny
and get the same approved by the Consultant/Project Manager, prior to
fabricating the remaining items.
All extruded aluminium sections shall be obtained from approved and
established manufacturers and shall be of aluminium alloy conforming to IS: 733.
The sections shall generally conform to Is: 1948. These shall be fabricated as per
the approved shop drawings. All doors, windows and walling will be supplied
complete with screws, beads, weather stripping and matching finish hardware.
All frames shall have corners fixed to true right angles. For side hung shutters,
hinges shall normally be of projecting type made of aluminium alloy and
riveted/welded to frames and shall have stainless steel pins. Handles, peg stays,
etc. shall be of approved aluminium quality or its alloy conforming to IS
specifications.
The colour of anodising shall be natural unless otherwise stated, and its sample
shall be submitted for the Consultant/Project Managers’ approval before work
commences. The sections shall be anodised to a minimum thickness of 15
microns. The supplier must submit necessary evidence to the satisfaction of the
Consultant/Project Manager that the thickness of the anodisation is not less than
Page | 105
15 microns. In case of doubt the Consultant/Project Manager reserves the right
to send sample pieces to independent testing laboratories, at the cost of the
supplier. If the testing laboratory report states that the thickness or quality of
the anodisation is deficient, the Employer may ask the contractor to treat the
order as cancelled and the supplier in such a case shall indemnify the Employer
of any loss incurred by the Supplier.
A frame should be made to fit the actual openings with a 5 mm clearance all
round. Discrepancies in over all width or height exceeding 5 mm will not be
allowed and the frames will be rejected in such cases. Small discrepancies shall
have the gaps suitably filled with tropical grade mastic.
All ironmongery to be fixed to the frames shall be approved by the
Consultant/Project Manager prior to fixing. Glazing sections shall be lined with
PVC gaskets to make the window completely waterproof.
The contractor shall provide all scaffolding ladders etc. for fixing the windows
and glazing and no extra will be payable on this account.
6.3
Rolling Shutters
Rolling shutters shall be in extruded galvanized sections, of approved make, type
and finish. These shutters shall be complete with locking arrangements, hoods,
guides, pulling devices, springs and other accessories. Wherever specified,
mechanical device shall be fixed for easy operation of the shutters.
6.4
Aluminium Railing
All aluminium railings shall be carried out on site as shown on the drawings, from
approved anodised aluminium extrusions. When required, parts shall be specially
made to shapes required and matched with the standard extrusions.
The whole work shall be plumb and rigid. All mechanical joints shall be finished
neat with Araldite.
6.5
Brass Railing
Brass balustrades shall be solid or hollow cold drawn bard and strips with bright
gold colour. All the parts shall be cold bent to exact shape and pattern shown in
the drawing. The work shall be carried out by a specialized Agency, approved by
the Consultant/Project Manager. All ornamental castings shall be free from
defects and shall match with the rest of the work.
Page | 106
All brass shall be highly polished before handing over and given protective coats
of lacquer according to the manufacturers’ instruction. All balustrades shall be
set in lead and shall be plumb and rigid.
Page | 107
7.0
FLOORING/DADO/CLADDING
7.1
General
All flooring shall be laid to the best practice known to the trade. The flooring
shall be laid to the level except where slopes are called for on the drawings in
which case the slopes shall be uniform and so arranged to drain in to the
indicated outlets.
Particular care shall be exercised to ensure that all flooring, skirting and dado are
perfectly matched for colour and finish. Sufficient extra tiles (not less than 5%)
shall be cast/ordered to ensure an adequate supply of matched floor tiles. The
contractor shall furnish for approval by the Consultant/Project Managers,
samples of each type of floor finish.
7.2
Cement Concrete flooring (IPS Flooring)
Indian patent stone flooring shall be 38mm or of thickness specified and laid in
two layers bottom layer 30mm thick or as specified in 1 part of Portland cement,
2 parts of coarse sand and 4 parts of crushed stone aggregate 12mm down well
graded machine mixed with not more than 5.5 gallons of water for each bag of
cement and top layer 6mm thick in one part of Portland cement, 2.5 parts of
selected crushed stone chips 3mm down with just enough sand maximum part to
make workable mix, machine mixed with not more than 22 ltrs of water. Top
layer before the bottom layer has hardened. Flooring shall be laid in squares or
bays as directed and each layers shall be well compacted by ramming with heavy
teak wood floats. The top shall be brought to a smooth and even surface free
from blemishes and finished smooth by steel trovelling. After the concrete
surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent dislodgement of aggregates, the
patent stone shall be polished with No.1, 2 & 3 polishing stone. The flooring shall
be kept wet for seven days for curing.
7.3
Where ironite/hardonite topping is specified in the “Schedule of Quantities” the
bottom layer shall be 40 mm thick or in the item of B.O.Q. and the top layer shall
be 12 mm thick mixed with ironite/hardonite as per manufacturers specification
and finished fair.
Granolithic Flooring
The general specifications for granolithic floors, where called for, shall be as per
the cement flooring except that the top 12 mm finish shall be of granolithic
consisting of 1 part of cement and 1.1/2 part of well graded crushed aggregate.
The aggregate shall be of approved quality.
Page | 108
7.4
Ceramic/Glazed Tiles
All white or coloured glazed tiles shall be minimum 5 mm thick of approved
manufacturer as stated in the schedule of quantities. Only first quality tiled of
pure white/uniform colour and glaze shall be used. No cracked or warped, tiles
shall be used in the work. All tiles shall be required to be set in cement mortar.
Prior to setting the tiles the contractor shall at his own cost, clear the whole
surface and thoroughly saturate it with water. A layer of 12 mm thick cement
mortar shall then be applied to the surface ad the tiles laid firmly over a layer of
clear cement slurry. The tiles shall be set in perfect line, level and true to plumb
line. The joints of tiles shall have white or coloured cement painting. After the
setting operation is completed, the contractor shall carefully remove all cement
and dribbling and cure the tiled surface for atleast seven days with water.
7.5
Ceramic/Glazed tile dado
Glazed tile dado where called for in the drawings, shall be minimum 5 mm thick
white glazed tiles of approved manufacture. The tiles shall be free from cracks,
twists, uneven edges, cracking and such other defects. The rear face of tiles shall
be grooved and/or recessed to provide an adequately key for the plaster. The
tiles shall be laid true and plumb over a cement screed 12 mm thick composed of
cement and sand 1:3 (1 cement :3 coarse sand). The tiles shall be finally set in
the mortar bedding, the joints in white cement slurry. After laying the tiles shall
be thoroughly washed and cleaned to the satisfaction of the Consultant/Project
Manager.
7.6
Shahabad/Koa Stone Flooring
The best quality stone from approved quarry, shall be laid either with rough
stone or machine cut and machine polished a specified in respective items and
shall be of specified thickness and of approved quality and size, free from cracks
and flakes and shall be uniform in colour, with straight edges. The sides of
machine cut and machine polished stones shall have perfect right and finished as
described under plain cement or colour, cement, tiles, on a beading of 1:4 mix 20
mm (average) thickness. The finished stone surface thus laid shall then be
polished to the required degree as approved by the Consultant/Project Manager.
Flooring shall be finally wax polished and protected till the handing over of the
building.
7.7
Expansion and compression joints
Page | 109
These shall be clearly indicated on the shop drawings and formed of non-staining
two parts polysulphide with polyethylene foam backing to full depth of screed in
paving.
In no instance shall expansion joints be less than 10 mm. Supporting corbels
cover shall be recessed into the back of the above slab and not placed in the
expansion joint. Expansion joint shall be kept completely free of all fixing
materials and are to be inspected by the consultant prior to filling.
7.8
GANG SAW CUT BANSI PAHARPUR STONE/DHOLPUR STONE LINING
(CLADDING)
a)
Stone shall be all hard, sound durable and tough, fire from cracks, decay and
weathering and defects like cavities, cracks, flaws, sand holes, veins, patches of
soft or loose materials uniform shade.
b)
The stone shall be cut into slabs of required thickness along the flames parallel to
the natural bed of stones.
The stone shall be wetted before laying. They shall then be fixed with mortar in
position without the use of chips, or underpinning of any sort/
c)
d)
Where so desired, the adjoining stones shall be secured to each other by means
of stainless steel pins 40 mm long and 6 mm diameter or as specified in the item
of BOQ.
e)
The stones shall be secured to the backing by means of stainless steel angle or
clamps of design/size given in the drawing or item of BOQ.
Stainless steel clamps can also be of 25x6mm flat 30 cm or 16.5 cm long required
according to thickness or wall or as per site conditions unless specified otherwise
they may be provided as directed by consultant/construction Manager. The
clamps shall be spaced not more than 60 cms apart or as shown on the drawing.
f)
Clamps may be attached to its sides or top and bottom and or sides top and
bottom. The minimum number of clamps required for fixing facing unit to the
wall shall be two
and two pins. The actual number of clamps and their
sections however shall be as per requirements of design to carry the loads.
g)
When clamps are used to hold the unit in position only, the
facing shall be
provided with a continuous support in which the stones rest at the ground level
and other storey levels, the support being in the form of projection from or
recesses into the concrete floor slab, or a beam between the columns or
stainless steel angle attached to the floor slab or beams.
Page | 110
h)
The pins, clamps and dowels shall be laid in cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine
sand) and their samples got approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
i)
Stainless steel angle cramps/bracket shall be held in position with the help of
expansion hold fasteners (Wedge expansion type).
j)
The veneering work curved on plan shall be measured at plain work, but extra
payment shall be allowed for radii not exceeding 6 metes on external face. For
radii beyond 6 meters the work shall be measured as plain work only, even when
the face may have to be dressed to curve.
Expansion fasteners and clamps and pins shall be paid separately if not included
in the item of BOQ.
7.9
GRANITE STONE CLADDING WITH SPACE BETWEEN STONE AND WALL
Stone shall be of approved quality size, colour and thickness. The fixing detail
shall be as described in item all above.
Page | 111
8.0
FINISHING
8.1
General
8.1.1 All plaster work shall be of the best workmanship and in strict accordance with
the dimensions of the drawings. All plastering shall be finished to true levels
including plumbs, without imperfections, and square with adjoining work. It shall
form proper foundations for finishing materials such as paint etc. Masonry and
concrete surface to which plaster is to be applied shall be clean, free from
efflorescence, sufficiently rough and keyed to ensure proper bond.
8.1.2 Wherever directed all joints between RCC frames and
masonry walls, shall
be expressed by a groove in the plaster. This groove will exactly coincide with the
joint beneath. At the corners of all windows and doors or other openings and
wherever instructed, 24 gauge expanded galvanized metal mesh strips 200 mm
wide 450 mm long shall be placed diagonally to prevent plaster cracks.
8.1.3 Where grooves are not called for, the joint between concrete and masonry in
filling shall be covered by 24 gauge expanded galvanized metal strips, 200 mm
wide installed before plastering. The contractor shall supply all necessary labour,
material, tools and scaffolding necessary for the completion of the work detailed.
He shall be responsible to take proper precautions to all works from damage.
Any work shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the contractor.
8.1.4 All chasing, installation of conduits, boxes, etc. shall be completed before any
plastering is commenced on a surface. Chasing or cutting of plaster will not be
permitted. Broken corners shall be cut back less than 150 mm on both sides and
patched with plaster of Paris as directed. All corners shall be rounded to a radius.
Contractor shall get samples of each type of plaster work approved by the
Consultant/Project Manager.
8.1.5 The materials used for plastering shall be proportioned by volume by means of
gauge boxes. Alternatively it may be required to proportion the materials by
weight.
8.2
Plaster Work
8.2.1 The joints in the brick work, concrete blocks, shall be
raked to a depth of
15mm while the masonry is green. Concrete surfaces to receive plaster shall be
suitably
roughened. All walls shall be washed with water and kept damp
for 10 hours before plastering.
8.2.2 The plaster unless specified otherwise shall be average of 15 mm thick on walls
and minimum 6 mm thick for the ceiling. The finished texture shall be as
Page | 112
approved by the Consultant/ Project Manager. The mix for plaster unless
otherwise specified, shall be one part cement and four parts sand, to walls and
one part cement, 3 parts sand to ceiling.
8.2.3 The interior plaster shall be applied in one coat only. The surface shall be trowelled
smooth to an approved surface. All plaster work shall be kept continuously wet
for seven days.
8.2.4 The external plaster shall be of two coats on an overall thickness of minimum 20
mm. Preparations of walls to receive plaster work shall be the same as in internal
plaster. Backing coat shall be 12 to 15 mm thick with cement mortar 1:5 and
finishing coat shall be with cement mortar 1:3. Backing coats shall be combed on
wet surface to form keys for finishing coat. All external plaster shall be
waterproofed with approved water proofing powder added to cement in
proportion of 1.5 kg To 50 kg Of cement as per the manufacturers’ instruction,
for both the coats. Cost of waterproofing powder per kg shall be paid for
separately.
8.2.5 For sand faced cement plaster, the finishing coat shall be in cement mortar 1:3,
sand used shall be of selected colour, properly graded and washed so as to give a
grained texture. Finishing plaster coat shall be 8 mm thick, uniformly applied and
surface finished with special rubbing by sponge pads and other tools and
recommended by the Consultant/Project Manager.
8.2.6 For rough cast plaster, the backing shall be floated with 3 mm thick cement mortar
1:4 with fine sand, spread in small areas not exceeding 2 sqm at a time. While
this coat is still wet, the rough cast containing a mixture of 1 part of cement, 2
parts of fine sand and 1 part of gravel, 3 to 6 mm size, shall be dashed on the
floated coat, to a uniform thickness of 15 mm thick and finished even.
8.3
White Washing
8.3.1 White washing with Lime
The wash shall be prepared from fresh stone lime (Narnau, /Satna or Dehradun
quality). The lime shall be thoroughly slaked on the spot, mixed ad stirred with
sufficient water to make a thin cream. This shall be allowed to stand for a period
of 24 hours and then shall be screened through a clean coarse cloth. 40 gm of
gum dissolved in hot water, shall be added to each 10 entire delimiters of cream.
The approximate quantity of water to be added in making ht cream will be 5
litres of water to 1 kg Of lime.
Page | 113
Indigo (Neel) up to 3 gm. per kg of lime dissolved in water, shall then be added
and wash stirred well. Water then shall be added at the rate of about 5 litres per
kg of lime to produce a milky solution.
8.3.2 Preparation of surface
Before white washing is started, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free
from mortar droppings and foreign matter. Any unevenness shall be made good
by applying putty made of plaster of Paris mixed with water on the entire surface
including filling up the undulations and then sand papering the same after it dry.
8.3.3 Application
The white wash shall be applied with moon brushes to the specified number of
coats. The operation for each coal shall consist of a stroke of the brush given
from top downwards, another from bottom upwards over the first stroke, and
similarly one stroke horizontally from the right and another from the left before
it dries up.
8.3.4 Rate
The rate shall include cost of all materials and labour involved in all the
operations described above including scaffolding, protecting doors, windows,
floor etc. from splashes and dropping.
8.4
White washing with whiting
Preparation of mix: Whiting (ground white chalk) shall be dissolved in sufficient
quantity of warm and thoroughly
stirred to form a thin slurry which shall then
be screened through a clean coarse cloth. Two kg of gum and 0.4 kg of copper
sulphate dissolved separately in hot water shall be added for every cum of the
slurry which shall then be diluted with water to the consistency of milk also as to
make a wash ready for use.
Other specifications described in above shall be applied in this case also.
8.5
Colour Washing
The mineral colours not affected by lime, shall be added to white wash. Indigo
shall however, not be added. No colour wash shall be done until a sample of the
colour wash of the required tint or shade has been got approved from the
Consultant/Project Manager. The colour shall be of even tint or shade over the
whole area.
Page | 114
8.6
A priming coat of white wash with lime or with whiting shall be applied. Two or
more coats shall then be applied on the entire surface till it represents a smooth
and uniform finish.
Other specifications described in above shall apply in this case also.
Distempering
Dry distemper of required colour and (IS; 427-1965) of approved bran and
manufacture shall be used. The shade shall be got approved from the
Consultant/Project Manager before application of the distemper. The dry
distemper colour as required shall be stirred slowly in clean water using 6
decilitres (0.6 litres) of water per kg Of distemper or as specified by the makers.
Warm water shall preferably be used. It shall be allowed to stand for atleast 30
minutes (or if practical, over night) before use. The mixture shall be well stirred
before and during use to maintain an even consistency. Distemper shall not be
mixed in larger quantity than is actually required for one days’ work.
Preparation of surface
Before new work is distempered, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free
from mortar droppings and other foreign matter and sand papered smooth.
Pitting in plaster shall be made good with plaster of paris mixed with the colour
to be used. The surface shall then be rubbed down again with a fine grade sand
paper and made smooth. A coat of distemper shall be applied over the patches.
The patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the regular coat of
distemper is applied.
A priming coat of whiting shall be applied over the prepared surface. No white
washing coat shall be used as a priming coat for distemper.
Application
The treatment shall consist of a priming coat of whiting followed by the
application of two or more coats of distemper till the surface shows an even
colour.
Other specifications described as above shall apply in this case also.
8.7
Oil emulsion (Oil bound) distempering
Material: Oil emulsion (oil bound) distemper (IS: 428-1929)
of approved
brand and manufacture shall be used. The primer used shall be cement primer
or distemper primer. This shall of same manufacture as distemper. The
Page | 115
distemper shall be diluted with water or any other prescribed thinner in a
manner recommended by the manufacturer. Only sufficient quantity of
distemper required for days work shall be prepared. The distemper and primer
shall be brought by the contractor in sealed tins in sufficient quantities, at a time
to suffice for a fortnights work. The empty tins shall not be removed from the
site of work, till this item of work has been completed and passed by the
Consultant/Project Manager.
Preparation of surface
Before new work is distempered, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free
from mortar droppings and other foreign matter and sand prepared smooth.
Pitting in plaster shall be made good with plaster of Paris mixed with the colour
to be used. The surface shall then be rubbed down again with a fine grade sand
paper and made smooth. A coat of distemper shall be applied over the patches.
The patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the regular of
distemper is applied.
A priming coat of whiting shall be applied over the prepared surface. No white
washing coat shall be used as a priming coat for distemper.
Application
The priming coat shall be with distemper or cement primer, as required in the
description of the item and as recommended by the manufacturer.
Note:
If the wall surface plaster has not dried completely cement primer shall be
applied before distempering the walls. But if distempering is done after the wall
surface is dried completely, distemper primer shall be applied.
Oil bound distemper is not recommended to be applied within six months of the
completion of wall plaster.
After the primer coat has dried for atleast 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly
sand papered to make it smooth for receiving the distemper, taking care not to
rule out the priming coat. All loose particles shall be dusted off after rubbing.
One coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner (Water or other liquid as
stipulated by the manufacture) shall be applied with brushes in horizontal
strokes followed immediately by vertical ones which together constitute one
coat. The subsequent coats shall be applied in the same way.
Page | 116
For distemper 15 cm double bristled brushes shall be used. After each days work,
brushes shall be thoroughly washed in hot water with soap solution and hung
down to dry.
The specifications in respect of scaffolding protective measures and rute shall be
as described under.
8.7
Cement Primer Coat
Cement primer shall be used as lease on wall finish of cement lime or lime
cement plaster or asbestos cement surface before oil distemper paints are
applied on them. Only approved cement primer shall be used. Primer coat shall
be preferably applied by brushing and not by spraying.
Preparation of surface
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, old white or colour wash by
washing and scrubbing. The surface then be allow to dry for atleast 48 hours. It
shall then be sand papered to give a smooth and even surface. Any unevenness
shall be made good by applying putty, made of plaster of Paris mixed with water
on the entire surface including filling up the undulations and then sand papering
the same after it is dry.
Application
Cement primer shall be applied with a brush. Horizontal strokes shall be given
first and vertical strokes shall be applied immediately afterwards. The entire
operation will constitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as uniformly as
possible leaving no brush marks. It shall be allowed to dry for atleast 48 hours,
before oil emulsion paint is applied.
Rate shall include cost of all material and labour involved in all the operations
described above including scaffolding.
8.8
Cement Paint
Cement paint shall be (conforming to IS: 5410-1969) of approved brand and
manufacture.
Preparation of surface
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mortar dropping, dirt, dust, alga,
grease and other foreign matter by brushing and washing. The surface shall be
thoroughly wetted with clean water before the cement paint is applied.
Page | 117
Preparation of mix
Cement paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up within an hour
of its mixing as otherwise the mixture will set and thicken, affecting flow and
finish.
Cement paint shall be mixed with water in two stages. The first stage shall
comprise of 2 parts of cement paint and one part of water stirred thoroughly and
allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care shall be taken to add the cement paint
gradually to the water and not vice versa. The second stage shall comprise of
adding further one part of water to the mix and stirring thoroughly to obtain a
liquid of workable and uniform consistency. In all cases the manufacturers
instructions shall be followed meticulously. The lid of cement paint drums shall
be kept tightly closed when not in use, as by exposure to atmosphere the
cement paint rapidly becomes air set due to its hydrophobic qualities.
Application
The solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface with brushes or
spraying machine. The solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of
application. It shall be applied on the surface which is on the shady side of the
building so that the direct heat of the sun on the surface is avoided. The method
of application shall be as per manufacturer’s specifications. The completed
surface shall be watered after day’s work.
Water cement paint shall not be applied on surface already treated with white
wash, colour wash distemper dry or oil bound, varnishes, paints etc. It shall not e
applied on gypsum, wood and metal surfaces.
Rate shall include cost of all material and labour involved in all the operations
described above including scaffolding.
8.9
Painting
i)
Painting priming coat of wood surface
Primer for wood work shall be as specified in the description of the item. Surface
to be primed shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness shall be
rubbed down smooth with sand paper and shall be well dusted, knots, if any,
shall be covered with preparation of red lead made by grinding red lead in water
and mixing with strong glue sized and used hot. Appropriate wood filler material
with same shade as paint shall be used where so specified.
Page | 118
ii)
The surface treated for knotting shall be dry before primer is applied. After the
primer is applied the holes and indentation on the surface shall be stopped with
glaziers putty or wood putty, stopping shall not be done before the priming coat.
Painting priming coat on Iron & Steel surfaces
All rust and scales shall be removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel wire
brushes. Hard skin of oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron during raking
which becomes loose by rushing, shall be removed. All dust and dirt shall be
thoroughly wiped away from the surface.
iii) Textured paint
The textured finish to external surfaces of walls as per manufacturer’s
specification and approved by the Consultants including scaffolding etc.
complete.
iv)
Painting priming coat on plastered surface
The surface shall ordinarily not be painted shall be applied to get correct finish
until it has dried completely. Before primer is applied, holes and undulations
shall be filled up with plaster of paris and rubbed smooth.
The primer shall be applied with brushes, worked well into the surface and
spread even and smooth. Painting shall be done by crossing and laying off. The
crossing and laying off consists of covering the area over with paint, brushing
the surface hard for the first time over and then brushing alternately in opposite
direction, two or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at
right angles to the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left the laying
off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat.
Rate
Rate shall include cost of all labour and material involved the operations
described above including scaffolding etc.
Painting with enamel paint (conforming to IS: 2933 – 1975) and with synthetic
enamel paint (conforming to IS: 1932 – 1964).
The surface to be painted shall have received the approval of the
Consultant/Project Manager after inspection, before painting is commended.
Application
The number of coats including the under coat shall be stipulated in the item.
a)
Under Coat
One coat of specified paint of shade suited to the shade of the top coat shall be
applied and allowed to dry overnight. It shall be rubbed next day with the finest
Page | 119
grade of wet abrasive paper to ensure a smooth and even surface, free from
brush marks and all loose particles dusted off.
b)
Top Coat
tops coats of specified paint of desired shade shall be applied. Each coat shall be
allowed to dry for not less than 24 hours and lightly rubbed down smooth with
finest wet abrasion paper to get an even glossy surface. If, however, the surface
is not satisfactory additional coats as required.
Page | 120
9.0
WATER PROOFING
9.1
General
It is the intent of this specification to secure a completely water tight basement
guaranteed for at least 10 (Ten) years. The contractor shall provide all materials,
labour, plant, equipment, incidentals and everything necessary for securing a
fully water proof job as called for above.
All water proofing work shall be carried out by specialists approved by the
Project Manager. Installation and materials shall be as per best practices for
obtaining water proof work and as recommended by the manufacturer.
Water proofing work shall be commenced only after the surface is prepared,
cleaned free of dirt, dust and foreign matters, inspected and approved.
Compressed air shall be used for effective cleaning of al surfaces. The vents and
other projections through the roof shall be made absolutely secure before
flashing.
9.2
Box method waterproofing to basement
9.2.1 Basement waterproofing shall comprise in two parts; first
over horizontal surfaces and second over vertical walls. The treatment shall
commence over levelling course of PCC, with a minimum of 50mm thick
impregnation layer, over which 20mm thick (average) quarried stone tiles are
laid and joints sealed with cement slurry, admixed with approved chemicals. The
RCC raft/foundation can be laid only after 7 days of grouting of the joints.
9.2.2 The treatment to the base should be extended 150mm beyond the external face
of the wall or raft. When the RCC walls
are erected, the same treatment as carried
out on the horizontal surface shall be continued over the vertical surfaces.
The
treatment shall be continued for atleast 60cms above finished ground level, unless
otherwise indicated on the drawing. The earth backfill shall commence in stages after
a minimum height of 2 meters of waterproofing is completed on the wall.
9.3
Injection method waterproofing treatment to the basement
a) Horizontal Surface: After the excavation and PC levelling course, water proofing
course shall be laid consisting of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement:3 sand) and mixed
Acrylic water proofing chemicals and embedding aggregate by hand pack at random
in two layers each of 25mm thick thus the total water proofing course shall be about
50mm thick. After the
necessary curing, inserts at 1.2 m c/c on both ways by
tying it with reinforcement in such a manners to ensure that the bottom end of the
Page | 121
pipe remain free from getting chocked and the length of the pipes shall be that of
total thickness of the raft plus 25mm above to protrude from the surface of the raft.
After concreting the raft, grouting Acrylic based water proofing chemical mixed with
neat cement slurry through the pipe inserts shall be carried and for the required
period. The projected pipe ends shall be cut after grouting the mouths. The same
procedure shall be adopted for all joints.
b) Vertical Surfaces: The vertical surface shall be treated by making holes on the
surface 1.20 m centre to centre on both ways and also at all joints, corners and fixing
nozzles of 20 mm dia pipe and inject Acrylic based chemicals mixed with neat cement
slurry as explained above. After grouting the pipe, nozzles shall be removed and the
packers shall be made good. The external surface of the walls shall be neatly
plastered with cement mortar (1:3) admixed with Acrylic Chemicals in two layer of 12
to 15 mm thick each so that the average thickness shall be 25 mm.
The minimum proportion of the approved Acrylic based chemicals to be used in
respect of ordinary Portland cement shall be 1 kg of chemical with 100 kg of cement.
The total operation has to be got done through approved agency with Ten years
guarantee on stamped paper.
9.3
SWC-SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING FOR BASEMENTS
a) Horizontal Surface: The surface area of lean concrete shall be cleaned and then
two coats of `Tape Crete’ slurry coating polymer modified cementitious
composite shall be applied over the tendered lean concrete. After placing the
reinforce cement in position 18 mm dia threaded nozzles of suitable lengths are
placed at 1.5 m centre to centre on the entire raft tied to reinforcement. Similar
nozzles shall also be provided at all joints corners and other critical points.
Adequate precaution shall be taken while concreting to keep the nozzles plugged
at both ends to prevent them from getting clogged by concrete. Raft shall be
casted admixed with `CICO SUPAPLAST water proofing compound at the rate of
0.30 litres per bag of 50 kg cement. After 3 days curing inject CICO non shrink
polymeric water proofing grouting compound admixed with cement milk through
the nozzles under pressure pump. The nozzles are than closed with suitable
`CICO’ admixture after completing total operation.
b) Vertical surface: The same operation as explained above shall be carried out for
walls also but by applying two coats of `TAPECRETE coating over the external
surface of walls.
Page | 122
9.5
The rates for the above work shall include to carryout above operation which
includes external boxing with two coats of TAPECRETE coating and injecting the
concrete with CICO non-shrink polymeric water proof grouting compound.
ROOF AND SUNKEN AREA WATER PROOFING (BRICK BAT COBA)
Brick bat coba treatment shall be got done from an approved agency. The
surface should be prepared and construction joint if any shall be raked and
cleaned. Cement slurry mixed with approved chemical compound is to be spread
on the surface so as to fill the undulations and other porous areas.
15 mm thick cement mortar mixes with approved chemical in cement mortar 1:4
(1 cement: 4 coarse sand) is laid over the prepared surface.
A layer of brick bat coba is laid over the mortar to required slope. The joints
between the brick bats should be kept 15-25 mm wide. These joints be filled with
cement mortar 1:4 mixed with specialized chemical compound. Curing is done
continuously for two days.
The top surface should be finished smooth with 20 mm thick cement mortar
(mixed with specified quantity of approved chemical). Curing of the treatment
should be done for two weeks.
The side wall shall be provided with 20 mm thick cement plaster 1:4 mixed with
specialized chemical compound upto a height of 30 cm. A 20 mm thick gola with
brick bats shall be provided and finished with cement mortar 1:4 mixed with
approved chemicals compound. The gola shall be cured continuously for two
weeks. The work shall be got done from a specialized agency duly approved by
the Consultants.
9.6
TAPECRETE WATERPROOFING
All the chasings or cuttings in the floors and walls shall be carried out prior to the
commencement of the treatment. The prepared surface than shall be plastered
with 20 mm thick average with cement mortar 1:4 mix, mixed with `Cetrool’ or
acrylic based chemicals, or `CICO’ admixture, all as per manufacturers’
specifications. The plastering shall be carried out throughout the sunken portion
and carried up to all sides of the walls up to ceiling level. The specialist then shall
carry out `TAPECRETE’ waterproofing treatment comprising of 3 coats of tape
Crete with 1st coat of tape Crete : 2 white cement), 2nd coat of tapecrete mixed
with white cement and silica sand in proportion of 1:2:1.5 (1 Tapecrete :2 white
cement : 1.5 white cement), 3rd coat of tapecrete fixed with white cement in
proportion of 1:2. After the first coat of Tapecrete all corners, junctions, joints of
pipes and masonry to be sealed with Epoxy putty. The treatment is laid
Page | 123
underneath and behind all pipes. The specification on vertical is taken 150mm
above the finished floor level and to full height where tubs/wash basin and WC
are being fixed. The depressed area then shall be filled with cement concrete
mixed with “Cetrool” or “CICO or chemicals, surface finished even and to slope
as required to receive tiles etc. Treatment for sunken portion shall be measured
and paid for on sqm basis for the Tapecrete work carried out. Plastering to walls,
and concrete item will be measured and paid for separately.
9.7
ROOF WATER PROOFING (KINI FOAM)
The surface to receive this treatment shall be cleaned, wire brushed and
prepared to receive the treatment. The treatment shall commence with the
following operations in sequence.
A coat of bituminous primer @ 400 gm/sqm then first layer of Kini Foam is laid
over semi hot asphalt @ 2 kg/sqm Over this three layers of Kini Foam 9 mm
thickness or as specified in the item of BOQ (60 kg/cum density) laid with
neoprene adhesive.
All joints are covered with 100 mm wide and 0.05 mm thick, aluminium foil fixed
with neoprene adhesive. On vertical surface, first a coat of bitumen primer is
applied. Secondly, a layer of semi hot bitumen (@ 2 kg/sqm) is applied. On top of
this a layer of Hessian based felt type 3 Grade-I is laid, on top of this, one layer of
aluminium foil and one layer of 2 mm thick Kini Foam laid with neoprene
adhesive.
9.8
MULTI-COARSE WATERPROOFING TREATMENT
Wherever specified, 5 course or 7 course treatment may be carried out, over
areas directed by the Consultant/Project Manager. The surface to receive this
treatment shall be plastered smooth, with cement mortar mixed with
waterproofing compound, measured and paid for separately.
The 7 coarse treatment shall commence with applying 1st course of primer
comprising of mineral turpentine and blown grade bitumen in the ratio 60:40 by
weight. The 2nd, 4th and 6th courses shall be blown grade bitumen conforming to
IS: 702 or residual grade bitumen conforming to IS: 73 or an approved
proprietary bituminous conforming to IS: 73 or an approved proprietary
bituminous conforming to IS: 73 or an approved proprietary bituminous
compound, at the rate of 1.5, 1.5 and 1.7 kg per sqm area respectively. The 3rd
and 5th coarse shall comprise of fibre glass RP tissue based factory made
waterproofing felt or bitumen felt or bitumen felt (Hessian base) type 3 grade I
Page | 124
(IS:1322) as specified in the bill of quantity. The 7th course shall be gravel/grit as
approved by the Consultants, spread at 6 cum per sqm of area.
In case of 5 coarse waterproofing treatment, the same process will repeat as in
case of 7 coarse except that one coarse of bitumen and one layer of tar felt stand
reduced.
9.9
ROOF GARDEN WATER PROOFING
Providing and laying waterproofing treatment for roof garden as per following
specialist’s specification:
Cleaning slab and walls surface to treated.
Cutting chase 50mm x 50mm on the walls 200mm above the grass level for the
waterproofing course to be tucked in.
Plastering roof base in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) 20mm thick,
finished smooth to receive water proofing course. A gola 10mm x 10mm in CC
1:2:4 shall be made at the junction of parapet and RCC slabs.
Providing and laying 3 layers of polymeric felt reinforced with polyethylene
membrane with 75mm side and end laps each layer laid in hot refined mineral
asphalt @ 2 kg per sqm including applying a coat of bituminous primer on
plastered roof surface and a layer of hot asphalt on top layer of Polymeric felt.
On verticals 3 layers of polymeric felt reinforced with polyethylene membrane,
each layer laid in hot refined mineral asphalt over a coat of bituminous primer
with 75 and 100 mm side and end laps respectively shall be provided.
Immediately after the waterproofing causes has been laid, it shall be covered
with 75mm thick average CC 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone aggregate
12mm down size aggregates) with providing and fixing weld mesh fabric of size
150x150x2.25mm including cutting, straightening and welding with each other
wherever, required, on horizontal surface. The water proofing course on the
vertical shall be protected with a 115mm thick cladding wall of brick masonry to
be measured and paid separately.
Providing and laying 50mm thick average Guniting with cement mortar 1:4 (1
cement : 4 coarse sand) over top of RCC slab after cleaning the surface with
water pressure and chipping/chiselling the RCC surface to form a good bond,
fixing welded wire mesh 100mm x 10mm x 10G and curing upto 7 days complete
as per specialist recommendation.
Page | 125
Providing and laying 125mm thick filter media for planters and terrace gardens in
3 layers consisting of 100mm thick layer of well graded gravels/aggregate (40mm
to 25mm size), 25mm thick layer of coarse sand and top layers of polyethylene
sheet (250 gms/sqm) laid with 150mm over laps.
Providing and laying foam concrete having density of 450 kg/cum as approved by
Consultant/Project Manager.
9.10
PAYMENT
All measurements will be for roof area only as measured on plain and no
additional area for vertical tucking/embedding upto 300mm height from top of
finish will be included for payment. The contractors’ rate will be inclusive of all
these, to make the work complete.
Page | 126
10.0
SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
10.1
General
10.1.1
This specification covers the fabrication and transportation to site and
erection on prepared foundations and structural steel work consisting of
beams, columns, vertical trusses, bracing, shear connections etc.
10.1.2
Fabrication, erection and approval of steel structures shall be in compliance
with :
- These General Specifications and IS: 800-1984
- Drawings and supplementary drawings to be supplied to
the contractors during execution of the work.
10.1.3
Providing shop primer coat for steel structures. Grouting of holding-down bolt
pockets and below base plates where required.
10.1.4
In case of conflict between the Clauses mentioned here and the Indian
Standards, those expressed in this specification shall govern.
10.2
SCOPE
10.2.1
The fabrication and erection of the steel work consists of accomplishing of all
jobs here-in enumerated including providing all labour, tools and plant all
materials and consumables such as welding electrodes, bolts and nuts, oxygen
and acetylene gases, oils for cleaning etc. of approved quality as per relevant IS.
The work shall be executed according to the drawings, specifications and the
relevant Indian Standard Codes and Standard Practice and to the complete
satisfaction of the Consultant/Project Manager.
Fabrication Drawings
10.3
10.3.1
The contractor shall prepare all fabrication and erection drawings on the basis
of design drawings supplied to him and submit the same in triplicate to the
Consultant/Project Managers for review, Consultant/Project Managers shall
review and comment, if any, on the same. Such review, if any, by the
Consultant/Project Managers, does not relieve the contractor of any of his
required guarantees responsibilities. The contractor shall however be
responsible to fabricate the structurals strictly conforming to specifications and
reviewed drawings.
10.3.2 Fabrication drawings shall include the following:
Page | 127
- Member sizes and details
- Types and dimensions of welds and bolts
- Shapes and sizes of edge preparation for welding
- Details of shop and field joints included in
assemblies.
Bill of Material
-
Quality of structural steels, welding electrodes, bolts, nuts and washers
etc. to be used.
-
Erection assemblies, identifying all transportable parts and subassemblies, associated with special erection instructions, if required.
-
Calculations where asked for, for approval.
10.3.3
Connections, splices etc. other details not specifically detailed in design
drawings shall be suitably given on fabrication drawings considering normal
detailing practices and developing full member strengths. Where asked for
calculations for the merit shall also be submitted for approval.
10.3.4
Any alternate design or change in section is allowed when approved in writing
by the Consultant/Project Manager.
10.3.5 However if any variation in the scheme is found necessary later, the contractor
will be supplied with revised drawings. The contractor shall incorporate these
changes in his drawings at no extra cost and resubmit for review.
10.3.6
Consultant/Project Managers/Consultants review shall not absolve the
contractor of his responsibility for the correctness of dimensions, adequacy of
details and connections. One copy will be returned reviewed with or without
comments to the contractor for necessary action. In the former case further
three copies of amended drawings shall be submitted by the contractor for final
review.
10.3.7 The contractor shall supply three prints each of the final reviewed drawings to
the Consultant/Project Managers within a week since final review, at no extra
cost for reference and records.
10.3.8 The Consultant/Project Managers will verify the correct interpretation of their
requirements.
Page | 128
10.3.9 If any modification is made in the design drawing during the course of execution
of the job, revised design drawings will be issued to the contractor. Further
changes arising out of these shall be incorporated by the contractor in the
fabrication drawings already prepared at no extra cost and the revised
fabrication drawings shall be duly got reviewed as per the above Clauses.
10.4
Materials
10.4.1 Rolled Sections
The following grades of steel shall be used for steel structures:
Structural steel will generally be of standard quality conforming to IS: 226.
Whenever welded construction is specified plates of more than 20 mm thickness
will generally conform to IS: 2062.
10.4.2 Welding Materials
Welding electrodes shall conform to IS: 814.
Approval of welding procedure shall be as per IS: 823.
10.4.3 Bolts, Nuts & Washers
Bolts and nuts shall be as per IS: 1367 and tested as per IS: 1608. It shall have a
minimum tensile strength of 44 kg/mm2 and minimum elongation of 23% on a
gauge length of 5.65 (A-Original cross sectional area of the gauge length).
Washers shall be as per IS: 2016.
10.4.4 All materials shall conform to their respective specifications. Use of equivalent or
higher grade or alternate materials will be considered only in very special cases
subject to the approval of the Consultant/Project Managers in writing.
10.4.5 Receipt & Storing of Materials
Steel materials supplied by the contractor must be marked for identification and
each lot should be accompanied by manufacturer’s quality certificate,
conforming chemical analysis and mechanical characteristics.
All steel parts furnished by supplier shall be checked, sorted out, straightened,
and arranged by grades and qualities in stores.
Structurals with surface defects such as pitting, cracks, laminations etc. shall be
rejected if the defects exceed the allowable tolerances specified in relevant
standards or as directed by the Consultant/Project Managers.
Page | 129
Welding wire and electrodes shall be stored separately by qualities and lots
inside a dry and enclosed room, in compliance with IS: 816 – 1969 and as per
instructions given by the Consultant/Project Managers. Electrodes shall be
perfectly dry and drawn from an electrode even if required.
Checking of quality bolts of any kind as well as storage of same shall be made
conforming to relevant standards.
Each lot of quality bolts of any kind as well as storage of same shall be made
conforming to relevant standards.
Each lot of electrodes, bolts, nuts, etc. shall be accompanied by manufacturer’s
test certificate.
The contractor may use alternative materials as compared to design specification
only with the written approval of the Consultant/Project Managers.
10.4.6 Material Tests
The contractor shall be require to produce manufacturer’s quality certificates for
the materials supplied by the contractor. Notwithstanding the manufacturer’s
certificates, the Consultant/Project Managers may ask for testing of materials in
approved test houses. The test results shall satisfy the requirements of the
relevant Indian Standards.
Whenever quality certificates are missing or incomplete or when material quality
differs from standard specifications the contractor shall conduct all appropriate
tests as directed by the Consultant/Project Managers at no extra cost.
Materials for which test certificates are not available or for which test results do
not tally with relevant standard specifications, shall not be used.
10.5
Fabrication
Fabrication shall be in accordance with IS: 800 Section V in addition to the
following:
Fabrication shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings adhering strictly
to work points and work lines on the same. The connections shall be welded or
bolted as per design drawings. Work shall also include fabricating built up
sections.
Page | 130
Any defective material used shall be replaced by the contractor at his own
expense, care being taken to prevent any damage to the structure during
removal.
All the fabricated and delivered items shall be suitably packed to be protected
from any damage during transportation and handling. Any damage caused at any
time shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost.
10.5.1 Preparation of Materials
Prior to release for fabrication, all rolled sections warped beyond allowable limit
shall be pressed or rolled straight and freed from twists, taking care that a
uniform pressure is applied.
Minor warping, corrugations etc. in rolled sections shall be rectified by cold
working.
The sections shall be straightened by hot working where the Consultant/Project
Managers so direct and shall cooled slowly after straightening.
Warped members like plates and flats may be used as such only if wave like
deformation does not exceed L/1000 but Limited to 10 mm (L-Length).
Surface of members that are to be jointed by lap or fillet welding or bolting shall
be even so that there is no gap between overlapping surfaces.
10.5.2 Marking
Marking of members shall be made on horizontal pads, of an appropriate racks
or supports in order to ensure horizontal and straight placement of such
members.
Marking accuracy shall be atleast  1 mm.
10.5.3 Cutting
Members shall be cut mechanically (by saw or shear or by oxyacetylene flame).
All sharp, rough, or broken edges, and all edges of joints which are subjected to
tensile or oscillating stresses, shall be ground.
No electric metal are cutting shall be allowed.
Page | 131
All edges cut by oxyacetylene process shall be cleaned of impurities prior to
assembly.
Cutting tolerances shall be as follows:
a)
b)
For members connected at both ends  1 mm.
Elsewhere  3 mm.
The edge preparation for welding of members more than 12 mm thick shall be
done by flame cutting and grinding. Cut faces shall not have cracks or be rough.
Edge preparation shall be as per IS: 823 – 1964.
10.5.4 Drilling
Bolts holes shall be drilled.
Drilling shall be made to the diameter specified in drawings.
No enlarging of holes, filling by mandrolling or oxyacetylene flame shall be
allowed.
Allowed variations for holes (out-of-roundness, eccentricity, plumb-line
deviation) shall be as per IS: 800.
- Maximum deviation for spacing of two holes on the same
axis shall be  1 mm.
- Two perpendicular diameters of any oval hole shall not
differ by more than 1 mm.
Drilling faults in holes may be rectified by reaming the holes to the next upper
diameter, provided that spacing of new hole centres and distance of hole centres
to the edges of members are not less than allowed and that the increase of hole
diameter does not impair the structural strength. Hole reaming shall be allowed
if the number of faulty holes does not exceed 15% of the total number of holes
for one joint.
10.5.6 Preparation of Members for Welding
Assembly of structural members shall be made with proper jigs and fixtures to
ensure correct positioning of members (angles, axes nodes etc.)
Page | 132
Sharp edges, rust of cut edges, notches, irregularities and fissures due to faulty
cutting shall be chipped or ground or filled over the length of affected area, deep
enough to remove faults completely.
Edge preparation for welding shall be carefully and accurately made so as to
facilitate a good joint.
Generally no special edge preparation shall be required for members under 8
mm thick.
Edge preparation (bevelling) denotes cutting of the same so as to result in V, X K
or U seam shapes as per IS :823.
The members to be assembled shall be clean and dry on the welding edges.
Under no circumstances shall wet, greasy, rust or dirt covered parts be
assembled. Joints shall be kept free from any foreign matter likely to get in to the
gaps between members to be welded.
Before assembly the edges to be welded as well as adjacent areas extending for
atleast 20 mm shall be cleaned (until metallic polish is achieved).
When assembling members, proper care shall be taken of welding shrinkage and
distortions, as the drawing dimensions cover finished dimensions of the
structure.
The elements shall be got checked and approved by the Consultant/Project
Managers or their authorized representative before assembly.
The permissible tolerances for assembly of members preparatory to welding
shall be as per IS: 823-1964.
After the assemble has been checked, temporary tack welding in position shall
be done by electric welding, keeping in view finished dimensions of the
structure.
10.5.7 Welding Procedures
Welding shall be carried out only by fully trained and experienced welders as
tested and approved by the Consultant/Project Managers. Any test carried out
either by the Consultant/Project Managers of their representative or the
inspectors shall constitute a right by them for such tests and the cost involved
thereon shall be borne by the contractor himself.
Page | 133
Qualification tests for welders as well as tests for approval of electrodes will be
carried out as per IS: 823. The nature of test for performance qualification of
welders shall be commensurate with the quality of welding required on this job
as judged by the Consultant/Project Managers.
The steel structures shall be automatically, semi automatically or manually
welded.
Welding shall begin only after the checks mentioned in Clause 5.1 to 5.6 have
been carried out.
The welder shall mark with his identification mark on each element welded by
him.
When welding is carried out in pen air, steps shall be taken to protect the face of
welding against wind or rain. The electrodes, wire and parts being welded shall
be dry.
Before beginning the welding operation, each joint shall be checked to ensure
that the parts to be welded are clean and root gaps provided as per IS: 823.
For continuing the welding of seems discontinued due to some reason, the end
of the discontinued seem shall be melted in order to obtain a good continuity.
Before resuming the welding operation, the groove as well as the adjacent parts
shall be well cleaned for a length of approx. 50 mm.
For single butt welds (in V, 1/2 V or U) and double butt welds (in K, double U etc.)
the re welding of the root is mandatory but only the metal deposit on the root
has been cleaned by back gouging or chipping.
The welding seams shall be left to cool slowly. The contractor shall not be
allowed to cool the welds quickly by any other method.
For multi-layer welding, before welding the following layer, the formerly welded
layer shall be cleaned metal bright by light chipping and wire brushing. Backing
strips shall not be allowed.
The order and method of welding shall be so that:
- No unacceptable deformation appears in the welded parts.
- Due margin is provided to compensate for contraction due
to welding in order to avoid any high permanent stresses.
Page | 134
The defects in welds must be rectified according to IS: 823 and as per instruction
of Consultant/Project Manager.
10.5.8 Weld Inspection
The weld seams shall satisfy the following:
- shall correspond to design shapes and dimensions.
- shall not have any defects such as cracks, incomplete penetration and fusion,
under-cuts, rough surfaces, burns blow holes and porosity etc. beyond
permissible limits.
During the welding operation and approval of finished elements, inspections and
tests shall be made as shown in annexure-B.
The mechanical characteristics of the welded joints shall be as in IS: 823.
10.5.9 Preparation of Members for Bolting
The members shall be assembled for bolting with proper jigs and fixtures to
sustain the assemblies without deformation and bending.
Before assembly, all sharp edges, rust dirt, etc. shall be removed.
Before assembly, the contacting surfaces of the members shall be cleaned and
given a coat of primer as per Is: 2074.
The members which are bolt assembled shall be set according to drawings and
temporarily fastened with erection bolts (minimum 4 pieces) to check the
coaxiality of the holes.
The members shall be finally bolted after the deviations have been corrected,
after which there shall not be gaps.
Before assembly, the members shall be checked and got approved by the
Consultant/Project Managers.
The difference in thickness of the sections that are butt assembled shall not be
more than 3% or maximum 0.8 mm whichever is less. If the difference is larger, it
shall be corrected by grinding or filling.
Reaming of holes to final diameter or cleaning of these shall be done only after
the parts have been check assembled.
Page | 135
As each hole is finished to final dimensions (reamed if necessary) it shall be set
and bolted up. Erection bolts shall not be removed before other bolts are set.
10.5.10 Bolting up
Final bolting of the members shall be done after the defects have been rectified
and approval of joints obtained.
The bolts shall be tightened starting from the centre of joint towards the edge.
10.5.11 Planing of Ends
Planing of ends of members like column ends shall be done
when so specified in the design.
by
grinding
Planing of butt welded members shall be done after these have been assembled,
the spare edges shall be removed with grinding machines or files.
The following tolerances shall be permitted on members that have been planed.
- On the length of the member having both ends planed,
maximum  2 mm with respect to design.
- Level differences of planed surfaces, maximum 0.3 mm
- Deviation between planed surface and member’s axis
maximum 1/1500.
10.5.12 Holes for Field Joints
Holes for field shall be drilled in the shop to final diameters and tested in the
shop, with trial assemblies.
When three-dimensional assembly is not possible in the shop, the holes for field
joints may be drilled in shop and reamed on site after erection, on approval by
the Consultant/Project Managers.
For bolted steel structures, trial assembly in shop is mandatory.
The tolerance for spacing of holes shall be  1 mm.
Page | 136
10.5.13
Tolerances
All tolerances regarding dimensions, geometrical shapes and sections of steel
structures, shall be as per Annexure B, if not specified in the drawing.
10.5.14
Marking for Identification
All elements and members prior to dispatch for erection shall be shop marked.
The members shall be visibly marked with a weather proof light coloured paint.
The size and thickness of the numbers shall be chosen as to facilitate the
indentification of members.
For the small members that are delivered in bundles or crates, the required
marking shall be done on small metal tags securely tied to the bundle, while the
crates shall be marked directly.
Each bundle or crate shall be packed with members for one and the same
assembly; in the same bundle or crate, general utility members such as bolts,
quests etc. may be packed.
All bills of materials showing weight, quality and dimension of contents shall be
placed in the crates.
The members shall be marked with a durable paint, in a visible location,
preferably at one end of the member so that these may be easily checked during
storage and erection.
All members shall be marked in the shop before inspection and acceptance.
When the member is being painted, the marking area shall not be painted but
bordered with white paint.
The marking and job symbol shall be registered in all shop delivery documents
(transportation, for erection etc.)
10.5.15
Shop Test Pre-assembly
For steel structures that have the same type of welding the shop test preassembly shall be performed on one out of every 10 members minimum.
For bolted steel structures, shop test pre-assembly is mandatory for all elements
as well as for the entire structure in conformity with Clause 5.12.
Page | 137
10.6
Shop Inspection and Approval
10.6.1 General
The Consultant/Project Managers or heir representative shall have free access at
all responsible times to the contractor’s fabrication shop and shall be afforded all
reasonable facilities for satisfying himself that the fabrication is being
undertaken in accordance with drawings and specifications.
Technical approval of the steel structure in the shop by the Consultant/Project
Managers is mandatory.
The contractor shall not limit the number and kinds of tests, final as well as
intermediate once, or extra tests required by the Consultant/Project Managers.
The contractor shall furnish necessary tools, gauges, instruments etc. and
technical non-technical personnel for shop tests by the Consultant/Project
Managers, free of cost.
10.6.2 Shop Acceptance
The Consultant/Project Managers shall inspect and approve at the following
stages:
The following approvals may given in shop:
- Intermediate approvals of work that cannot be inspected
later.
- Partial approvals
- Final approvals
Intermediate approval of work shall be given when a part of the work is
preformed later:
- Cannot be inspected later
- Inspection would be difficult to perform and results
would not be satisfactory.
Partial approval in the shop is given on members and assemblies of steel
structures before the primer coat is applied and includes:
Page | 138
-
Approval of materials
Approval of field joints
Approval of parts with planed surfaces
Test erection
Approval of members
Approval of markings
Inspections and approvals of special features, like
Rollers, loading platform mechanism etc.
During the partial approval, intermediate approval as well as all former
approvals, shall be taken in to consideration.
10.6.3 Final approval in the shop
The final approval refers to all elements and assemblies of the steel structures,
with shop primer coat, ready for delivery from shop to be loaded for
transportation, or stored.
10.7
The final approval comprises of:
- Partial approvals
- Approval of shop primer coat
- Approval of mode of loading and transport
- Approval of mode of loading and transport
- Approval of storage (for materials stored)
Painting and Delivery
10.7.1 Preparation of parts for shop painting
Painting shall consist of providing one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer to
steel members before dispatch from shop.
Primer coat shall not be applied unless:
- Surface have been wire brushed, cleaned of dust, oil,
rust etc.
- Erection gaps between members, spots that cannot be
painted or where moisture or other aggressive agents may penetrate, have
been filled with an approved type of oil and putty.
- The surface to be painted is completely dry.
Page | 139
- The parts where water of aggressive agents may collect (during transportation,
storage, erection and operation) are filled with putty and provided with holes for
drainage of water.
- Members and parts have been inspected and accepted
- Welds have been accepted
The following are not to be painted or protected by any other product:
- Surface which are in the vicinity of joints to be welded at site.
- Surfaces bearing markings
- Other surfaces indicated in the design.
The following shall be given a coat of hot oil or any approved resistant lubricant
only.
- Planed surfaces
- Holes for links
The surfaces that are to be embedded or in contact with the concrete shall be
given a cost of cement wash.
The surfaces which are in contact with the ground, gravel or brick work and
subject to moisture shall be given bituminous coat.
The other surfaces shall be given a primer coating.
Special attention shall be given to locations not easily accessible, where water
can collect and which after assembly and erection cannot be inspected, painted
and maintained. Holes shall be provided for water drainage and inaccessible box
type sections shall be hermetically sealed by welds.
If specified elsewhere, in the schedule of quantities, the contractor shall paint
further coats of red-oxide after erection and placing in position of the steel
structures.
Page | 140
10.7.2
Packing, transportation, delivery
After final shop acceptance and marking, the item shall be packed and loaded for
transportation.
Packing must be adequate to protect item against warping during loading and
unloading.
Proper lifting devices shall be used for loading, in order to protect items against
warping.
Slender projecting parts shall be braced with additional steel bars, before
loading, for protection against warping during transportation.
Loading and transportation shall be done in compliance with transportation
rules.
If certain parts cannot be transported in the lengths stipulated in the design, the
position and type of additional splice joints shall be approved by the
Consultant/Project Managers.
Items must be carefully loaded on platforms of transportation means to prevent
warping, bending or falling during transportation.
The small parts such as fish plates, quests etc. shall be securely tied with wire to
their respective parts.
Bolts, nuts and washers shall be packed and transported in crates.
The parts shall be delivered in the order stipulated by the Consultant/Project
Managers and shall be accompanied by document showing:
10.8
Quality and quantity of structure or members
Position of member in the structure
Particulars of structure
Identification number job symbol.
Field Erection
10.8.1 The erection work shall be permitted only after the foundation or other structure
over which the steel work will be erected is approved and is ready for erection.
Page | 141
10.8.2 The contractor shall satisfy himself about the levels, Alignment etc. for the
foundations well in advance, before starting the erection. Minor chipping etc.
shall be carried out by the contractor on his expense.
10.8.3 Any faulty erection done by the contractor shall be made good at his own cost.
10.8.4 Approval by the Consultant/Project Managers or their representatives at any
stage of work does not relieve the contractor of any of his required guarantees of
the contract.
10.8.2
Storage and preparation of parts prior to erection
The storage place for steel parts shall be prepared in advance and got approved
by the Consultant/Project Managers before the steel structures start arriving
from the shop
A platform shall be provided by the contractor near the erection site for
preliminary erection work.
The contractor shall make the following verifications upon receipt of material at
site.
- for quality certificates regarding materials and workmanship according to these
general specifications and drawings.
- Whether parts received are complete without defects due to transportation,
loading and unloading and defects, if any, are well within the admissible limit.
For the above work sufficient space must be allotted in the storage area.
Steps shall be taken to prevent warping of items during unloading.
The parts shall be unloaded, stored and stored so as to be easily identified.
The parts shall be at least 150 mm clear from ground on wooden or steel blocks
for protection against direct contact with ground and to permit drainage of
water.
If rectification of members like straightening etc. are required, these shall be
done in a special place allotted which shall be adequately equipped.
The parts shall be clean when delivered for erection.
Page | 142
10.8.6 Erection & Tolerances
Erection in general shall be carried out as required and
Consultant/Project Managers.
approved
by
the
Positioning and levelling of the structure, alignment and plumbing of the
stanchion and fixing every member of the structure shall be in accordance with
the relevant drawings and to the complete satisfaction of the Consultant/Project
Managers.
The following checks and inspection shall be carried out before during and after
erection.
- damage during transportation
- accuracy of alignment of structures
- progress and workmanship
In case there by any deviations regarding positions of foundations or anchor
bolts, which would lead to erection deviations, the Consultant/Project Managers
shall be informed immediately. Minor rectifications in foundations, orientation of
bolts holes etc. shall be carried out as part of the work, at no extra cost.
The various parts of the steel structure shall be so erected so to ensure stability
against inherent weight, wind and erection stresses.
The structure shall be anchored and final erection joints completed after plan
and elevation positions of the structural members have been verified with
corresponding drawings and approved by the Consultant/Project Managers.
The bolted joints shall be tightened so that the entire surface of the bolt heads
and nuts shall rest on the member. For parts with sloping surfaces tapered
washers shall be used.
10.9 Final acceptance and handing over the structure
10.9.1 At acceptance, the contractor shall submit the following
documents:
- Shop and erection drawings – either in tracings or reproducible.
- 4 copies of each of the following:
- shop acceptance documents
- quality certificate for structurals, plates, etc. (electrodes, welding wire,
bolts, nuts, washers etc.)
- list of certified welders who worked on erection of structures.
- acceptance and intermediate control procedure of erection operations.
Page | 143
10.9.2
Approval by the Consultant/Project Managers at any stage of work does not
relieve the contractor of any of his required guarantees of the contract.
10.10
Method of Payments
10.10.1
Payment for steel work shall be made on basis of admissible weight of the
structure accepted, the weight being determined as described in such Clause
10.10.2 below:
The rate for supply, fabrication and erection, shall include cost of all
handling and transportation to Owner’s store/site work where supply and
fabrication only area involved, trimming, straightening, edge preparation,
preparation and getting reviewed of fabrication drawings, and providing one
or more coat of Red-oxide zinc chromate primer as specified in the schedule
of quantity.
In the case, owner supplies materials the rate shall include cost of steel
materials taking delivery of the materials, from owner’s store all handling
and rehandling, loading and unloading, transport to site or work, returning
of surplus materials to owner’s stores etc. complete as well as the cost of all
handling and transport, scaffolding, temporary supports, tools and tackles,
touching up primer coat, grouting etc.
10.10.2
The actual lengths installed shall be measured and the
weight of structural material/plate shall be calculated wherever necessary
on the basis of IS handbook. If sections are different from IS section, then
manufacturers handbook shall be adopted. No allowance in weight shall be
made for rolling tolerance.
10.10.3
Sections built out of plates, structural shall be paid on the actual weight
incorporated except for gussets which will be paid on the weight of the
smallest rectangle enclosing the shape. No deductions shall be made for
skew cuts in rolled steel sections.
10.10.4
Welds, bolts, nuts, washers, etc. shall not be measured. Rate for structural
steel work shall be deemed to include the same.
10.10.5
No other payment either for temporary works connected with this contract
or for any other item such as welds, shims, pacing plates etc. shall be made.
Such item shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the rate quoted for
steel work.
Page | 144
10.11
Grouting of Pockets
10.11.1
Grouting of pockets and under base plates will be done only after the steel
work has been levelled and plumbed and the bases of stanchions are
supported by steel shims. The space below the base plate and pockets shall
be thoroughly cleaned.
10.11.2
The mortar used for grouting shall not be leaner than 1:2 (1 cement: s sand)
(grade 300 in case of concrete) and shall be mixed to the minimum
consistency required. It shall be poured under suitable head and tamped
until the space has been completely filled.
10.12
Tolerances allowed in the erection of plant building without cranes
The maximum tolerances for line and level of the steel work shall be  3.00
mm on any part of the structure. The structure shall not be out of plumb
more than 3.5 mm on each 10 M. section of height and not more than 7.0
mm per 30 M. section.
These tolerances shall apply to all parts of the structure unless the drawings
issued for erection purposes state otherwise.
Page | 145
ANNEXURE – A
INSPECTION
Inspection
Coverage
Procedure
Evaluation,
findings, and
remedy of defect
Weld seams
All welds
Naked eye or lens
All faulty welds shall
be rectified
Weld sizes
Atleast one for
each weld
seam
Ordinary
measuring
instruments (rule,
templates)
Should faulty weld
be found, all welds
shall be checked
and all defects shall
be rectified
As per IS: 823
As per IS: 823
Mechanical tests
for welding
procedure,
performance and
electrodes
Page | 146
ANNEXURE – B
INADMISSIBLE WELD DEFECTS AND TOLERANCE ALLOWED FOR WELDS
Defect
Detail
Unsatisfactory Uneven
appearance
width,
rugged
seam
Tolerance
Cause and remedy
of defect
At discretion
Uneven welding
process, voltage
fluctuation, varying
arc length,
negligence,
inexperienced
welder
Mode of
finding
defect
External
(visual)
inspection
CUT and REWELD
Unsatisfactory Shallow Zero, not
shape
or
allowed
jutting
welds
Negligence
Incomplete
weld
Zero, not
allowed
Negligence
Molten metal
flow
Zero, not
allowed
Excessive melting,
wrong handling of
electrodes
Visual
inspection
Pits
Zero, not
allowed
Wrong welding
technique
Visual
inspection
CUT & REWELD
REWELD
Visual
inspection,
template
checking
Template
checking
CUT and REWELD
Surface cracks
Zero, not
allowed
Great stress, sudden
cooling, wrong type
of electrode
Visual
inspection
CUT and REWELD
Incorrect
sectional
dimensions
a) Depth of
weld
+/- 1mm
Negligence
CHISEL and REWELD,
or GRIND
Template
checking
Page | 147
b) Weld
lengths
+/- 5mm
c) Back cuts
1mm
Negligence
CUT & REWELD, or
COMPLETE TO
LENGTH
Excessive melting
REPLACE RELEVANT
MEMBERS
Defect
Surface
porosities
Detail
Tolerance
Cause and remedy
of defect
Max 5% of
weld seam
area
Frequent
interruptions,
welding electrodes
inadequately
covered
Rule
checking
Visual
inspections
Mode of
finding
defect
Visual
inspection
CUT and REWELD
INADEQUATE APPERANCE OF WELD MAY BE ALLOWED IF NO OTHER
DEFECTS THAT MIGHT DIMINISH WELD STRENGTH ARE PRESENT. SECTIONAL
WELD SHAPE MUSTCOMPLY WITH DESIGN INDICATIONS. NO CONCAVE
WELDS SHALL BE ALLOWED. FOR SPECIFIED CONVEX WELDS, OR VICE VERSA,
TOLERANCE FOR CONCAVITY OR CONVEXITY OF WELDS SHALL BE D. 1 X A
(“a” BEING THE HEIGHT OF THE TRIANGLE WITHIN THE SECTION SHOWN),
BUT NOT MORE THAN 0.6 mm.
Page | 148
11.0
CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
11.1
Processing and Construction
11.1.1
Weather and Seasonal Limitations
Unless special precautions as specified are taken, concreting shall not be
done during extreme weather conditions, e.g., during monsoon months and
when atmospheric temperature in shade is above 40C or below 4C. For
guidelines for construction of cement concrete pavements in hot weather,
reference may be made to IRC: 61-1976.
11.1.2
Preparation of base
The base to receive the cement concrete shall be checked for line, grade and
cross-section as spelt out in Chapter 7. All irregularities beyond the
permitted tolerances shall be rectified as specified.
Where concrete is to be laid over an absorbent surface, the latter shall be
kept moist in saturated surface dry condition or covered over by a waterproof Kraft/Polyethylene sheeting as specified so as to prevent absorption of
water from the concrete mortar.
11.1.3
Fixing of formwork
The formwork shall be of correct shape, free from bends and kinks and
sufficiently rigid to maintain its shape and position under the weight and
working conditions of the laying and compacting equipment, It shall be set to
true lines and levels and securely fixed in position to prevent any subsequent
disturbance during compaction. Trueness of the formwork from the
specified profile shall be checked and any deviation greater than .3mm in 3m
rectified. No deviation shall, however, be permitted at the joints.
11.1.4
Manufacture and Placement of Concrete
Shall be carried out as specified in `Concrete Work’.
11.1.5
Adequate surcharges of concrete shall be given over the desired finished
level. The amount of surcharge shall be determined in the field by actual
trial. The surcharge shall be uniform over the entire area and the concrete as
spread shall be to the same camber and slope as the required finished
surface.
Page | 149
11.1.6
The concrete shall be compacted fully using vibrating screeds and/or internal
vibrators as specified. The vibrating screeds and internal vibrators shall
conform to IS: 2506 and IS: 2505 respectively. Compaction shall be so
controlled as to prevent excess mortar and water working on to the top due
to over vibration.
11.1.7
During compaction, any low or high spots shall be made up by adding or
removing concrete.
11.1.8
After longitudinal floating has been completed but while concrete is still
plastic, the slab surface shall be tested for trueness with a 3m straight edge
in accordance with the procedure set forth in Chapter 7. Any depressions or
high spots showing departure from the true surface shall be immediately
rectified. High spots shall be cut down and refinished. Depressions shall be
enlarged to about 8-10 cm and filled up with fresh concrete, compacted and
finished. All the above operations shall be completed within 75 minutes/ (60
minutes in hot weather) of mixing.
After correcting the surface for profile but just before the concrete becomes
non-plastic, the surface shall be finished by belting, brooming and edging as
specified.
11.1.9
11.1.10
11.2
Where the slab is to be laid in two layers, the second layer shall be placed
within 30 minutes of compaction of the lower layer.
Control of Concrete Strength
11.2.1
Cube Specimen
The strength concrete shall be ascertained either from cube specimens as
specified. For this purpose, during the progress of work, cube/beam samples
shall be cast for testing at 7 and 23 days. Sampling and testing shall be in
accordance with IS: 1199 and 516 respectively. Frequency of testing shall be
as indicated in Table.
TABLE
S. No Test
No.
1
Workability of fresh concrete
Test
Method
IS: 1199
Min. Frequency
2
Concrete strength
IS: 516
6 cubes each 30m3
3
Core strength on hardened
concrete
IS: 516
2 cores each 30m3
One test per 10 m3
Page | 150
11.2.2
Acceptance
Acceptance of the work shall not be based on a single test result but on
statistical basis, such that the lower control limit calculated for a
tolerance level of 1 in 15 test results, shall not be lower than the specified
minimum strength. The lower control limit is given by the mean value of the
set of tests minus 1.61 times the standard deviation. The work shall be taken
to meet the specification requirements when the lower control limit is
above the specified strength. Where the above requirements are not met
with or where the quality of concrete or its compaction is suspected, the
actual strength of the hardened concrete in the pavement shall be checked
as set forth.
11.3
11.3.1
Joints
Materials
All materials required for the joints viz., tie bars, dowel bars, expansion joint
filler boards and joint sealing compound shall be checked for specification
requirements before their incorporation in the work. The sealing compound
shall conform to IS: 1834.
Dowel bars shall be placed parallel to each other and parallel to the surface
and centre line of the pavement. The permissible tolerances in this regard
shall be:
 1 mm in 100 mm for dowels of 20 mm and smaller diameters;
 0.5 mm in 100 mm for dowels of diameter greater than 20 mm.
The dowel assembly shall be firmly secured in place to prevent dislocation
during concreting. Bulkheads in pairs with tight fitting holes for dowels may
be used for this purpose.
All joints spaces and grooves shall conform to the specified lines and
dimensions.
During concreting special care shall be exercised to dowels and in the vicinity
of joints. Care shall also be taken to ensure that joints do not cause any
discontinuity in the riding surface.
At the end of the curing period before opening to traffic, the joint grooves
shall be cleaned thoroughly and sealed as specified in IRC: 57-1974. Care
Page | 151
11.4
shall be taken to see that the sealing compound is not heated beyond the
specified temperature.
Curing of concrete
Curing shall commence soon after the finished pavement surface can take
the weight of the wet burlap, cotton or jute mats normally employed for
initial curing, without leaving any marks thereon. The mats shall extend
beyond the pavement edges atleast by 0.5 m and be constantly wetted.
Initial curing shall be for 24 hours or till the concrete is hard enough to
permit labour operations without damage.
Final curing, after the removal of the mats, etc. shall be carried out by wet
earth, pounding of water or other means specified. Where water is used for
curing it shall be ensured that the entire pavement surface is kept well
saturated throughout the specified curing period. Where water is scarce or
pavement is on a steep gradient, impervious membrane curing shall be
adopted as per details specified.
11.5
Checking the Quality of Hardened Concrete
Soon after the initial curing period, the surface of the hardened concrete
shall be checked for surface regularity in accordance with the procedure set
forth in Chapter 7. Surface irregularities beyond the permissible tolerances
shall be rectified as indicated in IRC: 15-1970.
Where the strength of concrete tested Vide Clause 11.4 falls below the
specified limits or where the quality of concrete or its compaction is
suspected, the actual strength of the hardened concrete shall be ascertained
by carrying out tests on cores cut from the hardened concrete. Frequency of
testing shall be as indicated in Table. Crushing strength tests on cores shall
be corrected for height-diameter ratio and age for obtaining the
corresponding cube strength at 28-days in accordance with the procedure
given in IRC: 15-1970. The corrected test results shall then be analysed for
conformity with the specification requirement on the lines of Clause 11.4.
11.6
Reinforcement
Reinforcing steel, where required to be provided, shall be checked for
specification requirements before incorporation in the pavement.
Reinforcement shall be placed as specified. Due care shall be taken to ensure
that the reinforcement is not displaced during concreting operations.
Page | 152
V) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS- PLUMBING WORKS INTERNAL &
EXTERNAL
Page | 153
CONTENTS
Section
Item
Page No.
GENERAL TECHNICAL CONDITIONS
155
I
SANITARY FIXTURES
162
II
SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPES
168
III
EXCAVATION FOR PIPE LINE
178
IV
WATER SUPPLY
182
V
SEWERAGE/DRAINAGE SYSTEM
192
Page | 154
GENERAL TECHNICAL CONDITIONS
1.
SCOPE OF WORK
1.1
Work under this contract shall consist of furnishing all labour,
materials, equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely
furnish all the plumbing and other specialized services as described hereinafter
and as specified in the schedule of quantities and/or shown on the plumbing
drawings.
1.2
Without restricting to the generally of the foregoing sanitary installations shall
include the following :
a)
Sanitary Fixtures
b)
Soil, Waste, Rainwater and vent pipes.
c)
Water supply (Internal & External)
d)
External Sewerage system
e)
Sewage disposal, septic tank and biological filtration system.
1.3
Services rendered under sub-section 1.4 shall be done without any extra charge.
1.4
The contractor must get acquainted with the proposed site for the works and
study specifications and conditions carefully before tendering. The work shall be
executed as per programme approved by the Consultant. If part of site is not
available for any reason or there is some unavoidable delay in supply of
materials stipulated by the Institute, the programme of construction shall be
modified accordingly and the contractor shall have no claim for any extras or
compensation on this account accordingly and the contractor shall have no claim
for any extras or compensation on this account.
1.5
Works area shall be the areas shown in the plan attached.
2.
SPECIFICATIONS
2.1
Work under this contract shall be carried out strictly in accordance with
specifications attached with the tender.
Page | 155
2.2
Item not covered under these specifications due to any ambiguity or misprints,
or additional works, the work shall be carried out as per specifications of the
latest central public works department with atleast amendments as applicable in
the contract.
2.3
Works not covered under para 2.1 and 2.2 shall be carried out as per relevant
Indian standards specifications or codes of practice and if not available as per
British Standards specifications or codes of practice or unified plumbing code of
U.S.A.
3.
EXECUTION WORK
3.1
The work shall be carried out in conformity with the plumbing drawings and
within the requirements Consultantural HVAC. Electrical structural and other
specialized services drawings.
3.2
The contractor shall cooperate with all trades and agencies working
on the site. He shall make provision for hangers, sleeves, structural openings
and other requirements well in advance to prevent hold up of progress of the
construction programme.
3.3
On award of the work, contractor shall submit a programme of construction in
the form of a pert chart or bar chart for approval of the Consultant. All dates and
time schedule agreed upon shall be strictly adhered to within the stipulated time
of completion/commissioning along with the specified phasing, if any.
4.
DRAWINGS
4.1
Plumbing drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual
construction permits. Any deviations made shall be in conformity with the
Consultantural and other services drawings.
4.2
Consultantural drawings shall take precedence over plumbing or other services
drawings as to all dimensions.
4.3
Contractor shall verify all dimensions at site and bring to the notice of the
Consultants all discrepancies or deviations noticed. Consultant decision shall be
final.
4.4
Large size details and manufacturers dimensions for materials to be incorporated
shall take precedence over small scale drawings.
Page | 156
4.5
Any drawings supplied with the tender shall be returned in good conditions along
with the tender.
4.6
Any drawings issued by the Consultants for the works are the property of the
Consultants and shall not be lent, reproduced or used on any works other than
intended without the written permission of the Consultants.
5.
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF MATERIALS
5.1
Contractor shall be required, if requested, to produce manufacturers test
certificate for the particular batch of materials supplied to him. The tests carried
out shall be as per the relevant Indian standards.
5.2
For examination and testing of materials and works at the site contractor shall
provide all testing and gauging equipment necessary but not limited to the
followings
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Theodolite
Dumpy level
Steel tapes
Weighing machine
Plumb bobs, spirit levels, Hammers
Micrometers
Thermometers, Stoves
Hydraulic test machine
Smoke test machine
5.3
All such equipment shall be tested for calibration at any approved laboratory, if
required by the Consultant.
5.4
All testing equipment shall be preferably located in special room meant for the
purpose.
6.
METRIC CONVERSION
6.1
All dimensions and sizes of materials and equipment given in the tender
document are commercial metric sizes.
6.2
Any weights or sizes given in the tender having changed due to metric
conversion the nearest equivalent sizes accepted by Indian standards shall be
acceptable without any additional cost.
Page | 157
7.
REFERENCE POINTS
7.1
Contractor shall provide permanent bench marks, flag tops and other
reference points for the proper execution of work and these shall
be preserved till the end of the work.
All such reference points shall be in relation to the levels and locations given in
the architectural and plumbing drawings.
7.2
8.
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
8.1
The contractor shall maintain one set of all drawings issued to him as reference
drawings. These shall not be used on site.
All corrections, deviations and changes made on the site shall be shown on these
reference drawings for final incorporation in the completion drawings. All
changes to be made shall be initiated by the Consultant.
9.
SHOP DRAWINGS
9.1
The contractor shall submit to the Consultant four copies of the shop drawings.
9.2
Shop drawings shall be submitted under following conditions.
a)
Showing any changes in layout in the plumbing drawings.
b)
Equipment layout and piping, wiring diagram.
c)
Manufacturer’s or contractor’s fabrication drawings for any materials or
equipment supplied by him.
9.3
The contractor shall submit four copies catalogues, manufacturer’s drawings,
equipment characteristic data or performance charts as required by the
Consultant.
10.
COMPLETION DRAWINGS
10.1
On completion of work contractor shall submit one complete set of original
tracing and two print of `as built’ drawings to the Consultant. These drawings
shall have the following information :
a) Run of all piping & diameters on all floors and vertical stacks.
b) Ground and invert levels of all drainage pipes together with
Page | 158
location of all manholes and connections upto outfall.
c) Run of all water supply lines with diameters, locations of
Control valves, access panels.
10.2
d) Location of all mechanical equipment with layout and piping connections.
Contractor shall provide four sets of catalogues, performance data and list of
spare parts together with the name and address of the manufacturer for all
electrical and mechanical equipment provided by him.
10.3
All warranty cards’ given by the manufacturers shall be handed over to the
Consultant.
11.
CONTRACTORS RATES
11.1
Rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of cost of materials, labour,
supervision, erection tools, plant, scaffolding, service connections, transport to
site, taxes, octroi and levels, breakage, wastage and all such expenses as may be
necessary and required to completely do all the items of work and put them in a
working condition.
11.2
Rates quoted are for all heights and depths required for this work.
11.3
All rates quoted must be for complete items inclusive of all such accessories,
fixtures and fixing arrangements, nuts, bolts, hangers as are a standard part of
the particular item except where specially mentioned otherwise.
11.4
All rates quoted are inclusive of cutting holes and chases in walls and floors and
making good the same with cement mortar/concrete of appropriate mix and
strength as directed by Consultant. Contractor shall provide holes, sleeves,
recesses in the concrete and masonry work as the work proceeds.
11.5
Rates quoted shall be inclusive of cost incurred in testing, commissioning of
works and materials.
12.
TESTING
12.1
Piping and drainage works shall be tested as specified under the relevant clauses
of the specifications.
12.2
Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Consultant.
Page | 159
12.3
All materials and equipment found defective shall be replaced and whole work
tested to meet the requirements of the specifications.
12.4
Contractor shall perform all such tests as may be necessary and required by the
local authorities to meet Municipal or other bye-laws in force.
12.5
Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment and materials for the performance
of the test.
SITE CLEARANCE AND CLEANUP
13.
13.1
The contractor shall from time to time clear away all debris and excess materials
accumulated are the site.
13.2
After the fixtures, equipment and appliances have been installed and
commissioned, contractor shall clean-up the same and remove all plaster paints
stains, stickers and other foreign matter of discoloration leaving the same in a
ready to use condition.
13.3
On completion of all works, contractor shall demolish all stores, remove all
surplus materials and leave the site in a broom clean condition failing which the
same shall be done at contractors risk and cost.
14.
LICENSE AND PERMITS
14.1
Contractor must hold a valid plumbing license by the Municipal authority or
other competent authority under whose jurisdiction the work falls.
14.2
Contractor must keep constant liaison with the Municipal authority and obtain
and approval of all drainage and water supply works carried out by him.
14.3
Contractor shall obtain, from the municipal authority, completion certificate with
respect to the work as required for occupation of the building.
14.4
All inspection fees or submission fees paid by the contractor shall be reimbursed
by the Institute on production of valid official receipts.
15
RECOVERY OF COST FOR MATERIALS ISSUED TO CONTRACTORS FREE OF COST
15.1
If any materials issued to the contractor, free of cost, are
damaged or pilfered, the cost of the same shall be recovered from the contractor
on the basis of actual cost to owner which shall include all freight and
transportation, excise duty, sales tax, octroi, import duty etc. plus 100% the
Page | 160
deduction of the actual cost given by the Institute shall be final and binding on
the contractor.
16.
CUTTING & MAKING GOOD.
No structural member shall be chased or cut without the written permission of
the Consultant.
17.
MATERIALS SUPPLYING BY INSTITUTE
17.1
The contractor shall verify that all materials supplied by the Institute conform to
the specifications of the relevant item in the tender. Any discrepancy found shall
be brought to the notice of the Consultant.
17.2
After receipt of materials, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor for any
damage found and he shall be liable to pay the actual cost of the material as per
market rate at the time.
18
MATERIALS
18.1
All materials used in the works shall conform to the tender specifications.
18.2
As far as possible materials bearing I.S. certification marks shall be used with the
approval of the Consultant.
18.3
Unless otherwise specified and expressly approved in writing by the Consultant,
material makes and specifications mentioned with tender shall be used.
19.
MOCK UP
The contractor shall install all pipes, fixtures, clamps and accessories and fixing
devices in mock-up shaft and room so constructed as directed by Consultant
without any cost. The materials used in the mock-up may be reused in the works
if found undamaged.
Any tiles or finished surfaces or floors damaged by the contractor while doing his
work shall be made good with new tiles or other finishing material. No payment
shall be admissible for such repairs. The Consultant may at his discretion get the
damaged work repairs to the contractor.
SECTION-I
Page | 161
SANITARY FIXTURES
1.
SCOPE OF WORK
1.1
Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all material and labour as
necessary and required to completely install all sanitary fixtures, brass and
chromium plated fittings and accessories as required by the drawings and
specified hereinafter or given in the schedule of quantities.
1.2
Without restricting to the generally of the foregoing the sanitary fixtures shall
include all sanitary fixtures, C.P. fittings and accessories etc. necessary and
required for the building.
1.3
Whether specifically mentioned or not all fixtures and appliances shall
provided with all fixing devices nuts, bolts, screws, hangers as required.
2.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1
All fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are required
to complete the item in working condition whether specifically mentioned or not
in the schedule of quantities, specifications, drawings or not.
2.2
All fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with a set pattern
matching the tiles or interior finish as per Consultantural/interior designer’s
requirements. Wherever necessary the fittings shall centered to dimension and
pattern desired.
2.3
Fixing screws shall be half round head chromium plated brass with C.P. washers
wherever required as per directions of Consultant.
2.4
All fittings and fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workmanlike manner true to levels
and heights shows on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Care shall be taken to fix all inlet and outlet pipes at correct
positions. Faulty locations shall be made good and any damage to the finished
floor, tiling or terrace shall be made good at contractors cost.
2.5
When directed, contractor shall install fixtures and accessories in a mock-up
room for the approval of the Consultant. Sample room fixtures may be reused on
the works if undamaged, but no additional payment for fixing or dismantling
shall be admissible.
be
Page | 162
3.
INDIAN W.C.
3.1
Indian W.C. pan shall be Orissa pattern of size as specified in the schedule of
quantities. Each W.C. shall be provided with a 100mm dia cast iron or porcelain P
or S trap with or without vent horn.
3.2
W.C. shall be flushed by means of a C.I. high level flushing cistern or low level
cistern of polyethylene body complete with accessories on an exposed or
concealed type flush valve or as specified in bill of quantities.
3.3
The W.C. shall be fixed in level in a neat workmanlike manner. The W.C. and trap
shall be set in cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size). Joints between W.C. and flush pipe shall be
made with a putty or white lead and linseed oil and caulked well or with an
approved rubber joint.
4.0
ANGLO INDIAN W.C.
4.1
Anglo Indian W.C. shall be wash down type `P’ or `S’ Trap set.
4.2
Each Anglo Indian W.C. set shall be provided with a solid plastic seat with cover
of colour given in the schedule of quantities, rubber buffers and chromium
plated hinges.
4.3
Plastic seat shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely stationery in vertical
position without falling down on the W.C.
4.4
Each Anglo Indian W.C shall be flushed with a porcelain flushing cistern or an
exposed or concealed type flush valve. Flush pipe/bend shall be connected to the
W.C. by means of a suitable rubber adapter.
5.0
EUROPEAN W.C.
5.1
European W.C. shall be wash down, single or double siphonic type, floor or wall
mounted set, flushed by means of porcelain low level flushing cistern or an
exposed or concealed type flush valve, as specified in schedule of quantities.
Flush pipe/bend shall be connected to the W.C. by means of suitable rubber
adapter. Wall hung WC shall be connected to the W.C. by means of suitable
rubber adapter. Wall hung WC shall be supported by C.I floor mounted chair.
5.2
Each W.C. seat shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely stationery in vertical
position without falling down on the W.C.
Page | 163
6.
URINALS
6.1.
Urinals shall be lipid type half shall white glazed vitreous China of approx. size
630x420x380mm size or as specified in bill of quantities.
Half stall Urinals shall be provided with 15mm dia C.P. spreader. 32 mm dia C.P
domical waste and C.P. cast brass bottle trap with pipe and wall flange and shall
be fixed to wall by one C.I bracket and two C.I. wall clips as recommended by
manufacturers complete as directed by Consultant.
6.2.
6.3
Half stall urinals shall be fixed with C.P. brass screws and shall be provided with
32mm dia domical waste leading to urinals trap.
6.4
Urinals shall be flushed by means of automatic porcelain flushing cistern or
exposed or concealed type urinal flush valve, as specified in schedule of
quantities.
6.5
Flushing cistern for urinals shall be automatic type cast iron or vitreous china as
given in the schedule of quantities. Each flushing cistern shall have a copper
siphon and inlet noose cock to control the flow. Flushing cistern shall be fixed to
wall with R.S. or C.I brackets. Cast iron cistern and brackets shall be painted with
two coats of white enamel paint. Cistern may be concealed in pipe shafts or false
ceilings where required as directed by Consultant.
6.6
Flush pipes of flushing cistern with sizes of main and branch flush pipes shall be
as follows :
No of Urinals
in range
Capacity of
cistern, litres
Size of main
flush pipe
Size of branch
flush pipe
Size of
connection to
urinal
One
5
--
--
15
Two
10
20
--
15
Three
10
25
--
15
6.7
Alternatively, urinals may be flush with flush valves, exposed or
type.
concealed
Page | 164
6.8
Waste pipes for urinals shall be any one of the following.
a)
G.I. Pipes
b)
Rigid P.V.C
c)
Lead pipes
Waste pipes may be exposed on wall or concealed in chase as directed by the
Consultant. Specifications for waste pipes shall be same as given in sub-section
8.0 to 10.0 section-II of Volume-II.
7.0
LAVATORY BASIN
7.1
Lavatory basins shall be white glazed vitreous chine or polymarble
shape and type specified in the bill of quantities.
7.2
Each basin shall be provided with R.S or C.I. brackets and clip and the basin
securely fixed to wall. Placing of basins over the brackets without secure fixing
shall not be accepted.
7.3
Each basin shall be provided with 32 mm C.P. waste with overflow, pop-up waste
or rubber plug and chain as given in the bill of quantities. 32 mm dia C.P. Brass
bottle trap with C.P. pipe to wall and flange.
7.4
Each basin shall be provided with fittings or mixing fitting as specified in the bill
of quantities.
7.5
Basins shall be fixed at proper heights as shown on drawings. If height is not
specified, the rim level shall be 79 cms above the floor or as directed by
Consultant.
8
SINKS
8.1
Sinks shall be of precast Terrazzo marble, or white glazed fireclay
or vitreous china or stainless steel or any other material as
specified in the schedule of quantities.
8.2
Each sink shall be provided with R.S. or C.I bracket and clips and securely fixed
Counter top sinks shall be fixed with suitable angle iron clips or brackets as
recommended by the manufacturer. Each sink shall be provided with 40mm dia
C.P. waste with chain and plug or P.V.C waste. Fixing shall be done as directed by
Consultant.
of size,
Page | 165
8.3
Supply fittings for sinks shall be mixing fittings or C.P. taps as
the bill of quantities.
specified
in
9.
MIRRORS
9.1
Mirrors shall be electro copper 5.5 mm thick of guaranteed reputed make. The
size shall be as specified in the bill of quantities or shown on the drawings. The
image shall be clear and without waviness at all angles of vision.
9.2
Mirrors shall be provided with backing of 12mm thick marine plywood sheet
fixed with C.P. brass semi-round headed screws and cup washers or C.P. brass
clamps as specified or instructed by Consultant.
10
SHOWER SET
10.1
Shower set shall comprise of one/two C.P. Brass concealed stop cocks with two
long body brass/C.P. brass bib cock, or bath spout or as given in the bill of
quantities.
10.2
Each shower set shall also be provided with C.P. Shower arm with wall flange and
shower head of approved quality as specified in the bill of quantities.
10.3
Concealed stop cocks shall be so fixed as to keep the wall flange clear off the
finished wall. Wall flanges embedded in the finishing shall not be accepted.
ACCESSORIES
11.
11.1
Contractor shall install all chromium plated and porcelain accessories as shown
on the drawings or directed by Consultant, and given in the bill of quantities.
11.2 All C.P. accessories shall be fixed with C.P. brass half round head screws
and
cup washers in wall with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and
shall include cutting and making good as required or directed buy Consultant.
11.3
Porcelain accessories shall be fixed in walls and set in cement mortar 1:2 (1
cement: 2 coarse sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work.
12.
URINAL PARTITIONS
12.1
Urinal partitions shall be white glazed vitreous china or 25 mm thick marble of
size specified to the schedule of quantities.
Page | 166
12.2
Porcelain partitions shall be fixed at proper heights with C.P. brass bolts, anchor
fasteners and M.S. clips as recommended by the manufacturer and directed by
Consultant.
13
MEASUREMENT
13.1
Rate for providing and fixing of sanitary fixtures accessories, urinal partitions
shall include all items and operations stated in the respective specifications and
bill of quantities and nothing extra is payable.
13.2
Rates for all items under specifications para above shall be inclusive of cutting
holes and chases and making good the same. C.P. screws, nuts, bolts and any
fixing arrangements required and recommended by manufacturers, testing and
commissioning.
Page | 167
SECTION-II
SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPES
1.0
SCOPE OF WORK
1.1
Work under this action shall consist of furnishing all labour,
materials,
equipments and appliances necessary and required to
completely install all soil,
waste, vent and rainwater pipes as required by the drawings, specified hereinafter and
given in the bill of quantities.
1.2
Without restricting to the generally of the foregoing the soil, waste, vent and
rainwater pipes system shall include the followings.
a).
Vertical and horizontal soil, waste and vent pipes, rainwater pipes and
fittings, joints clamps and connections to fixtures.
b).
Connection of pipes to gully traps & manholes etc.
c).
Waste pipes connections from all fixtures e.g. wash basin, sinks, urinals,
kitchen equipments.
d).
Testing of all pipes.
2.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1
All materials shall be new of the best quality of conforming to specifications and
subject to the approval of Consultant.
2.2
Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required
in a neat workmanlike manner.
2.3
Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and
maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.
2.4
Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals
specified.
2.5
Access doors for fittings and cleanouts shall be so located that they are easily
accessible for repair and maintenance.
2.6
All works shall be executed as directed by Consultant.
Page | 168
3.1a) Soil, waste, vent anti-siphonage and rainwater pipes shall be cast iron pipes. All
pipes shall be straight and smooth and inside free from irregular bore, blow
holes, cracks and other manufacturing defects, pipes shall be centrifugally spun
iron soil pipes conforming to I.S.3989-1970, or sand cast I.S. 1729-1967.
b)
Standard weight dimensions and pig lead required for joints shall be as follows:
For pipes conforming to I.S. 3989-1970 (Centrifugally spun soil pipes).
Nominal
dia, inches
Nominal
dia, mm
Thickness, Overall
mm
weight of 6’
length, kg
3.5
8.5
Internal
diameter of
socket, mm
73
Depth of
lead, mm
2
50
3
75
3.5
12.7
99
25
4
100
4.0
19.2
126
25
6
150
5.0
35.5
178
38
25
For conforming to I.S. 1729-1967 (sand cast iron soil pipes and fittings)
c).
Nominal
dia, inches
Nominal
dia, mm
Thickness, Overall
mm
weight of 6’
length, kg
5
11.41
Internal
diameter of
socket, mm
76
Depth of
lead, mm
2
50
3
75
5
16.52
101
25
4
100
5
21.67
129
25
6
150
5
31.91
181
38
25
Tolerance
Acceptable tolerance for pipes to I.S. 3989 and L.S. 1729 shall be as follows:
a)
Wall thickness
Length
c)
Weight
-15%
+20 mm
-10%
b)
Page | 169
3.2
Fittings
a).
Fittings shall conform to the same Indian Standard as for matching
contractor use pipes and fittings of matching specifications.
b).
Fittings shall be of the required degree of curvature with or without access
doors.
c).
Access door shall be made up with 3mm thick insertion rubber washer and white
lead. The bolts shall be lubricated with grease or white lead for easy removal
later. The fixing shall be air water tight.
3.3
Fixing
a).
All vertical pipes shall be fixed by M.S. clamp truly vertical. Branch pipe shall be
connected to the stack at the same angle as that of the fittings. No collars shall
be used on vertical stacks. Each stack shall be terminated at top with a cowl
(terminal guard).
b).
Horizontal pipes running along ceiling shall be fixed on structural adjustable
clamps of special design shown on the drawings or as directed. Horizontal pipes
shall be laid to uniform slope and the clamps adjusted to the proper levels so
that the pipes fully rest on them.
c).
Contractor shall provide all sleeves, openings, hangers, inserts during the
construction. He shall provide all necessary information to the building
contractor for making such provisions in the structure as necessary. All damages
shall be made good to restore the surface.
3.4
Cast Iron pipes for Drainage
a).
All drainage lines passing under, floors and roads, in exposed
position above
ground or at basement ceiling level shall be C.I. LA pipes position of such pipes shall be
generally shown either on ground level drawings or ceiling of basement.
b).
Cast iron pipes shall be centrifugally spun iron pipes conforming to IS: 15361967. Quality certificates shall be furnished.
c).
Fittings and Inspection Chambers.
i).
Fittings used for C.I. drainage pipe shall conform to I.S.1538-1967.
Wherever possible junction from branch pipes shall be made by `Y-tee’.
Page | 170
ii)
i)
Contractor shall provide cast iron inspection at all junction as indicated
on drawings or directed by Consultants inspection chambers shall be
specially cast with inlet, outlet and branches of appropriate and required
sizes. Branches shall be Y type wherever possible.
Cleanout plugs shall be provided on head of each drain and at location
indicated on plans or directed by Consultants. Cleanout plugs shall be of
size matching the
Laying
i)
All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be jointed with best quality soft pig
lead. which shall be free from impurities. In wet trenches joints shall be
made from lead wool. Nothing extra will be paid for lead wool joints.
Depth of pig lead and weight for joints shall be as given in sub section
3.1.2 of Section-II.
ii)
The spigot of pipe of fittings shall be centered in the adjoining socket by
caulking Sufficient turns of tarred gaskin will be given to leave unfilled the
required depth of socket for depth of 45 mm when the gaskin has been
caulked tightly barrel and against the face of the socket. Molten pig lead
shall then be poured to fill the remainder of the socket. This shall then be
done in line pouring. The lead shall then be solidly caulked with suitable
tools and hammers weighing not less than 2 Kg
iii)
For lead wool joints the socket shall be caulked with tarred gaskin as
explained above. The lead wool shall be inserted into the sockets and
tightly caulked home skein by skein with suitable tools and hammers of
not less than 2 kg Weight until joint is filled.
Testing
All cast iron pipes for drainage shall be tested to a hydraulic test of 3 meter head.
Test for straightness shall be same as for stoneware pipe given above. A test
register shall be maintained which shall be signed and dated by contractor and
representative of Consultants.
4.0
CLAMPS
4.1
M.S. clamps shall be of standard design and fabricated from MS flat 40x3mm
thick. They shall be painted with two coats of black bitumen paint before fixing.
Page | 171
4.2
Where M.S. clamps are to be fixed on RCC columns or slotted angles
walls or beam they shall be fixed with 40x3mm flat iron “U” type clamps with
anchor fasteners of approved design or 6 mm nuts and bolts.
4.3
Structural clamps shall be fabricated from M.S structural members e.g. rods,
angles, channels flats as per detailed drawing or as directed. Contractor shall
provide all nuts, bolts, welding material and paint the clamps with one coat of
red oxide and two or more coats of black enamel paint. Wooden saddles, where
required shall be provided free of cost.
4.4
Slotted angle/channel supports on walls shall be provided wherever
shown on drawings. Angles/channels shall be of sizes shown on drawings or
specified in bill of quantities, angles/channels shall be fixed to brick walls with
bolts embedded in cement concrete blocks and to angles/channels shall be fixed
to brick walls with bolts embedded in cement concrete blocks and to RCC walls
with suitable anchor fasteners. The spacing of support bolts horizontally shall not
exceed 1 mm.
4.5
Wherever M.S. clamps are required to be anchored directly to brick walls,
concrete slabs, beams or columns, nothing extra shall be payable for clamping
arrangement and making good with cement concrete 1:2:4 mix as directed by
the Consultant.
5.
TRAPS
5.1
Nahni Trap or Floor Traps
Nahni traps or floor traps shall be cast iron, deep seal with
effective seal of 50 mm. The trap and waste pipes shall be set in cement concrete
blocks firmly supported on the structural floor. The blocks shall be in 1:2:3 mix
and extended to 40 mm below finished floor level. Contractor shall provide all
necessary shuttering and centring for the blocks. Size of the block shall be 30x30
cms of the required depth.
5.2
Urinal Traps
Urinal traps shall be cast iron P or S trap with or without vent and set in cement
concrete block specified in para above without extra charge.
5.3
Floor Trap Inlet
Bath room traps and connections shall ensure free and silent flow of discharging
water. Where specified, contractor shall provide a special type cast iron inlet
Page | 172
5.4
hopper without or with one. two or three inlet sockets to receive the waste pipe.
Joint between waste and hopper inlet socket shall be lead caulked joint. Hopper
shall be connected to a C.I. P or S trap with atleast 50 mm seal (Hopper and traps
shall be paid for separately). Floor trap inlet hoppers and the traps shall be set in
cement concrete blocks as specified in para above without extra charge.
C.P/Stainless Steel Gratings
Soil, waste vent and rainwater pipes shall be jointed with refined pig lead
conforming to IS: 27-1977. A sufficient skein or jute rope shall be caulked to
leave a minimum space for the pig lead as given in sub-section 3.1.2 of section-II
to be poured in. After pouring the lead shall be caulked into the joint with
caulking tool and hammer. All surplus lead shall be cut and joint left flush with
the rim of the socket neatly.
7.0
CLEANOUT PLUGS
Contractor shall provide cast brass cleanout plugs as required. Cleanout plugs
shall be threaded and provided with key holes for opening. Cleanout plugs shall
be fixed to the pipe by a G.I. socket and lead caulked joint.
8.0
WASTE PIPE FROM APPLIANCES
8.1
Waste pipe from appliances e.g. wash basins, sinks, urinals, bathtubs, water
coolers shall be of galvanized steel, lead or PVC as given in the bill of quantities
or shown on the drawings.
8.2
All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the outfalls of drains. Pipes inside a
toilet room shall be in chase unless otherwise shown on drawings. Where
required pipes may be run at ceiling level in suitable gradient and supported on
structural clamps. Spacing for clamps for such pipes shall be as follows :
8.3
Type of pipes
Vertical
Horizontal
GI Pipes
300 cms
240 cms
PVC pipes
180 cms
120 cms
Lead pipes
120 cms
120 cms
Galvanized pipes
Pipes shall be galvanized steel tubes conforming to IS: 1239-1979 (medium class)
and quality certificates shall be furnished. Pipes shall be provided with all
required fittings e.g. tees, couplings, bends, elbows, unions, reducers, nipples,
Page | 173
plugs, all G.I. waste pipes shall be terminated at the point of connection with the
appliances with an outlet of suitable diameter.
9.0
LEAD PIPES
9.1
Where specified lead pipes shall be used for wastes and connections to antisiphonage pipes and W.C. connections.
9.2
Lead pipes shall be seamless drawn pipes conforming to IS: 404 (part-I) 1977.
Weight and wall thickness shall be as follows :
Nominal I/DI
32mm
40mm
50mm
75mm
100mm
Wall thickness
2.6mm
2.6mm
2.7mm
2.7mm
2.7mm
Wt. kg/m
3.28
3.95
5.07
7.48
9.88
9.3
Lead pipes shall be straightened by wooden mandrel and bent to required shape
by filling sand. Connection between appliances, stacks or traps shall be made
with solder joints. Solder shall be 64% lead and 36% pure tin. All lead waste pipes
in exposed positions shall be painted with one coat of red primer and two or
more coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and shade.
10.
POLYTHENE PIPES
10.1
Where specified, polythene pipes shall be high density polythene pipes
conforming to IS: 4984-78. The details of the nominal outer diameter, weight and
working pressure at 20°C shall be as per the above standards.
10.2
Polythene pipes may be cold bending to a radius of not less than eight times of
their external diameter. Pipes bent for smaller radius may be made by hot
bending.
10.3 Fittings used for polythene pipes shall be compression moulded
matching to the above specifications.
10.4
fittings
Jointing
Jointing for polythene pipes shall be made by means of butt welding or
detachable joints flanged joints or screwed joints. The type of joints shall be used
as per the side conditions. Where polythene pipes are used for rain water pipes
the pipe will be finished with G.I. joint complete as directed by Consultant.
Page | 174
10.4
All pipes shall be tested after installation for a pressure equal to twice the
maximum working pressure in the line.
11.0
CEMENT CONCRETE
11.1
Cast iron soil and waste pipes under floors in sunken slabs and in wall chases
(when cut specially for the pipe) shall be encased in cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (
1 cement : 2 coarse sand :4 stone aggregate 12mm size) 75 mm in bed and
around. When pipes are running well above the structural slab, the encased
pipes shall be supported with suitable cement concrete pillars of required height
and size at intervals at directed by Consultant.
12.0
PAINTING
12.1
Soil, waste vent and rainwater pipes in exposed location, in shafts and pipe
spaces shall be painted with two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint to give
an even shade.
12.2
Paint shall be of approved quality and shade. Where directed pipes shall be
painted in accordance with approved pipe colour code.
12.3
Waste pipes in chase shall be painted with two coats of bitumen paint, covered
with polythene tape and a final coat of bitumen paint. Exposed pipes shall be
painted with two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint.
12.4 C.I. soil and waste pipes below ground and covered in cement
concrete or lead pipes shall not be painted.
13.0
CUTTING AND MAKING GOOD
13.1
Pipes shall be fixed and tested as building proceeds. Contractor shall provide all
necessary holes cut-outs and chases in structural members as building work
proceeds. Wherever holes are cut or left originally, they shall be made good with
cement concrete 1:2:4 (cement: 2 coarse sandd: 4 stone aggregate 20mm
nominal size) or cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand) and the surface
restored as in original condition.
14.0
TESTING
14.1
Before use at site all C.I. soil pipes shall be tested by filling up with water for at
least 10 minutes. After filling, pipes shall be struck with a hammer and inspected
for blow holes and cracks. All defective pipes shall be rejected and removed from
Page | 175
the site pipes shall be rejected and removed from the site within 48 hours. Pipes
with minor sweating shall be accepted at the discretion of the Consultant.
14.2
Pipes shall be tested after installation, by filling up the stack with water. All
opening and connections shall be suitably plugged. The total head in the stack
shall however not exceed 3m.
14.3
Alternatively contractor may test all soil and waste stacks by a smoke testing
machine. Smoke shall be pumped into the stack after plugging all inlets and
connections. The top end shall however be left open. The stack shall then be
observed for leakiness and all defective pipes and fittings removed or repaired as
directed by the Consultant.
14.4
A test register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed and dated by
contractors and Consultant.
15.0
MEASUREMENTS
15.1
General
15.2
a).
Rates for all items quoted shall be inclusive of all work and items given in
the above mentioned specifications and schedule of quantities and
applicable for the work under floor in shafts or at ceiling level at all
heights and depths.
b).
All rates are inclusive of cutting holes and chases in RCC and masonry
work and making good the same.
c).
All rates are inclusive of pre testing and on site testing of the installations,
materials and commissioning.
Pipes (Unit of measurement. Linear metre to the nearest centimetre).
a).
C.I. (L.A) pipes shall be measured along the centre line when fixed,
correct to a centimetre including all fittings ad lead caulked joints along
its length.
b).
C.I. soil, waste vent and rainwater pipes shall be measured overall along
the centre line correct to a centimetre including all fittings along its
length. The rate for these pipes shall be inclusive of all fittings, holder bat
clamps, lead caulked joints and all other items described in the schedule
of quantities. Traps structural clamps and cement concrete shall however
be paid separately under the relevant item.
Page | 176
c).
15.3
G.I. PVC polythene or lead pipes shall measured per running metre
correct to a centimetre for the finished work, which shall include fittings
e.g. Bends, Tees, Elbows, Reducers, Crosses, Sockets, Nipples and Nuts bit
exclude brass of gunmetal taps (cocks), valves lead connection pipes and
shower rose. The length shall be taken along centre line of the pipes and
fittings. All pipes and fittings shall be classified according to third
diameter, method of jointing and fixing substance, quality and finish. The
diameters shall be nominal diameter of internal bore. The pipe shall be
described as including all cutting and waste. In case of fittings of unequal
bore, the largest bore shall be measured.
Cement concrete around pipes shall be measured along the centre of the pipe
line measured per linear metre and include any masonry supports, shuttering
and centring cutting complete and described in the relevant specifications.
15.4
Slotted angles/channels shall be measured per linear metre of finished length
and shall include support bolts and nuts embedded in masonry walls with
cement concrete blocks and nothing extra will be paid for making good the
same.
15.5
Painting: Painting of pipes shall be measured per running metre and shall be
inclusive of all fittings and clamps. No deduction for fittings shall be made.
15.6
Structural clamps: Structural clamps and U clamps shall be paid for by weight per
kg Rates shall be inclusive of all nuts, bolts, drilling, cutting, welding. Weight of
clamps shall be calculated from the actual length used in structural members
multiplied by it theoretical weight given in manufacturers catalogues. Weight of
nuts, bolts, shall not be taken into account.
15.7
Excavation for soil pipes: No extra payment shall be admissible with respect to
excavation, refilling and disposal of surplus earth for cast iron soil and waste
pipes.
Page | 177
SECTION-III
EXCAVATION FOR PIPE LINE
1.0
EXCAVATION
The excavation for pipe works shall be open cutting unless the permission of the
Consultant for the ground to be tunnelled is obtained in writing. Where sewers
have to be constructed along narrow passages, the Consultant may order the
excavation to be made partly in tunnel and in such cases the excavated soil shall
be brought back later on for refilling the trenches or tunnel.
1.2
Opening out Trenches
In excavation the trenches, etc. the solid road metal, pavement, curbing etc. and
turf is to be placed on one side and preserved for reinstatement when the
trenches or other excavation shall be filled up. Before any road metal is replaced,
it shall be carefully shifted. The surface of all trenches and holes shall be restored
and maintained to the satisfaction of the Consultant and of the owners of the
roads or other property traversed and the contractor shall not cut out or break
down any live fence of trees in the line of the proposed works but shall tunnel
under them, unless the Consultant shall order to the contrary.
1.3
The contractor shall grub up and clear the surface over the trenches and other
excavations of all trees, stumps roots and all other encumbrances affecting
execution of the work and shall remove them from the site to the approval of the
Consultant.
Obstruction of Roads
The contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more
than one half of the width of any road or street and sufficient
space shall then be left for public and private transit, he shall
remove the materials excavated and bring them back again when the
trench is required to be refilled. The contractor shall obtain the
consent of the Consultant in writing before closing any road to
vehicular traffic and the foot walks must be clear at all times.
1.4
Removal of Filth
All night soil, filth or any other offensive matter met with during the execution of
the works, immediately after it is taken out of any trench, sewer or cess pool,
shall not be deposited on to the surface of any street or where it is likely to be a
Page | 178
nuisance or passed into any sewer or drain but shall be at once put into the carts
and removed to a suitable place to be provided by the contractor.
1.5
Excavation to be taken to proper Depths
The trenches shall be excavated to such a depth that the pipes shall rest on
concrete or on firm bedding as described in the several clauses relating these to
so that the inverts may be at the levels given in the sections. In bad ground, the
Consultant may order the contractor to excavate to a greater depth than that
shown on the drawings and to fill up the excavation to the level of the sewers
with concrete, broken stone, gravel or other materials. For such extra excavation
and concrete, broken stone, gravel or other materials, the contractor shall be
paid extra at rates laid down for such works in the schedule, if the rates laid
down for such works in the schedule, if the extra work was ordered by the
Consultant in writing, but if the contractor should excavate the trench to a
greater depth than is required without a specific order to that effect in writing of
the Consultant the extra depth shall have to the filled up with concrete 1:5:10
mix at the contractors own cost and charges to the requirements and
satisfactions of the Consultant.
1.6
Refilling
After the pipes or other work has bee laid and proved to be water tight, the
trench or other excavations shall be refilled. Utmost care shall be taken in doing
this, so that no damage shall be caused to the sewer and other permanent work.
The filling in the haunches and upto 75 cms above the crown of the sewer shall
consist of the finest selected materials placed carefully in 15 cms layers and
flooded and consolidated. After this has been laid the trench and other
excavation shall be refilled carefully in 15 cms layers with materials taken from
the excavation, each layer being watered to assist in the consolidation unless the
Consultant shall otherwise direct.
1.7
Contractor to restore settlement and damages.
The contractor shall, at his own costs and charges, make good promptly during
the whole period the works are I hand, any settlement that may occur in the
surfaces of roads, berms, footpaths, gardens, open spaces etc. Whether public or
private caused by his trenches or by his other excavations and he shall be liable
for any accidents caused thereby. He shall also, at his own expenses and charges,
repair and make good and damage done to buildings and other property. If in the
opinion of the Consultant he fail to make good such works with all practicable
dispatch, the Consultant shall be at liberty to get the work done by the
Page | 179
1.8
contractor or deducted from any money that may be or become due to him or
recovered from him in any other manner according to the law of the land.
Disposal of Surplus Soil
The contractor shall at his own cost and charges provide places for
Disposal of all surplus material not required to be used on the works. As each
trench is refilled the surplus soil shall be immediately removed, the surface
properly restored and roadways and sides left clear.
1.9
Timbering of Sewer and Trenches
a).
The contractor shall at all times support efficiently and effectively the sides of
the sewer trenches and other excavations by suitable timbering, piling and
sheeting and they shall be close, timbered in loose or sandy strata and below the
surface of the sub soil water level.
b).
All timbering. Sheeting and piling with their wallings and supports shall be of
adequate dimensions and strength and fully braced and strutted so that no risk
of collapse or subsidence of the walls of the trench shall take place.
c).
The contractor shall be held responsible and will be accountable for the
sufficiency of all timbering, branches, sheeting and piling used as also for all
damage to persons and property resulting from improper quality, strength,
placing, maintaining or removing of the same.
1.10
Shoring of buildings
The contractor shall shore up all buildings, walls and other structures, the
stability of which is liable to be endangered by the execution of the work and
shall be fully responsible for all damages to persons or property resulting from
any accident.
1.11
Removal of water from Sewer, Trench etc.
The contractor shall at all times during the progress of the work keep the
trenches and excavations free from water which shall be disposed of by him in
manner as will neither cause injury to the public health nor to the public or
private property nor to the work completed or in progress nor to the surface of
any roads or streets, nor cause any interference with the use of the same by the
public.
Page | 180
1.12
Width and Depth of Trench
The Consultant shall have power by giving an order in writing to the contractor
to increase the maximum width in respect of which payment will be allowed for
excavation in trenches for various classes of sewer, manholes, and other works in
certain lengths to be specifically laid down by him, where on account of bad
ground or other works in certain lengths to be specifically laid down by him,
where on account of bad ground or other unusual conditions, he considers that
such increase width are necessary in view of the site conditions.
2.0
MEASUREMENTS
2.1
Excavation
Measurement for excavation of pipe trenches shall be made per linear metre
under the respective category of soil classification encountered at site.
a)
b)
Ordinary soil
Hard soil (Hard moorum & soft rock)
c)
Hard rock required chiselling
d)
Hard rock requiring blasting
i)
Trenches shall be measured between outside walls of manholes at top and the
depth shall be the average depth between the two ends to the nearest cm. The
rate quoted shall be for a depth upto 1.5 m or as given in the bill of quantities.
ii)
Payment for trenches more than 1.5m in depth shall be made separately and as
given in bill of quantities.
2.2
Refilling, consolidation and Disposal of Surplus earth
Rate quoted for Excavation of trenches shall be inclusive of refilling consolidation
and disposal of surplus earth within a lead of 50m. No separate payment for
refilling shall be made.
Page | 181
SECTION-IV
WATER SUPPLY
1.0
SCOPE OF WORK
1.1
Work under this section consists of furnishing all labour, materials equipment
and appliances necessary and required to completely install the water supply
system as required by the drawings specified hereinafter and given in the bill of
quantities.
1.2
Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the water supply system
shall include the following :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
All water lines to different parts of building and making connection from
source etc.
Pipe protection and Painting
Providing hot water system and insulation of hot water pipe
lines, wherever required.
Control valves, masonry chambers and other appurtenances.
Connections to all plumbing fixtures, kitchen equipment, tanks
and appliances.
Excavation and refilling of pipe trenches, wherever necessary.
2.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1
All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications. All
works executed shall be to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
2.2
Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required
in a neat workmanlike manner.
2.3
Short or long bends shall be used on all main pipe lines as far as possible. Use of
elbows shall be restricted for short connections.
As for as possible all bends shall be formed by means of a hydraulic pipe bending
machine for pipes up to 65mm dia.
2.4
Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and
maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passage etc.
2.5
Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals
specified.
Page | 182
2.6
Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located as to provide easy
accessibility for operations, maintenance and repairs.
3.0
3.1
G.I. PIPES, FITTINGS & VALVES
All pipes inside the building and where specified, outside the building shall be
galvanized steel tubes conforming to I.S 1239-1979 of class specified. When class
is not specified they shall be medium class.
3.2
Fittings shall be malleable iron galvanized fittings of approved make. All fittings
shall have manufacturer’s trade mark stamped on it. Fittings for G.I. pipes shall
include coupling, bends, tees, reducers, nipples, unions, bushes. Fittings shall be
of I.S.: 1879 – (Part I to X) 1975.
3.3.1 Pipes and fittings shall be jointed with screwed fittings care
shall be taken to remove burr from the end of the pipe after cutting by a round
file. Genuine red lead with grummet and a few strands of fine hemp shall be
applied. All pipes shall be fixed in accordance with layout and alignment shown
on the drawings. Care shall be taken to avoid air pockets. G.I. pipes inside toilets
shall be fixed in wall chases well above the floor. No pipes shall be run inside a
sunken floor as far as possible Pipes may be run under the ceiling or floors and
other as shown on drawings.
4.0
CLAMPS
G.I. pipes in shafts and other locations shall be supported by M.S. clamps of
design approved by Consultant. Pipe in wall chases shall be anchored by iron
hooks. Pipes at ceiling level shall be supported on structural clamps fabricated
from M.S. structural as described in section II. Pipes in typical shafts shall be
supported on slotted angles/channels as specified elsewhere.
5.0
UNIONS
Contractor shall provide adequate number of unions on all pipes to enable
dismantling later. Unions shall be provided near each gunmetal valve, stop cocks,
or check valves and on straight runs as necessary at appropriate locations as
required and/or directed by Consultant.
6.0
FLANGES
Flanged connections shall be provided on pipes where shown on the drawings,
all equipment connections as necessary and required or as directed by
Consultant. Connections shall be made with 3 mm thick insertion rubber washer.
Where hot water or steam connections are made insertion gasket shall be or
Page | 183
7.0
suitable high temperature grade and quality approved by Consultant. Bolt hole
dia for flanges shall conform to match the specification for C.I. sluice valve to I.S.
780.
TRENCHES
All G.I pipes below ground laid in trenchers shall have a minimum cover of 60
cms. Excavation for trenches shall be done as specified under section-III but the
width and depth of the trenches shall be as follows:
Diameter of pipe
15 mm to 50 mm
65 mm to 100 mm
Width of trench
30 cms
45 cms
Depth of trench
45 cms
75 cms
Where specified in the bill of quantities all G.I. pipes I trenches shall be protected
with fine sand, 15 cms thick layer all-round before filling in the trenches.
9.0
PAINTING
All pipes above ground shall be painted with one coat of red lead and two coats
of synthetic enamel paint of approved shade and quality. Pipes shall be painted
to standard colour code specified by Consultant.
9.2
All pipes in chases and below floor shall be painted with two or more coats of
anti-corrosive bitumen paint.
10.
PIPE PROTECTION
10.1
Where specified in the bill of quantities all pipes below ground shall be protected
against corrosion by two coats bitumastic paint, wrapping with polythene tape
and applying a final coat of bitumastic paint.
11.0
H.D.P.E. THREADED PIPES
11.1
The H.D.P.E pipes shall be of threaded type of G.I standard i.e. having
specifications equivalent to G.I. of IS: 1239 medium class.
11.2
The H.D.P.E pipe shall confirm to pressure rating of 10 kg/sq cm shall only be
used for internal cold water supply in the building.
11.3
All other specifications for laying and jointing shall confirm to as that G.I pipes
including for fittings etc., except No pipe protection is required in this case as
specified in para 9.1, 9.2 and 10.1.
Page | 184
12.0
GUNMETAL VALVES
12.1
Valves 65 mm dia and below shall be heavy gun metal full way valve
or globe valves conforming to I.S. 778-1971 20 kg/sq cm class valves shall be
tested at manufacturer’s works and the same stamped on it.
12.2
All valves shall be approved by the Consultant before they are allowed to be
used on work.
13.0
SLUICE VALVES
13.1
All valves 80 mm dia and above shall be C.I double flanged sluice valves. Sluice
valves shall be cast iron double flanged, with rising spindle. Each sluice valve shall
be provided with wheel for valves in exposed positions and cap top for
underground valves. Contractor shall provide suitable operating keys for sluice
valves with cap tops.
13.2
Sluice valves shall be of best quality conforming to I.S. 780-1969 of class
specified.
TESTING
14.0
14.1
All pipes, fittings and valves shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure of 7 kg/sq cm.
Pressure shall be maintained for a period of 30 minutes without any drop in
pressure after fixing at site.
A test register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed
and dated by contractor(s) and Consultant.
14.2
In addition to the sectional testing carried out during the construction,
contractor shall test entire installation after connections to the overhead tanks
or pumping system or mains. He shall rectify all leakages, and shall replace all
defective materials in the system. Any damage done due to carelessness, open or
burst pipes or failure of fittings to the building, furniture and fixtures shall be
made good by the contractor during the defects liability period without any cost.
14.3
After commissioning of the water supply system, contractor shall test each valve
by closing and opening it a number of times to observe if it is working efficiently.
Valves which do not effectively operate shall be replaced by new ones at no
extra cost and the same shall be tested as above.
Page | 185
15.0
INSULATION
15.1
Magnesia Insulation:
Hot water pipes fixed in chase shall be insulated by wrapping 6 mm thick
asbestos rope dipped in 86% magnesia solution around the pipes and finished
with a coat of 1:3 cement plaster mixed with rapid hardening cement.
External hot water pipes laid in shafts, exposed on terrace along ceiling and
trenches shall be insulated with resin bonded, rock wool. Pre-formed pipe
sections as follows :
15.2
15.2.1 Cleaning the pipe surface to be insulated to make it free from
dust and oil
15.2.2 Applying a layer of zinc chromate/anti-rust Japanese primer.
15.2.3 Fixing resin bonded rock wool preformed pipe section of app.
Density 144 kg cum.
15.2.4 Covering it all-round with 24 gauge x ¾” wire netting with proper
butt joint and tightly wrapped.
15.2.5 Applying two layers of 6 mm thick each, cement plaster in the ratio
of 1:4 (1 cement: 4 fine sand)
15.2.6 Applying weather-proofing coating of insulkote or of approved
over the cement plaster.
material
16.0
CAST IRON PIPES:
16.1
Pipes for water supply mains shall be cast iron pipes shall be centrifugally spun
iron pipes class LA conforming to I.S. 1536. Quality certificates shall be furnished.
16.2
Fittings and Inspection Chambers.
Fittings used for C.I. drainage pipe shall conform to I.S. 1538-1967. Whenever
possible junctions from branch pipes shall be made by a `Y-tee’.
Anchor Block
Suitable anchor blocks shall be provided at all bends and tees to encounter the
excessive thrust developed due to water hammer.
16.3
16.4
Rubber Joints
Page | 186
16.5
Joints between two pipes shall be made by premoulded rubber joints with
suitable tackles in a manner recommended and approved by the manufacturer.
No joints shall be covered until the lines are hydraulically tested.
Lead caulked joints :
a) Joints between pipes and C.I. fittings shall be made with refined pig lead. The
spigot of the pipe shall be centered in the adjoining socket by calking
sufficient turns of tarred gaskin which will be caulked into the joint to leave a
depth of 45 mm for pig lead. Molten pig lead shall then be poured into the
joint in one pouring. The lead shall then be solidly caulked with suitable tools
and hammers.
b) Contractor may used lead wool joints in wet trench conditions. No additional
payment for lead wool joints is admissible.
17.0
VALVES:
17.1
Sluice Valves
17.2
a)
Sluice valves shall be socket type or double flanged type conforming to
I.S.780.
b)
Joints for socket valves shall be lead caulked joints as specified above.
c)
Joints for double flanged sluice valves shall be made with suitable
tail/socket pieces on the pipe line and flanges joints made with 3 mm
thick insertion rubber gasket with appropriate umber of bolts, nuts and
washers.
d)
Sluice valves shall be installed at all branches and as shown on the
drawings.
Scour Valves:
Scour valves hall be C.I. sluice valves as specified above. They shall be installed at
the lowest level or tail end of the paten as shown on drawings and directed by
Consultant.
Page | 187
17.3
Air Valves
a)
b)
Air valves shall be single acting type air valves with cast iron body and
bronze/gunmetal internal parts and plastic float.
Each air valve shall be provided with a cast iron isolating
sluice valve of specification given above.
18.0
FIRE HYDRANTS :
18.1
Fire hydrants shall be cast iron stand post type with 63 mm dia instantaneous
gunmetal outlets conforming to I.S. 908.
18.2
Each fire hydrant shall be provided with an 80mm cast iron sluice-valve, duct
foot bend and a suitable 63mm dia flanged cast iron pipe for correcting the
installation height of the hydrant.
19.0
VALVE CHAMBERS:
Contractor shall provide suitable brick masonry chambers in cement mortar 1:5
(1 cement: 5 coarse sand) on cement concrete foundations 150mm thick 1:5:10
mix (1 cement: 5 fine sand: 10 graded stone aggregate 40mm nominal size) 15
mm thick cement plaster inside and outside finished with a floating coat of neat
cement inside with cast iron surface box approved by fire brigade including
excavation, back filling complete.
Valve chambers shall be of following size:
For depths 90 cms
For depths upto 100 cms beyond
60 x 60 cms
120 x 120 cms
20.0
TESTING
20.1
All pipes fittings and valves shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure of 7 kg/sqm
Pressure shall be maintained of a period of at least two hours without
appreciable drop in the pressure after fixing at site. (n 10%).
A test register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed and dated by
contractor(s) and Consultant.
20.2
In addition to the sectional testing carried out during the construction,
contractor shall test the entire instillation after connections to the overhead
tanks or pumping system or mains. He shall rectify all leakages, and shall replace
all defective materials in the system. Any damage done due to carelessness,
Page | 188
open or burst pipes or failure of fittings, to the building, furniture and fixtures
shall be made good during the defects liability period without any extra cost.
20.3
After completion of the water supply system, contractor shall test each valve by
closing and opening it a number of times to observe if it is working efficiently.
Valves which do not effectively operate shall be replaced by new ones at no
extra cost and the same shall be tested as above.
21.0
MEASUREMENT:
21.1
Pipes:
Pipes shall be measured per linear meter (to the nearest cm) and shall be
inclusive of all fittings e.g. couplings, tees, bends, elbows, unions, deduction for
valves shall be made, cutting holes chases and making good the same and all
items mentioned in the specifications and bill of quantities.
21.2
Gunmetal and cast iron valves shall be measured by numbers.
21.3
Single flanges shall be measured by numbers (per single flange) and shall include
bolts, nuts, washer and 3 mm thick rubber gasket complete.
21.4
Pair of flanges shall be measured by number of pairs shall include bolts, nuts,
washers, and 3mm thick rubber gasket complete.
21.5
Making Connections
Making connections to pumps, equipment, heat exchangers and appliances shall
be paid by number and shall include the labour and fixing arrangement for each
connection. Flanges, pipes and valves for connections shall be paid for separately
under the relevant items. No payment under this item shall be admissible for
making connections to R.C.C under ground tanks.
21.6
Insulation :
Insulation for hot water pipes shall be measured per linear (to the nearest cm)
along the centre line of pipe and shall be measured over all fittings and flanges.
No separate or additional payment shall be made for insulation of bends, tees,
flanges or other fittings valves. The rate shall include all items specified in the bill
of quantities and given in the specifications.
Page | 189
21.7
Aluminium cladding shall be measured by square meter area of the finished
surface. The rate shall be inclusive of all items given in the schedule of quantities.
21.8
Painting
Painting for pipes and over insulation shall be measured per linear meter over
finished surface and shall include all valves and fittings for which no deduction
shall be made.
22.0
DISINFECTION
22.1
After completion of the work contractor shall flush clean the entire system with
the city’s filtered water after connection has been made.
22.2
After the first flushing, add commercial bleaching powder or achieve a dosage of
2 to 3mg/1 of water in the system added and flushed. This operation should be
performed twice to ensure that the system is fully disinfected and usable.
23.0
PRE COMMISSIONING:
23.1
Ensure that all pipes are free from debris and obstructions.
23.2
Check all vales and fire hydrant for effective opening and closing action. Defects
should be rectified or valves replaced.
23.3
Ensure that all connections to branches have been made.
23.4
Ensure that mains have been connected to the respective pumps, underground
and overhead tanks.
23.5
Water supply should be available at main underground tank.
23.6
All main line valves should be closed.
23.0
COMMISSIONING:
24.1
Fill underground tank with water. Add 1 kg fresh bleaching powder
after making a solution to be added near inlet.
24.2
Start water supply pump and allow water to fill main underground tank. Water
will first fill the fire tank and then overflow to the domestic tanks.
Page | 190
24.3
After filling overhead reservoir drain the same to its one forth capacity through
tank scour valve. (This is to ensure removal of all mud, debris etc. from the tank).
24.4
Fill overhead tank to full.
24.5
Release water in the main lines by opening valves in each circuit. Drain out water
in the system through system scour valves or fire hydrant in lower regions.
Ensure clean water is now coming out of the system.
24.6
Open valves for individual clusters. Observe for leakages or malfunctions, check
pressure and flow at end of line by opening hydrants etc. Remove and rectify
defects notice.
24.7
Check all fire hydrants for proper operation by opening each valve and allowing
water to flow for a few minutes. Also check for effective closure of valve.
24.8
The entire water supply system should be disinfected with bleaching powder and
system flush cleaned.
24.9
Send four samples of water drawn from four extreme locations for testing for
bacteriological test in sterilized bottles obtained from the concerned laboratory.
(Laboratory personal may collect the samples themselves)
25.0
RESPONSIBILITY:
Responsibility for various activities in precommissioning and commissioning
procedures will rest with contractors.
Page | 191
SECTION-V
SEWERAGE/DRAINAGE SYSTEM
1.0
SCOPE OF WORK
1.1
Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials,
equipments and appliances necessary and required to completely finish
sewerage/drainage system as required by the drawings and specified hereinafter
or given in the bill of quantities.
1.2
Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the sewerage system shall
include :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Internal/external sewer line.
Excavations including refilling etc.
Construction of collection chambers, manholes and drop connections.
Construction of grease trap etc.
Construction of septic tanks and connection to external sewer line.
Storm water drainage and disposal
2.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
2.1
All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications and
subject to the approval of the Consultant.
2.2
Drainage lines shall be laid to the required gradients and profiles.
2.3
All drainage work shall be done in accordance with the local municipal bye-laws.
2.4
Location of all manholes, catch basins etc., shall be got confirmed from the
contractor from the Consultant before the actual execution of work at site.
2.5
All works shall be executed as directed by Consultant.
3.0
ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The sewer pipes shall be laid to alignment and gradient shall be permitted except
by the express direction in writing of the Consultant.
4.0
SALT GLAZED STONEWARE PIPES
Page | 192
4.1
Stoneware pipes shall be of first class quality salt glazed and free from rough
texture inside or outside and straight. All pipes shall have the manufacturers
name marked on it and shall comply to IS: 651-1971 approved makes (PERFECT
or BURN).
4.2
Laying and jointing of Stoneware Salt Glazed Pipes.
4.3
a)
Pipes are liable to be damaged in transit and not withstanding
tests that may have been made before dispatch each pipe shall be
examined carefully on arrival at site. Each pipe shall be rung with a
wooden hammer or mallet and those that do not ring true and clear shall
be rejected. Sound pipes shall be carefully stacked to prevent damage. All
effective pipes should be segregated, marked in a conspicuous manner
and their use in the works prevented.
b)
The pipe shall be laid with sockets leading uphill and should rest on solid
and even foundations for the full length of the barrel. Socket holes shall
be formed in the foundation sufficiently deep to allow the pipe joiner
room to work right round the pipe and as short as practicable to admit
the socket and allow the joint to be made.
c)
Where pipes are not bedded on concrete the trench bottom shall be left
slightly high and carefully bottomed up as pipe laying proceeds so that
the pipe barrels rest on firm ground. If excavation has been carried too
low it shall be made up with cement concrete 1:5”10 mix at the
contractor’s cost and charges.
d)
If the bottom of the trench consists of rock or very hard ground that
cannot be easily excavated to a smooth surface. The pipes shall be laid on
cement concrete bed of 1:5:10 mix to ensure even bearing.
Jointing of Pipes
a)
Tarred gaskin shall first be wrapped round the spigot of each pipe and the
spigot shall then be placed into the socket of the pipe previously laid, the
pipe shall then be adjusted and fixed in its correct position and the gaskin
caulked tightly home so as to fill not more than one quarter of the total
length of the socket.
b)
The remainder of the socket shall be filled with stiff mix of cement mortar
(1 cement: 1 clear sharp washed sand). When the socket is filled, a fillet
should be formed round the joint with a trowel forming an angle of 45
Page | 193
c)
4.4
degrees with the barrel of the pipe. The mortar shall be beaten up and
used after it has begun to set.
After the joint has been made any extraneous materials shall be removed
from inside of the joint with a suitable scraper or “Badger”. The newly
made joints shall be protected until set from the sun, drying winds, rain
or dust. Sacking or other materials which can be kept damp shall be used.
The joints shall be exposed and space left all round the pipes for
inspection by the Consultant. The inside of the sewer must be left
absolutely clear in bore and free from cement mortar or other
obstructions throughout its entire length, and shall efficiently drain and
discharge.
Testing
a)
All lengths of the sewer and drain shall be fully tested for water tightness
by means of water pressure maintained for not less than 30 minutes.
Testing shall be carried out from manhole. All pipes shall be subjected to
a test pressure of at least 1.5 meter head of water. The test pressure
shall, however, not exceed 1.5 meter head at any point. The pipes shall
be plugged preferably with standard design rubber plugs on both ends.
The upper end shall, however, be connected to a pipe for filling with
water and getting the required head.
b)
Sewer lines shall be tested for straightness by:
(i)
Inserting a smooth ball 12 mm less than the internal diameter
of the pipe. In the absence of obstructions such as yarn or
mortar projecting at the joints the ball should roll down the
invent of the pipe and emerge at the lower end.
(ii)
Means of a mirror at one end and a lamp at the other end. If
the pipe line is straight the full circle of light will be seen
otherwise obstruction of deviation will be apparent.
c)
The contractor shall give a smoke test to the drains and sewer at his own
expense and charges if directed by the Consultant.
e)
A test register shall be maintained which shall be signed and dated by
contractor, Consultant and representative of Consultants.
Page | 194
5.0
GULLY TRAPS
5.1
Gully traps shall be of the same quality as described for stoneware pipes in
clause 4.
5.2
Gully traps shall be fixed in cement concrete 1:5 :!) mix (1 cement : 5 coarse sand
: 10 stone aggregate 40mm nominal size) and a brick masonry chamber 30 x 30
cms inside in cement mortar 1:5 with 15x15 cms grating inside and 30x30 cms
C.I. sealed cover and frame weighting not less than 7.3 kg to be constructed as
per standard drawing. Where necessary sealed cover shall be replaced with C.I
grating of the same size.
6.0
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PIPES
6.1
All underground storm water drainage pipes and sewer lines where specified
(Other than those specified cast iron) shall be centrifugally spun RCC pipes of
specified class. Pipes shall be true and straight with uniform bore. Throughout
cracked, warped pipes shall not be used on the work. All pipes shall be tested by
the manufacturer and the contractor shall produce, when directed a certificate
to that effect from the manufacturer.
6.2
Laying
R.C.C spun pipes shall be paid on cement concrete bed or cradles as specified
and shown on the detailed drawings the cradles may be precast and sufficiently
cured to prevent cracks and breakage in handling. The invert of the cradles shall
be left 12 mm below the invert level of the pipe properly placed on the soil to
prevent any disturbance. The pipe shall than be placed on the bed concrete or
cradles and set for the line and gradient by means of sight rails and bonding rods
etc. cradles or concrete bed may be omitted, if directed by the Consultant.
6.3
Jointing
After setting out the pipes the collars shall be centered over the joint and filled in
with tarred gaskin, so that sufficient space is left on either side of the collar to
receive the mortar. The space shall then be filled with cement mortar 1:2 (1
cement : 2 fine sand) and caulked by means of proper tools all joints shall be
finished at an angle of 45 degree to the longitudinal axis of the pipe on both side
of the collars neatly.
6.4
Testing
Page | 195
All pipes shall be tested to a Hydraulic test of 1.5m head for at least 50 minutes
at the highest point in the section under test. Test shall also be carried out
similar to those for stoneware pipes given above. The smoke test shall be carried
out by the contractor, if directed by the Consultant, at the expense and charges
of the contractor. A test register shall be maintained which shall be signed and
dated by contractor/Consultant and representative of Consultant.
7.0
CAST IRON PIPES FOR DRAINAGE
7.1
All drainage lines passing under building, floors and roads with heavy traffic in
exposed position above ground e.g. service floor and basement ceiling shall be
cast iron pipes. Position of such pipes shall generally be shown on the drawings.
7.2
Cast iron pipes shall be centrifugally spun iron pipes conforming to IS: 15361967. Quality certificates shall be furnished.
7.3
Fittings and Inspection Chambers
7.4
a)
Fittings used for C.I. drainage pipes shall conform to IS: 1538-1967.
Wherever possible junction from branch pipes shall be made by a `Y tee’.
b)
Clean out plugs shall be provided on head of each drain and at location
indicated on plans or directed by Consultant. Clean out plugs shall be of
size matching the full bore of the pipe. Plugs shall be made out with G.I.
coupling caulked into the socket of the pipe or fittings. The end shall be
provided with a brass screwed plug with suitable key for opening.
Laying
a)
All cast iron and fittings shall be jointed with best quality soft pig lead
(conforming to IS: 27-1977) which shall be free from impurities. In wet
trenches joints shall be made from lead wool. Nothing extra will be paid
for lead wool joints. Depth of pig lead and weight for joints shall be as
given in I.S. code.
b)
The spigot of pipe of fittings shall be centered in the adjoining socket by
caulking. Sufficient turn of tarred gaskin to leave unfilled the required
depth of socket for depth of 45 mm when the gaskin has been caulked
tightly home. Jointing ring shall be placed round the barrel and against
then be poured to fill the remainder of the socket. This shall then be done
in one pouring. The lead shall be solidly caulked with suitable tools and
hammers weighting not less then 2 kg
Page | 196
c)
7.5
For lead wool joints the socket shall be caulked with tarred gaskin, as
explained above. The lead wool shall be inserted into the sockets and
tightly caulked home skein by skein with suitable tools and hammers of
not less than 2 kg weight until joint as filled.
Testing
All cast iron pipes for drainage shall be tested to a hydraulic test of 3 meter head.
Test for straightness shall be same as for stoneware pipe given above. A test
register shall be maintained which shall be signed and dated by contractor and
representative of Consultant.
8.0
CEMENT CONCRETE AND MASONRY WORKS
(FOR MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS ETC.)
8.1
Materials
a)
WATER: Water used for all the construction purposes shall be clear and
free from oil, acid, alkali, organic and other harmful matters, which
deteriorate the strength and/or durability of the structure. In general, the
water suitable for drinking purpose shall be considered good enough for
construction purposes.
b)
AGGREGATE FOR CONCRETE: The aggregate for concrete shall be in
accordance with I.S.383 and I.S. 515 in general, these shall be free from
all impurities that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement. Before
actual use these shall be washed in water, if required as per the direction
of Consultant. The size of the coarse aggregate shall be done as per
I.S.383.
c)
SAND: Sand for a various construction purposes shall comply in all
respects with I.S. 650 AND I.S.2116. It shall be clean, coarse hard and
strong, sharp, durable, uncoated free from any mixture of clay, dust,
vegetable matters, mica, iron impurities soft or flaky and elongated
particles, alkali, organic matters, salt, loam and other impurities which
may be considered by Consultant as harmful for the construction.
d)
CEMENT: The cement used for all the constructional purposed shall be
ordinary Portland cement or rapid hardening Portland cement
conforming to I.S. 8112.
Page | 197
8.2
8.3
e)
MILD STEEL REINFORCEMENT: The mild steel for the reinforcement bars
shall be in the form of round bars conforming to all requirements of
I.S.432 (Grade-I).
f)
BRICKS: Bricks shall have uniform colour, thoroughly burnt but not over
burnt, shall have plan rectangular faces with parallel sides and sharp right
angled edges. They should give ringing sound when struck. Brick shall not
absorb more than 20% to 22% of water, when immersed in water for 24
hours. Bricks to be used shall be approved by the Consultant.
g)
OTHER MATERIALS: Other materials not fully specified in these
specifications and which may be required in the work shall conform to
the latest I.S. All such materials shall be approved by the Consultant
before use.
Cement Concrete (Plain or Reinforced)
a)
Cement concrete pipes bedding, cradles, foundations and RCC slabs for
all works shall be mixed by a mechanical mixer where quantities of the
concrete poured at one time permit. Hand mixing on properly
constructed platforms may be allowed for small quantities by the
Consultant. Rate for cement concrete shall be inclusive of all shuttering
and centring at all depth and heights.
b)
Concrete work shall be of such thickness and mix as given in the schedule
of quantities.
c)
All concrete work shall be cured for a period of atleast 7 days. Such work
shall be kept moist by means of gunny bass at all times. All pipe trenches
and foundations shall be kept dry during the curing period.
Masonry Work
Masonry work for manholes, chambers, brick masonry pipe trench and such
other works as required shall be constructed from 1st class bricks or 2nd class as
specified in the bill of quantities in cement mortar 1:5 mix (1 cement : 5 coarse
sand). All joints shall be properly raked to receive plaster.
8.4
Cement Concrete for Pipe Support
a)
Wherever specified or shown on the drawing, all pipes shall be supported
in bed all round or in haunches. The thickness and mix of the concrete
Page | 198
shall be given in the bill of quantities. Width of the bedding shall be as
described in para `B’ of sub-section 8.4 specifications.
b)
Unless otherwise directed by the Consultant cement concrete for bed, all
round or in haunches shall be laid as follows :Type of pipe
Upto 1.5m
depth
All round
(1:4:8)
Upto 3m
depth
In haunches
(1:4:8)
Beyond 3m
depth
All round
(1:4:8)
RCC Pipes (all)
in open ground
water condition
All round
(1:4:8)
All round
(1:4:8)
All round
(1:4:8)
RCC pipes
All round
(1:4:8)
All round
(1:4:8)
All round
(1:4:8)
SW/RCC pipes or
C.I. pipes under
the building or at
road crossing or
under public places
All round
(1:4:8)
All round
(1:4:8)
All round
(1:4:8)
Stoneware pipes
in open ground
(Use 1 cement, 3-5 coarse sand, 6-10 stone aggregate 40 mm size)
c)
R.C.C pipes or C.I. pipes may be supported on brick masonry or precast
R.C.C or Cast insitu cradles. Cradles shall be as shown on the drawings.
d)
Pipes in loose soil or above ground shall be supported on brick or RCC
anchor blocks as shown on the drawings.
9.0
MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS
9.1
All manholes, chambers and other such works as specified shall be constructed in
brick masonry in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) or as specified in
the bill of quantities.
9.2
All manholes, chambers, etc. shall be supported on base of cement concrete of
such thickness and mix as given in the bill of quantities or shown on the
drawings.
Page | 199
Where not specified, manholes shall be constructed as follows:(All dimensions are in centimetres)
Size of manhole
90x80
120x90
140 dia
type
rectangular
rectangular
circular
Maximum depth
100
245
Average thickness
of RCC slab
Size of cover and
frame (Internal
diameter)
Weight of cover
and frame
15
15
Any depth
beyond 245
----
61x45.5
50 dia
50 dia
38 kg or
heavier ++
as specified
116 kg
or 208 kg or
specified
116 kg
or 208 kg or
as specified
9.3
All manholes shall be proved with cement concrete benching in 1:2:4 mix (1
cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate 20mm nominal size). The benching
shall have a slope of 10 cm towards the channel. The depth of the channel shall
be full diameter of the pipe. Benching shall be finished with a floating cost of
neat cement.
9.4
All manholes shall be plastered with 12/15 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 91
cement : 3 coarse sand) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement inside.
Manhole shall be plastered outside as above but with rough plaster.
9.5
All manholes with depths greater than 1 m. shall be provided with 20 mm square
or 25mm round rods catch rings set in cement concrete blocks 25x10x10cms in
1:2:4 mix 30cms vertically and staggered. Foot rests shall be coated with coal tar
before embedding.
9.6
All manholes shall be provided with cast iron covers and frames and embedded
in reinforced cement concrete slab. Weight of cover, frame and thickness of slab
shall be as specified in the bill of quantities or given above.
9.7
All rain water collection chamber shall be of the size 50x45x60cm (internal) with
horizontal C.I. grating. The grating along with frame shall be of size 500x450mm
grating having total Wt. Of app. 38 kg And of approved design and quality as per
instruction of Consultant. The remaining details of construction shall be same as
stated above for the construction of the manholes etc.
Page | 200
10.0
DROP CONNECTION
10.1
Drop connection shall be provided between branch sewer and main sewer or in
the main sewer itself in steep ground when the difference in invert level of the
two exceeds 45cms of the required sizes.
10.2
Drop connections from gully traps to main sewer on rectangular manholes shall
be made inside the manholes and shall have H.C.I. special type door on top and
heel rest bend at bottom connected by a H.C.I. pipe. This pipe shall be supported
by holder bat clamps at 180 cms intervals with atleast one clamp for each drop
connection. All joints shall be lead caulked joints 25mm deep.
10.3
Drop connections from branch sewer to main sewer shall be made outside the
manhole wall with glazed stoneware pipe tee connections, vertical pipe and
bend at the bottoms. The top of the tee shall be finished upto the surface level
and provided with a C.I. hinged type frame and cover 30 cms x 30 cms. The
connection shall be embedded in cement concrete 1:2:4 mix 15 cms all round the
pipe and tee upto the surface chamber of the tee.
Drop connection made from vertical stacks directly into manholes shall not be
considered as drop connections. They shall be paid for under the relevant soil
and waste pipes.
10.4
11.0
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Contractor shall connect the new sewer line to the existing manhole by cutting
the walls, benching and restoring them to the original condition. A new channel
shall be cut in the benching of the existing manhole for the new connection.
Contractor shall remove all sewage and water if encountered in making the
connection without additional cost.
12.0
MEASUREMENT
12.1
Stoneware Pipes/R.C.C Pipes/C.I. Pipes
Stoneware pipes/R.C.C pipes/C.I. pipes shall be measured for the finished length
of the pipe line per linear meter i.e. (a) lengths between manholes shall be
recorded from inside of one manhole to inside of other manhole, (b) length
between socket of pipe near gully trap and inside of manhole, Rate shall include
all items given in the schedule of quantities and specifications.
Page | 201
12.2
Gully Traps
Gully traps shall be measured by the number and rate shall include all
excavation, foundation, concrete brick masonry, cement plaster inside and
outside, C.I. grating and sealed cover and frame.
12.3
12.4
Manholes
a)
All manholes shall be measured by numbers and shall include all items
specified above and necessary excavation, refilling & disposal of surplus
earth.
b)
Manholes with depths greater than specified under the main item shall
be paid for under “Extra depth” and shall include all items as given for
manholes. Measurement shall be done to the nearest cm. Depth of the
manholes shall be measured from top of the manhole cover to bottom of
channel.
Drop connections
Drop connections shall be measured by number for a depth of 60 cms or part
thereof between invert levels. Additional depth shall be paid for as extra per
meter depth as per the actual length of the drop connection, measured to the
nearest cm.
12.5
Making Connection
Item for making connection to municipal sewer shall be paid for by number and
shall include all items given in the bill of quantities and specifications.
12.6
Masonry Drains
Payment for masonry drains shall be made under individual items of masonry,
cement concrete and plaster by volume or area as given in the bill of quantities.
12.7
Brick masonry and cement concrete shall be measured per cubic meter and shall
include all items as given in the bill of quantities.
12.8
Cement plaster shall be measured per square meter area.
Page | 202
13.
SEPTIC TANK
13.1
Location
It should be located at a place open to sky, as far away as possible from the
exterior of the wall of building and should not be located in swampy area prone
to flooding and in a place where maintenance and mechanical clearing is easily
carried out.
13.2
Ventilation
The ventilating pipe shall extend to a height which would cause smell nuisance to
any building min the area. The ventilation pipe is extended to a height of about
2m when the tank is beyond 20m of any habitable building and to a height of 2m
above the top of the building when it is located within 20m. The final termination
of vent can be done as per site conditions, keeping the above guidelines.
13.3
Wall
The walls of the tank should be 1st class brick with 1:3 sand cement mortar and
plastered both inside and outside with 12mm thick plaster of 1:3 mix sand
cement and waterproof compound to make the wall waterproof.
13.4
Floor
The floor should be of 1:2:4 plain concrete with waterproof compound to make it
water proof.
13.5
Commissioning
The tank should be filled with water to its outlet level before the sewerage is let
into the tank. It should be seeded with small quantities of well digested sludge
obtained from any septic tank which is in operation.
Page | 203
ABSTRACT OF COST
Name of work: Renovation and extension of one floor of Main Existing Building & Construction of
Annex Building, at BIRLA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY, MESRA EXTENSION CAMPUS, SECTOR 01,
NOIDA
SubHead
No.
Estimated
Amount
Details of Sub-Head
CIVIL (part A)
1
2
3
4
5
6
DEMOLITION & DISMANTLING
EARTH WORK
CONCRETE WORKS
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE WORKS
BRICK WORK
STONE WORK
7
8
9
10
11
STRUCTURAL STEEL & STAINLESS STEEL WORKS
FINISHING
ALUMINIUM WORKS
WATER PROOFING
MISCELLANEOUS
TOTAL
PLUMBING AND FIRE FIGHTING(part B)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SANITARY WARE INSTALLATION
INTERNAL DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY INSTALLATION
EXTERNAL DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
EXTERNAL STORM WATER DRAINAGE
INSTALLATION
WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE PUMPS
WATER TREATMENT PLANT (optional item)
ELECTRICAL WORKS FOR PLUMBING
INSTALLATION WORKS
FIRE FIGHTING PLANT ROOM EQUIPMENTS
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS & EXIT
SIGNAGES
DISMANTLING
TOTAL PART B
TOTAL PART A AND B
Expected payback for dismantled items like
pipelines, sanitary fixtures, etc. been property
of Contractor after dismantling. Only items
included in replacing above tender to be
included (strictly as per directions of the
Consultant)
GRAND TOTAL
Rs.
Rs.
less
Rs.
Rs.
Page | 204
VI) SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES (CIVIL WORKS)
B.O.Q.
S.No.
DWG. NO.
APPLICATION
AREA
DESCRIPTION
1
DISMANTLING AND DEMOLISHING
1.1
Demolishing cement concrete manually
/ by mechanical means including
disposal of material within lead as per
direction of Engineer-in -charge.
BIT/NOI/TD/EXT/AR/01,-02,
1.1.1
BIT/NOI/TD/EXT/AR/02,-03,--04
1.2
BIT/NOI/TD/EXT/AR/02,-03,--04
1.3
Nominal concrete 1:4:8 or leaner mix (
including equivalent design mix )
cum
47
Entrance hall,
Stair case, All
window
projection,
Entrance canopy1 & 2, Proposed
Lift shaft
Demolishing R.C.C. work manually / by
mechanical means including stacking of
steel bars and disposal of unserviceable
material within lead as per direction of
Engineer-in-Charge.
cum
105
Entrance hall,
Stair case, All
window
projection,
Entrance canopy1 & 2, Proposed
Lift shaft
Extra for cutting reinforcement bars
manually / by mechanical means in
R.C.C. or R.B. work (Payment shall be
made on the cross sectional area of
R.C.C. or R.B. work) as per direction of
Engineer - in -charge.
sqm
700
Extra for scrapping, cleaning and
straightening reinforcement from
R.C.C. or R.B. work.
Kg
350
In cement mortar .
Dismantling doors, windows and
clerestory windows (steel or wood)
shutter including chowkhats, architrave,
holdfasts etc. complete and stacking
within lead as per direction of Engineerin-Charge.:
cum
1307
Of area 3 sq. metres and below
each
320
each
320
BIT/NOI/TD/EXT/AR/01,-02,---03,---04
All existing floors
1.5.1
BIT/NOI/TD/EXT/AR/01,-02,---03,---04
1.6
All existing floors
1.6.1
1.7
1.7.1
BIT/NOI/TD/EXT/AR/01,-02,---03,---04
QTY
Existing Office,
Servant Quarter,
& Canteen, Main
block flooring for
excavation upto
lift pit depth.
1.4
1.5
UNIT
All existing floors
RATE
Demolishing brick work manually / by
mechanical means including stacking of
serviceable material and disposal of
unserviceable material within lead as
per direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
Taking out doors, windows and
clerestory window shutters (steel or
wood) including stacking within lead as
per direction of Engineer-in-Charge.:
Of area 3 sq. metres and below
Page | 205
AMOUNT
1.8
Dismantling tile work in floors and roofs
laid in cement mortar including stacking
material within lead as per direction of
Engineer-in-Charge..
1.8.1
For thickness of tiles 10 mm to 25 mm
sqm
1307
1.90
Demolishing brick tile covering in
terracing including stacking of
serviceable material and disposal of
unserviceable material within
lead as per direction of Engineer-inCharge..
sqm
936
1.10
Dismantling C.I. or asbestos rain water
pipe with fittings and clamps including
stacking the material within lead as per
direction of Engineer-in-Charge. :
metre
108
metre
243
1.12
Taking out C.I. cover with frame from
R.C.C. top slab of manholes of various
sizes including demolishing of R.C.C.
work manually/ by mechanical means
and stacking of useful materials near
the site and disposal of unserviceable
materials within lead as perdirection of
Engineer-in-charge.
each
15
1.13
Taking out C.I. cover with frame from
R.C.C. top slab of inspection chambers
of various sizes including demolishing of
R.C.C. work
manually/ by mechanical means and
stacking of useful materials near the
site and disposal of unserviceable
materials within 50 metres
lead as per direction of Engineer-incharge.
each
8
1.14
Dismantling of flushing cistern of all
types (C.I./PVC/Vitrious China) including
stacking of useful materials near the
site and disposal of unserviceable
materials within lead as per direction of
Engineer-in-Charge..
each
24
1.10.1
1.11
1.11.1
150 mm dia pipe
Dismantling C.I. pipes including
excavation and refilling trenches after
taking out the pipes, manually/ by
mechanical means breaking lead
caulked joints, melting of lead and
making into blocks including stacking of
pipes & lead at site within 50 metre
lead as per direction of Engineer-incharge:
Up to 150 mm diameter
Page | 206
1.15
Dismantling 15 to 40 mm dia G.I. pipe
including stacking of dismantled pipes
within lead as per direction of Engineerin-Charge. as per direction of Engineerin-Charge. (a) Internal Work - Exposed
on wall
metre
1.16
Dismantling old plaster or skirting
raking out joints and cleaning the
surface for plaster including disposal of
rubbish to the dumping ground within
as/direction of Engineer incharge.
sqm
All existing floors
60
1520
TOTAL
Page | 207
2
B.O.Q.
S.No.
EARTHWORK
DWG. NO.
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
2.3
APPLICATION
AREA
DESCRIPTION
Excavation for
footing layout of
Annex Block &
proposed Lift pit
of Ext. Main
Building.
Earth work in excavation by mechanical
means(hydraulic excavatotrs) / manual
means in foundation trenches or drains
(not exceeding 1.5 m in width or 10
sqm on plan) including dressing of sides
and ramming of bottoms, lift upto 1.5
m, including getting out the excavated
soil and disposal of surplus excavated
soil as directed within a lead of 50m.
All kinds of soil.
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/AR/01,-02,
-----------
Upto plinth lvl
and sides of
foundation to
make leveled
surface for
flooring of Annex
Block.
Filling available excavated earth
(excluding rock) in trenches, plinth,
sides of foundations etc. in layers not
exceeding 20cm in depth: consolidating
each deposited layer by ramming and
watering , lead up to 50m and lift up to
15m
-----------
Excavation for
footing layout of
Annex Block,
specially in
proposed lift pit
area of Annex
Block & Ext. Main
building .
Extra for every additonal lift of 1.5 m or
part thereof in :
All kinds of soil.
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/AR/01,-02
QTY
RATE
cum
480
2.3.1
2.4
UNIT
at Annex Block
flooring
2.5
at Annex Block
only
2.5.1
at Annex Block
only
2.5.2
at Annex Block
only
2.6
at Annex Block
only
2.6.1
at Annex Block
only
Supplying and filling in plinth with sand
under floors, including watering,
ramming, consolidating and dressing
complete.
Supplying chemical emulsion in sealed
containers including delivery as
specified.
Chlorpyriphos / Lindane emulsifiable
concentrate of 20%
cum
1288
cum
47
cum
38
litre
7
Diluting and injecting chemical
emulsion for POST-CONSTRUCTIONAL
anti-termite treatment (excluding the
cost of chemical emulsion) :
Along external wall where the apron is
not provided using
chemical emulsion @ 7.5 litres / sqm of
the vertical surface of
the substructure to a depth of 300 mm
including excavation
channel along the wall & rodding etc.
complete:
With Chlorpyriphos/ Lindane E.C. 20%
with 1% concentration
SUB HEAD TOTAL
metre
147
Page | 208
AMOUNT
3
B.O.Q.
S.No.
CONCRETE WORKS
DWG. NO.
APPLICATION
AREA
3.1
3.1.1
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/SR/01(a)
3.2
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/SR/01(a)
at Annex block
Below Plinth
Beam
at Annex block
Foundation
Footing base &
Main Building
Façade of brick
work footings
DESCRIPTION
CEMENT CONCRETE
Providing and laying in position
cement concrete of specified grade
excluding the cost of centring and
shuttering - All work upto plinth
level
1:4:8 (1 Cement : 4 coarse sand
(zone-III) : 8 graded stone
aggregate 40 mm nominal size)
1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand
(zone-III): 10 graded stone
aggregate 40 mm nominal size).
UNIT
cum
QTY
RATE
AMOUNT
0.49
cum
48.74
DAMP-PROOF COURSE
3.3
3.4
3.5
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/SR/01(a)
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/SR/01(a)
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/AR/01,-02
at Annex block
& Main building
external façade
brick works ,just
on top of plinth
beam
at Annex block
just on top of
plinth beam
perimeter of
Main & Annex
block
Providing and laying damp-proof
course 40mm thick with cement
concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse
sand (zone-III): 4 graded stone
aggregate 12.5mm nominal size)
Extra for providing and mixing water
proofing material in cement
concrete work in doses by weight of
cement as per manufacturer's
specification.
MISCELLANEOUS
Making plinth protection 50mm
thick of cement concrete 1:3:6 (1
cement :3 coarse sand : 6graded
stone aggregate 20mm nominal size)
over 75mm bed by dry brick ballast
40mm nominal size well rammed
and consolidated and grouted with
fine sand including finishing the top
smooth
sqm
49.83
per 50
kg
cement
33.87
sqm
337.35
SUB HEAD TOTAL
4
B.O.Q.
S.No.
REINFORCED CEMENT CONRETE
DWG. NO.
APPLICATION
AREA
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE
AMOUNT
FORM WORK
4.1
Centring and shuttering including strutting,
propping etc. and removal of form for all
heights.
All shuttering except slab bottom to be in
shuttering grade ply. Only slab bottom to be in
MS plates without rivets.
Page | 209
4.1.1
Foundations, footings, bases of columns etc.
for mass concrete.
sqm
114
4.1.2
Walls (any thickness) including attached
pilasters, butteresses, plinth and string courses
etc.
sqm
85
4.1.3
Suspended floors, roofs, landings, balconies
and access platform.
sqm
3959
4.1.4
Columns, Pillars, Piers, Abutments, Posts and
Struts
sqm
1395
4.1.5
Stairs, (excluding landings) except spiralstaircases
sqm
139
4.1.6
Suspended Floors, roofs, landings, balconies &
access platform with water proof ply 12mm
thk.
sqm
86
4.1.7
Lintels, beams, plinth beams, girders,
bressumers and cantilevers with water proof
ply 12mm thk
sqm
2134
sqm
3188
kilogram
12960
kilogram
156321
Extra for additional height in centring,
shuttering where ever required with adequate
bracing, propping etc. including cost of deshuttering and decentring at all levels, over a
height of 3.5 m, for every additional height of
1 metre or part thereof (Plan area to be
measured)
4.2
Suspended floors, roofs, landing, beams and
balconies (Plan area to be measured)
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
4.2.1
4.3
Reinforcement for R.C.C. work including
straightening, cutting, bending, placing in
position and binding all complete upto Plinth
4.3.1
As/
proposed
all Str
drawings
All proposed RCC
works of main
block & Annex
block
Reinforcement for R.C.C. work including
straightening, cutting, bending, placing in
position and binding all complete above plinth
level.
4.4
4.4.1
Thermo-Mechanically Treated bars.
As/
proposed
all Str
drawings
All proposed RCC
works of main
block & Annex
block
Thermo-Mechanically Treated bars.
Page | 210
MISCELLANEOUS
DESIGN MIX CONCRETE
4.5
Providing and laying in position machine
batched and machine mixed design mix M-25
grade cement concrete for reinforced cement
concrete work, using cement content as per
approved design mix, including pumping of
concrete to site of laying but excluding the
cost of centering, shuttering, finishing and
reinforcement, including admixtures in
recommended proportions as per IS: 9103 to
accelerate, retard setting of concrete, improve
workability without impairing strength and
durability as per direction of Engineer-incharge.“(Note :- Cement content
considered in this item is @ 330
kg/cum.“Excess/ less cement used as per
design mix is payable/recoverable separately).
4.5.1
4.5.2
As/
proposed
all Str
drawings
As/
proposed
all Str
drawings
All proposed RCC
works of main
block & Annex
block
All proposed RCC
works of main
block & Annex
block
4.6.2
cum
197
All works above plinth level
cum
477
All works upto plinth level
cum
0
All works above plinth level upto floor V level
cum
559
Providing and laying in position ready mixed
M-25 grade concrete for reinforced cement
concrete work, using cement content as per
approved design mix, manufactured in fully
automatic batching plant and transported to
site of work in transit mixer for all leads,
having continuous agitated mixer,
manufactured as per mix design of specified
grade for
reinforced cement concrete work, including
pumping of R.M.C. from transit mixer to site of
laying , excluding the cost of centering,
shuttering finishing and reinforcement,
including cost of admixtures in recommended
proportions as per IS : 9103 to accelerate/
retard setting of concrete,improve workability
without impairing strength and durability as
per direction of the Engineer-in-charge.
(Note :- Cement content considered in this
item is @ 330 kg/cum. Excess/less cement
used as per design mix is payable/recoverable
separately)
4.6
4.6.1
All works upto plinth level
As/
proposed
all Str
drawings
As/
proposed
all Str
drawings
All proposed RCC
works of main
block & Annex
block
All proposed RCC
works of main
block & Annex
block
Page | 211
4.7
4.7.1
4.8
4.8.1
Providing and fixing of expansion joint system
related with floor location as per drawings and
direction of Engineer-In-Charge. The joints
system will be of extruded aluminum base
members, self aligning / self centering
arrangement and support plates etc. as per
ASTM B221-02. The system shall be such that
it provides floor to floor /floor to wall
expansion control system for various vertical
locations in load application areas that
accommodates multi directional seismic
movement without stress to it's components.
System shall consist of metal profiles with a
universal aluminum base member designed to
accommodate various project conditions and
finish floor treatments. The cover plate shall
be designed of width and thickness required to
satisfy projects movement and loading
requirements and secured to base members
by utilizing manufacturer’s pre-engineered
self-centering arrangement that freely rotates
/ moves in all directions. The Self - centering
arrangement shall exhibit circular sphere ends
that lock and slide inside the corresponding
aluminum extrusion cavity to allow freedom of
movement and flexure in all directions
including vertical displacement. Provision of
Moisture Barrier Membrane in the Joint
System to have water tight joint is mandatory
requirement all as per the manufactures
design and as approved by Engineer -inCharge. (Material shall conform to ASTM
6063).
Floor Joint of 100 mm gap
Providing and fixing of expansion joint system
related with wall joint (internal/ external)
location as per drawings and direction of
Engineer-In- Charge. The joints shall be of
extruded aluminum base members, self
aligning / centering arrangement and support
plates as per ASTM B221- 02. The
material shall be such that it provides an
Expansion Joints System suitable for vertical
wall to wall/ wall to corner application, both
new and existing construction in office
Buildings & complexes with no slipping
down tendency amongst the components of
the Joint System. The Joint System shall utilize
light weight aluminum profiles exhibiting
minimal
exposed
aluminum
surfaces
mechanically snap locking the multicellular to
facilitate movement. (Material shall conform
to ASTM 6063.)
Wall Joint of 100 mm gap
metre
18
metre
314
Page | 212
4.9
4.9.1
Providing and fixing of expansion joint system of
approved make and manufacture for various roof
locations as per approved drawings and direction of
Engineer-In-Charge. The joints shall be of extruded
aluminum
base members with, self aligning and self centering
arragement support plates as per ASTM B221-02.
The system shall be such that it provides water tight
roof to roof /roof to corner joint cover expansion
control
system
that is capable of accommodating multidirectional
seismic movement without stress to its components.
System shall consist of metal profile that
incorporates a universal aluminum base member
designed to accommodate various project
conditions and roof treatments. The cover plate shall
be designed of width and thickness required to
satisfy movement and loading requirements and
secured
to
base members
by utilizing
manufacturer’s
pre-engineered
self-centering
arrangement that freely rotates / moves in all
directions. The Self centering arrangement shall
exhibit circular sphere ends that lock and slide inside
the corresponding aluminum extrusion cavity to
allow
freedom
of
movement
and flexure in all directions including vertical
displacement. The Joint System shall resists damage
or deterioration from the impact of falling ice,
exposure to UV, airborne contaminants and
occasional
foot
traffic
from maintenance personnel. Provision of Moisture
Barrier Membrane in the Joint System to have water
tight joint is mandatory requirement. (Material shall
confirm to ASTM 6063.)
Roof Joint of 100 mm gap
metre
18
SUB HEAD TOTAL
Page | 213
5
B.O.Q.
S.No.
BRICK WORK
DWG. NO.
APPLICATION
AREA
5.2
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/SR/01,
01(a)
All proposed Brick
works footing in
Annex block
foundation &
Main Block
external façade
foundation.
Cement mortar 1:6 (1 cement : 6 course
sand)
As/ proposed all Arch.
drawings
All proposed Brick
works in Annex
block façade &
Main block
proposed façade.
Brick work with common burnt clay
F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of class
designation 7.5 in superstructure above
plinth level up to floor V level in all
shapes and sizes in :
Cement mortar 1:6 (1 cement : 6 course
sand)
HALF BRICK MASONRY
5.2.2
5.3
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/AR/04,
05,06,07, All side
elevation , All Skin
section
5.3.1
5.4
5.5
UNIT
QTY
RATE
Brick work with common burnt clay
F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of class
designation 7.5 in foundation and plinth
in:
5.1
5.1.1
DESCRIPTION
at external wall
façade from First
floor roof slab lvl
to Terrace
parapet lvl of
main building &
Annex build
as/Architecture
drawings
cum
93
cum
699
sqm
2120
sqm
433
sqm
2120
Half brick masonry with common burnt
clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of class
designation 7.5 in superstructure above
plinth level up to floor V level
Cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 course
sand)
Extra for half brick masonry in
superstructure, above floor V level for
every four floors or part thereof by
mechanical means.
Extra for providing and placing in
position 2 Nos 6mm dia. M.S. bars at
every third course of half brick masonry.
SUB HEAD TOTAL
Page | 214
AMOUNT
6
B.O.Q.
S.No.
STONE / CLADDING WORKS
DWG. NO.
6.1
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/AR/04,
05,06,07, All side
elevation , All Skin
section
APPLICATION
AREA
at external wall
façade from Plinth
lvl to First floor
Roof slab lvl of
main building &
from Plinth to
mumty top of
Annex Block
as/Architecture
drawings
6.2
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/AR/04,
05,06,07, All side
elevation , All Skin
section or as/shop
drawings
at external wall
façade from First
floor roof slab lvl
to Terrace parapet
lvl of main
building only
as/Architecture
drawings
6.3
on window cills
under aluminum
windows
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Providing and fixing 5-8mm thk.
Sculpture stone finish panels complete
including fixing with adhesive of
manufacturers specifications. Size of
the stone shall be 916 x 458 mm/as
per architects directions, complete
with stone look in rough finish and
ribbed with design as per Unistone or
equivalent. Weight 12-15 kg/sqm and
tensile strength 11.4 MPA.
sqm
2211
Providing and Fixing ‘Unistone’ or
equivalent Extruded Vitrified Clay Tiles
made from special extrusion process
having 10 mm wide dovetailed grooves
at the rear part of the tiles. The tiles
would be made from special vitrified
clay and firing temperature would be
more than 1100o Celsius. The
dimension of the tile should be 9” X 3”
or 9 “X 2” and the thickness of tile
should be maximum 15 mm allowing
variance of (+/‐) 2.5 mm. The tiles top
surface should be coated with Silicone
and surface water absorption should
not exceed 1% and be immersion
method it should be less than 6%. The
compressive strength of the product
should be equivalent to 70N/mm2 The
tiles should be fixed on surface having
rough plaster of cement mortar in 1:3
ratio (1 Cement: 3Coarse sand) and the
fixing agent used should be Unistone
Tile Adhesive or equivalent and the
tiles should be fixed as per
manufacturer’s laying instructions.
sqm.
2558
Providing and fixing 18 mm thick gang
saw cut, mirror polished, premoulded
and prepolished, machine cut for
kitchen platforms, vanity counters,
window sills , facias and similar
locations of required size, approved
shade, colour and texture laid over 20
mm thick base cement mortar 1:4 (1
cement : 4 coarse sand), joints treated
with white cement, mixed with
matching pigment, epoxy touch ups,
including rubbing, curing, moulding
and polishing to edges to give high
gloss finish etc. complete at all levels.
sqm
RATE
Granite of any colour and shade
Area of slab over 0.50 sqm
sqm
209.00
SUB HEAD TOTAL
Page | 215
AMOUNT
7
B.O.Q.
S.No.
Structural Steel & Stainless Steel works
DWG. NO.
APPLICATION
AREA
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
7.1
Structural steel work in single section,
fixed with or without connecting plate,
including cutting, hoisting, fixing in
position and applying a priming coat of
approved steel primer all complete.
kgs
113
7.2
Providing and fixing in position
collapsible steel shutters with vertical
channels 20x10x2 mm and braced with
flat iron diagonals 20x5 mm size, with
top and bottom rail of T-iron 40x40x6
mm, with 40 mm dia steel pulleys,
complete with bolts, nuts, locking
arrangement, stoppers, handles,
including applying a priming coat of
approved steel primer.
sqm
47
sqm
2780
sqm
9018
sqm
2744
BIT/NOI/TD/PRO/AR/04,
05,06,07, &
Door/Window details.
At first floor Annex
Block and two
ends of all lvl of
connecting bridge
between Existing
Main Block to
Annex Block
RATE
SUB HEAD TOTAL
8
FINISHING
8.1
8.1.1
CEMENT PLASTER
12mm cement plaster of mix
1:6 (1 cement : 6 coarse sand)
15 mm cement plaster on the rough
side of single or half brick wall of mix :
1:6 (1 cement : 6 coarse sand)
EXTERIOR FINISHING
Finishing walls with Premium Acrylic
exterior paint with Silicone additives of
required shade:
New work (Two or more coats applied
@ 1.43 ltr/10 sqm over and including
priming coat of exterior primer applied
@ 2.20 kg/10 sqm)
8.1.2
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.1.1
SUB HEAD TOTAL
Page | 216
AMOUNT
9
B.O.Q.
S.No.
9.1
ALUMINIUM WORK
DWG. NO.
APPLICATION
AREA
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE
Design, Fabricate, deliver (to job site) and
install casement window AW 40.NI from
Schueco India Solar & Windows Pvt. Ltd. or
equivalent. The system to be pressure
equalised, ventilated and drained. The outer
frame and vent frame should be made of
Aluminium Alloy 6063 T6 with a depth of
40mm. The vertical member should not deflect
more than L/175 or 19mm whichever is the
least for a wind load of 1.82 kPa. The
horizontal member should not deflect more
than 3mm due to dead load and 15mm due to
wind load of 1.82 kPa. The system should
accommodate 24mm DGU (6mm Toughened
glass + 12mm Air Space + 6mm Heat
strengthened glass) in vision areas (refer
glazing specification mentioned as a separate
BOQ item). All gaskets to be EPDM. The system
should have already been tested/accredited by
an international independent testing
laboratory. The system should comply with an
Air infiltration requirement of ±600 Pa when
tested in accordance with EN 1026, Static water
penetration of 600 Pa in accordance with EN
1027.
The system should be capable of passing a
repeat air infiltration of ±600 Pa, Static water of
600 Pa after design load of ±1.8 kPa. The
system should also comply with a proof load of
±2.7kPa. All exposed profiles should be powder
coated to a minimum of 60 microns. All anchor
fasteners to be made of SS 304 grade. All shims
to be capable of transferring the load evenly
and made of a suitable material (GI, Teflon etc)
capable of lasting the life span of the system.
All miscellaneous items such as peripheral
sealants, backer rods, flashing, fasteners,
brackets etc to be included in the rate.
9.1.1
9.1.1.1
9.1.2
For fixed portion
Powder coated aluminium (minimum thickness
of powder coating 60 micron)
For shutters of doors, windows & ventilators
including providing and fixing hinges/ pivots
and making provision for fixing of fittings
wherever required including the cost of EPDM
rubber / neoprene gasket required.
kg
2521
Page | 217
AMOUNT
Design, Fabricate, deliver (to job site) and
install Sliding system AS 39 SC.NI from Schueco
India Pvt. Ltd. or equivalent. The outer frame
and vent frame should be made of Aluminium
Alloy 6063 T6 with a vent (shutter) depth of
39mm. The vertical member should not deflect
more than L/175 or 19mm for SGU and L/175
or 15mm for DGU, whichever is the least for a
wind load of 1.82 kPa. Deflection calculation
should be based upon moment distribution.
The system should accommodate 24mm DGU
(6mm Toughened glass + 12mm Air Space +
6mm Heat strengthened glass). All gaskets to
be EPDM. The system should have already
been tested/accredited by an international
independent testing laboratory. The system
should comply with an Air infiltration
requirement of ±600 Pa when tested in
accordance with EN 1026, Static water
penetration of 250 Pa in accordance with EN
1027 and ±1.1kPa of Dynamic wind load for 50
cycles. The system should also comply with a
proof load of ±2.7kPa (1.5 times design wind
load). The rollers must be tested for durability –
minimum of 20,000 cycles. The track must be
removable.
All reinforcements if any should be concealed
and on the outside. Room side concealed
reinforcement will be acceptable where
flyscreen is not required. Handles to be
flush/recessed with automatic reset for
windows and manual reset for doors. Single
point or multi-point depending upon the tested
criteria is acceptable. Where multi-point
locking is required due to testing parameter,
demonstration on maintenance and
serviceability is required. All exposed profiles
should be powder coated to a minimum of 60
microns. All anchor fasteners to be made of SS
304 grade. All shims to be capable of
transferring the load evenly and made of a
suitable material (GI, Teflon etc) capable of
lasting the life span of the system. All
miscellaneous items such as peripheral
sealants, backer rods, flashing, fasteners,
brackets etc to be included in the rate.
9.1.2.1
9.2
Powder coated aluminium (minimum thickness
of powder coating 60 micron)
kg
236.25
Providing and fixing glazing in aluminium door,
window, ventilator shutters and partitions etc.
with EPDM rubber / neoprene gasket etc.
complete as per the architectural drawings and
the directions of engineer-in-charge. (Cost of
aluminium snap beading shall be paid in basic
item):
Page | 218
With toughened glass panes of 6 mm thickness
tinted with approved shade. U value and VLT as
per directions of Consultant.
9.2.1
9.2.2
With 24mm DGU (6mm Toughened glass +
12mm Air Space + 6mm Heat strengthened
glass) duly sealed as per specifications and
tinted as per selected shade.U value and VLT as
per directions of consultant.
9.3
Providing and fixing louvers, fabricated out of
heavy duty Aerofoil louver blades & edge
profiles of approved make as per the drawings.
(Profiles, size and weight of sections etc should
be as per the manufacturers standards / IS). All
aluminium sections and profiles shall be
powder coated of any color as may be opted by
the Engineer or Project Consultant including
providing masking tapes on the profiles,
fabricated with all joints at right angle and
frame jointed with screws and fixed with
weather strips to make water and air tight,
making weep hole and drain hole in the bottom
and this to be also provided with appropriate
PVC caps to avoid dust accumulation. This shall
include fixing and sealing entire periphery by
application of silicone weather sealant of
required colour between Aluminium and
masonry all as per the detailed drawing and
instructions of the Engineers. Size of section is
102 x 52 mm.
As/Proposed
Arch Drawings,
Details as/ shop
drg.
At all floors As/
Elevation and
skin sections
Item same as above but with tubular sections
of size 25x 30 with pitch of 55 mm , weight
approx 800 gm per rm with frames size
429
sqm
sqm
309
7790
kgs
kgs
rate
only
SUB HEAD TOTAL
Page | 219
10
B.O.Q.
S.No.
WATERPROOFING
DWG. NO.
10.1
10.2
As/Proposed
Arch. Drg. &
structure
drawings.
APPLICATION
AREA
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
at raised &
sunken portion
of toilet area
Providing & laying foam concrete filling in sunken &
Raised portion of W.C & Kitchen with approved quality
of cinder including supply of labour, materials, tools &
plant etc. required for proper completion of the work as
per direction of Engineer-in-charge.
cum
182.86
At all floors As/
proposed toilet
space in Main
block &
Proposed Annex
block
Providing and laying water proofing treatment to
vertical and horizontal surfaces of depressed portions of
W.C., kitchen and the like consisting of:
sqm
776.00
RATE
Ist course of applying cement slurry @ 4.4 kg/sqm mixed
with water proofing compound conforming to IS 2645 in
recommended proportions including rounding off
junction of vertical and horizontal surface.
IInd course of 20 mm cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement : 3
coarse sand) mixed with water proofing compound in
recommended proportion including rounding off
junction of vertical and horizontal surface.
IIIrd course of applying blown or residual bitumen
applied hot at 1.7 kg. per sqm of area.
IVth course of 400 micron thick PVC sheet. (Overlaps at
joints of PVC sheet should be 100 mm wide and pasted
to each other with bitumen @ 1.7 kg/sqm).
10.3
As/Proposed
Arch. Drg. &
structure
drawings,
Details.
At all floors
Providing and Placing in position suitable PVC water
stops conforming to IS:12200 of Deep-Jyoti or equivalent
for construction/ expansion joints between two RCC
members and fixed to the reinforcement with binding
wire before pouring concrete etc. complete
Dumb bell with central bulb (180mm wide, 8mm thick)
10.5
Providing and laying in situ five course water proofing
treatment with APP (Atactic Polypropylene) modified
Polymeric memberane over roof consisting of first coat
of bitumen primer @ 0.40Kg per sqm, 2nd & 4th courses
of bonding material @ 1.20 kg/sqm, which shall consist
of blown type bitumen of grade 85/25 conforming to IS :
702, 3rd layer of roofing membrane APP modified
Polymeric membrane 2.0 mm thick of 3.00 Kg/ sqm
weight consisting of five layers prefabricated with centre
core as 100 micron HMHDPE film sandwiched on both
sides with polymeric mix and the polymeric mix is
protected on both side with 20 micron HMHDPE film.
5th,
the
top most layer shall be finished with brick tiles of class
designation 10 grouted with cement mortar 1:3 (1
cement : 3 fine sand) mixed with 2% integral water
proofing compound by weight of cement over a 12 mm
layer of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 fine sand) and
finished neat .
With average thickness of 120mm and minimum
thickness at khurra as 65 mm.
Making khurras 45 x 45 cm
10.6
Gola 75x75mm in cement concrete
10.4
10.4.1
metre
259
sqm
203
per
12
per
297
SUB HEAD TOTAL
Page | 220
AMOUNT
11
B.O.Q.
S.No.
MISCELLENEOUS
DWG. NO.
APPLICATION
AREA
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
11.1
Providing and fixing chicken wire mesh (6mm x
6mm) of 24 gauge , along the perimeter of the
existing columns to all heights with hooks/nails
etc. complete so as to receiving the plastering
work over chicken mesh as per the direction of
Engineer‐in‐charge.
sqm
1870
11.2
Providing & fixing chemical rebaring of 20mm
diameter, making hole diameter of 25mm &
depth 300mm into existing RCC structure with
HILTI HIT-RE 500 chemicals.
per
nose
150
11.3
Providing & fixing chemical rebaring of 25mm
diameter, making hole diameter of 30mm &
depth 300mm into existing RCC structure with
HILTI HIT-RE 500 chemicals.
per
nose
25
11.4
Providing & fixing chemical rebaring of 16 mm
diameter, making hole diameter of 21 mm &
depth 300mm into existing RCC structure with
HILTI HIT-RE 500 chemicals.
per
nose
20
11.5
Providing & fixing chemical rebaring of 12 mm
diameter, making hole diameter of 16 mm &
depth as per site and specifications of str.
consultant into existing RCC structure with
HILTI HIT-RE 500 chemicals.
per
nose
1224
Removing white or colour wash by scrapping
and sand papering and preparing the surface
smooth including necessary repairs to scratches
etc. complete
sqm
217.35
11.7
Hacking of CC flooring including cleaning for
surface etc. complete as per direction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
sqm
111.00
11.8
Dismantling 15 to 40 mm dia G.I. pipe including
stacking of dismantled pipes within lead as per
direction of Engineer- in-Charge. (a) Internal
Work - Exposed on wall
metre
250.00
11.6
11.9
At internal wall
surface
Providing & fixing
siagnage for external
building façade of stainless steel section of
2mm, Silver brushed finish, 50mm deep with
20mm spacer from wall with LED tube backlit.
sqm
RATE
AMOUNT
14
SUB HEAD TOTAL
Note: Scaffolding, tools and implements to be part of the quoted rates in all cases for all items. Items are all inclusive and nothing shall
be paid extra in any case except that mentioned separately.
Page | 221
VII) SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES (PLUMBING AND FIRE FIGHTING WORKS)
S.NO
SI
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
TOTAL
QTY.
Each
35
Each
12
Each
44
RATE
(Rs.)
AMOUNT
(Rs.)
SANITARY WARE INSTALLATION
Supply, insatallation, testing and commissioning of vitreous
china single trap syphonic pattern having back inlet, supporting
chair wall hung water closet withflush valve and CP brass flush
bend (European type) water closet with seat and lid, with C.P.
brass hinges and rubber buffers, adapter, rubber joints fixed to
W.C., C.P. brass screwed washers including cutting and making
good the walls and floors wherever required and HDPE wc pan
connector including jointing with white cement complete in all
respects. Model: Extended wall mount EWC With seat and
cover & cistern with lid - Hindware Model Etios-cat no-20096,
Cistern Dual Flush - 3 litre and 6 Litre EWC & cistern with lid
cat no-21056.(for students toilets)
Supply, insatallation, testing and commissioning of vitreous
china single trap syphonic pattern having back inlet, supporting
chair wall hung water closet withflush valve and CP brass flush
bend (European type) water closet with seat and lid, with C.P.
brass hinges and rubber buffers, adapter, rubber joints fixed to
W.C., C.P. brass screwed washers including cutting and making
good the walls and floors wherever required and HDPE wc pan
connector including jointing with white cement coomplete in
all respects. (EWC with seat and cover and integrated jet Hindware Model name-ENIGMA cat no-92501 . Item also
includes concealed cistern and flush plate with wall mount
frame of Hindware make, model cento, (for staff toilets)
Providing and Fixing of white color vitreous China flat back,
wash basin & half pedestal with R.S. or CI bracket and 32 mm
dia outlet, with 15 mm dia C.P. brass angle stop cock with
10mm dia C.P. brass connection pipe etc. CP brass chain, CP
wall flange, rubber adopter for waste connection complete, CP
brass chain CP waste and CP pipe to wall with CP wall flange and
rubber adopter for waste connection complete, with pedestal
of matching model below wash basin, including cutting and
making good the walls wherever required.
Make : Hindware, Model : Mario, cat no-10087 and pedestal
cat no.-11027 , Bottle trap-model F-850003, Waste coupling
full thread model F850023
Page | 222
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.1
1.11
1.12
Providing and Fixing of white color vitreous China flat back,
wash basin with R.S. or C.I. bracket and 32 mm dia outlet, with
15 mm dia C.P. brass angle stop cock with 10mm dia C.P. brass
connection pipe etc. CP brass chain, CP wall flange, rubber
adopter for waste connection complete, CP brass chain CP
waste and CP pipe to wall with CP wall flange and rubber
adopter for waste connection complete, including cutting and
making good the walls wherever required.
Make: Hindware semi recessed basin on counter top. Model:
Tesa, Cat. No. 91055,Bottle trap-model F-850003, Waste
coupling full thread model F850023
each
10
Providing and Fixing of urinals with concealed type urinal
sensor, complete with siphon and concealed C.I. brackets, brass
C.P. supply and flushing connections with 1 N0. 15 mm Dia.
Brass C.P. angle type stop cock with brass C.P. wall cap, with
C.P. waste coupling with 32 mm Dia Polypropylene Silent Bottle
trap 40 mm Ø with 50 mm clear water seal fitted with built-in
Air Admittance valve of adequate capacity with factory
supplied extension piece. at inlet and outlets concealed lead
pipes drains form bottle trap drain pipes in floor. Joining etc
complete.
Each
35
Make: Hindware Model: Flow, Cat. No. 60021.
Providing and fixing of Regulating Angle valve with Comfort
handle, with extended push rod, push rosette Ø 54 mm;
Material – Brass DIN EN / Noise Class I; Connection: 1/2“/DN
15, Outlet: 1/2“/DN 15 ; Chrome / Weight 0.130 KG per piece.
Make: Hindware: Universal angle valve with wall flange. Cat. no.
F850068.
Each
159
Each
56
Each
22
each
35
each
47
Each
47
Each
7
Each
30
Providing and fixing C.P Pillar Cock Auto Closing System.(Make:
Hindware, cat. No. F 310001)
Providing and Fixing of 15mm nominal dia CP concealed stop
cock of approved make. (Make - Hindware)
Providing and fixing health faucet with 1mtr hose and CP hook
cat. No. F160068.
Providing and fixing two in one bib cock make: Hindware
contessa series cat no. F330004.
Providing and fixing robe hooks (Code No 880004, Make hindware) fixed to wooden cleats with CP brass screws,
complete including cutting and making good the tiles
Providing and fixing Towel ring (Make: Hindware, Model F
880004) with brackets fixed to wooden cleats with C.P. brass
screws.
Providing and fixing of soap dispenser (Make: Euronics, Model
:ES18) with brackets fixed to wooden cleats with C.P. brass
screws.
Page | 223
1.13
1.14
1.14.1
1.14.2
1.15
1.16
Providing and fixing of toilet paper holder with cover including
cutting and making good the walls. (Make: Hindware Model
:F880003)
Providing and Fixing of stainless steel sink with C.I. brackets,
40mm C.P. waste, C.P. brass chain and rubber plug, 40mm C.P.
cast brass bottle trap with pipe to wall and C.P. wall flange,
rubber adopter for waste connection complete, including
cutting and making good the walls.
Stainless steel sink, single bowl with drain board. Overall size
813x508 mm Bowl size 203 mm bowl depth [Hindware make
Model Platino 32x 20x 8, cat.no. KSS1M322008, Sink cock with
swivel spout table mounted cat no. F110025). Includes Bottle
trap-model F-850003.
Stainless steel sink, double bowl with drain board. Overall size
1125x 508 mm Bowl size 203 mm bowl depth with double bowl
PVC connecter [Hindware make Model Enrico 45x 20x 8, cat
no. KSD1M452008,Sink cock with swivel spout table mounted
cat no. F110025) - Pantry includes Bottle trap-model F-850003,
Providing and fixing Hand dryer Euronics make EH22
Providing and fixing Sink cock with swivel spout table mounted
cat no. F110025 with all accessories.
Each
47
Each
5
each
each
1
18
each
15
TOTAL OF SANITARY WARE CARRIED OVER TO SUMMARY
S II
2.1
-00
INTERNAL DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
Providing and fixing sand cast iron P-trap of self cleansing
design with sand cast iron screwed down or hinged grating with
or without vent arm complete, including cost of cutting and
making good the walls and floors.
2.1.1
2.2
100 mm inlet and 100 mm outlet
Providing and fixing 100mm x 600mm G.I. Inlet fitting with 2 &
3 nos. G.I. Socket 32 & 40 welded G.I. pipe, 50mm rodding eye
and dipped in hot bitumen complete in all respect.
Each
65
2.2.1
2.3
100 mm diameter pipe
Providing and fixing heavy duty square stainless steel grating
with hinged cockroach trap. (Chilly - Life Style).
Each
65
Each
93
Each
41
Each
28
2.4
Providing and fixing 100mm diameter flanged MS cleanout plug
with M.S. flanged tail pieces, blind flang, 6mm dia nut & bolts,
gasket and washers fixed to C.I. Pipe with drip seal joint
complete in all complete including cutting and making good
the walls and floor wherever required
2.4.1
2.5
with 100 mm dia. Pipe
Providng & fixing 100 x 50 G.I. elbow with bitumatic paint etc.
over a coat of primer (of approval quality)
Page | 224
2.6
Providing and fixing soil, waste and vent including all fittings
(plain or door) e.g. bends, junctions, cowls, offsets, access
pieces jointing with refined drip seal with 25mm deep drip seal
joints including holder bat clamps of approved design to sand
cast iron (spun) pipe embedded, cement concrete block 10x10x
10 cm of 1:2:4 ( 1 cement: 4 coarse sand: 4 graded stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size), cutting holes in wall and floors,
excavation, refilling and disposal of surplus earth where
reguired and marked good complete.
2.6.1
2.7
100mm dia cast (spun) iron S&S pipe
Providing and fixing soil & waste branch connection of Cast iron
pipe confirming to IS : 3989 including all fittings (plain or door)
e.g. T- juctions & 100mm diameter flanged MS cleanout plug
with M.S. flanged tail pieces, blind flang, 6mm dia nut & bolts,
gasket and washers fixed to C.I. Pipe with drip seal joint
complete in all complete including cutting and making good
the walls and floor wherever required, cutting holes in wall and
floors, where required and marked good complete.
Rm
415
2.7.1
2.8
100 mm diameter nominal bore
Providing and laying cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse
sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm and down gauge) 75
mm in bed and all round C.I. soil and waste pipe.
Each
12
Rm
255
100 mm dia under floor including shuttering and centering
2.8.1
2.8
Providing and fixing G.I. Pipes complete (IS:1239 medium class)
with G.I. Fittings e.g. elbows, tees, reducers, unions, plugs etc.
and clamps and jointing with holdite or Teflon tape including
chase cutting and making good the walls etc. wherever requird
for waste connection from W.B. , A.S.P., Sump Rising main etc.
Complete.
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.9
40 mm nominal bore
50 mm nominal bore
Providing and painting for G.I. Pipes with two coats of
bitumastic paint, wraping with one layer of polythene tape and
applying a final coat of bitumastic paint complete including
surface preparations.
Rm
Rm
112
85
2.9.1
2.9.2
40 mm nominal bore
50 mm nominal bore
Rm
Rm
112
85
2.10
Painting sand cast iron / cast iron spun soil, waste and vent
pipes and fittings with paint of any colour such as chocolate,
grey or buff etc. over a coat of primer (of approval quality)
Page | 225
2.10.1
2.11
100mm dia cast (spun) iron S&S pipe
Rm
160
RAIN WATER DISPOSAL
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of UPVC waste
pipe conforming to IS : 4985-2000 class IV (6 Kg/Sq.cm)
including all moulding fittings conforming to IS : 7834 (Part I to
Part-7) 1987 such as tees, bends, reducers, coupling, adaptor
etc. solvent welded joints as per manufacturer
recommendation including cutting and making good the walls,
floors, R.C.C. work etc. (For Rain water).
2.11.1
2.12
110 mm OD UPVC Pipe
Providing and fixing C.I. Grating (medium duty) at outlet point
of rain water outlet in rain water khurra.
Rm
215
2.12.1
150 x 150 mm
Nos.
18
TOTAL OF INTERNAL DRAINAGE CARRIED OVER TO SUMMARY
S III
INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY INSTALLATION
3.1
Providing and fixing CPVC pipes complete as per
specification with fittings and clamps, including
cutting and making good the walls etc. for internal
cold water supply.(SDR 11)
15 MM dia pipe (Sch. - 11)
20 MM dia pipe (Sch. - 11)
25 MM dia pipe (Sch. - 11)
32 MM dia pipe (Sch. - 11)
40MM dia pipe (Sch. - 11)
50 MM dia pipe (Sch. - 11)
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
-00
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
738
350
170
110
85
65
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
6
12
8
6
4
4
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning Ball
valve with hard chrome plated ball inside PTFE
(Teflon) seat and ring with chrome plated centre
handle with female BSP threads complete in all
2
respect. Minimum working pressure 15 Kg/cm .
15 mm NB
20 mm NB
25 mm NB
32 mm NB
40 mm NB
50 mm NB
Page | 226
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.7
3.7.1
3.8
3.8.1
3.9
P/F G.I. pipe with necessary fittings complete - pipe
to be of medium class and threaded joints to be
made using hole tite to ensure leak proof
instalation, pipes to be painted with 2 coats of red
oxide primer over 2 coats of enamel paint of shade
as approved. (Plant room & Terrace Plan )
80 mm dia, NB
65 mm dia, NB
50 mm dia, NB
40 mm dia, NB
32 mm dia, NB
25 mm dia, NB
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
85
30
45
25
15
10
Providing and laying butterfly valve confirming to IS
code and as per list of standard code and PN 16
threaded as required includind all necessary nut,
bolt, washers etc. complete in all respect.
65 mm NB
80 mm NB
Each
Each
4
4
NON - RETURN VALVE with duel plate of C I body SS
plates vulcanized NBR seal flanged end & PN 16
pressure rating for chilled / hot water circulation
including insulation as specified.
50 mm NB
80 mm NB
Each
Each
2
2
Providing and filling sand of grading zone V or
coarse grade alround the CPVC pipes in external
work.
32MM dia pipe
40MM dia pipe
50MM dia pipe
Rm
Rm
Rm
15
30
75
P/F Y Strainer in cast iron with SS304 screen having
1.2mm perforations complete with BS 10 F flange,
boths/nuts complete.
80 mm dia
Each
2
Providing and fixing brass auto air vent valve PN 10
rating of GIA complete suitable for domestic cold
water supply.
15 mm dia nominal bore
Each
6
Nos.
4
Providing & Fixing of washing hydrant / Garden
hydrant outlet consisting 1 No. 20mm dia. ball valve
& brass nozzle for connecting rubber hose including
pipes, fittings and accesssories complete.
Page | 227
3.10
3.11
3.11.1
3.11.2
3.11.3
3.11.4
3.11.5
3.11.6
3.12
3.13
Providing and fixing 600 mm dia internal
dimensions F.R.P. water tank manhole cover and
frame and lockable arrangement (capable to bear
0.5 T Load )complete in all respects .
Each
5
Providing & fixing S.S. (304) 700 mm long pipe
puddle flanges of required size to under water tanks
& retaining wall. (Water Tank shall be constructed
by civil contractor - not included in this contract).
Note :
1. Both end screwed upto 65 mm
2. One end screwed & other end flanged above 65
mm
3. Size of plate welded center of pipes - 3 D x 3 D x 5
mm (D- Diameter of Pipes)
25 mm dia
50 mm dia
65 mm dia
80 mm dia
100 mm dia
150 mm dia
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
14
8
2
2
12
0
Providing and fixing M.S. structural work fabricated
from standard sections, (MS rounds, angles,
channels etc.) including cutting to size, drilling,
welding, including cost of fasteners, clamps in RCC
structural members as directed, including two or
more coats of synthetic paint over one coat of
primer after surface preparation including cutting
and making good walls.
kg
85
Providing & fixing M.S. slotted angle iron 40x40x2
mm thick with stove enamel finish & fixed to brick
masonry or RCC walls with 12mm dia bolts
embedded in cement concrete blocks 1:2:5 (1
cement: 2 coarse sand: 5 stone aggregate 12.5 mm
nominal size) 100x100x100 mm size for masonry
walls & with expandable anchor fasteners on RCC
spaced not exceeding 600 mm with 15 mm dia G.I.
spacer between wall & angle complete as directed
by Engineer-in-Charge.
mtr
65
Page | 228
3.14
3.14.1
3.15
3.15.1
3.16
3.17
Constructing masonry Chamber 60x45x50 cm,
inside with 75 class designation brick work in
cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement:5 fine sand) for water
meter complete with C.I. Doble flap surface box
400x200x200mm (inside) with locking arrangement
and RCC top slab 1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 corase
sand: 4 graded stonr aggregate 20mm nominal size)
necessary excavation foundation concret 1:5:10 (1
cement:5 fine sand : 10 graded stone aggregate 40
mm nominal size ) and inside plastering with
cement mortor 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) 12
mm thick finished with a floating coat of neat
cement complete as per standard design.
With F.P.S. bricks
Each
4
Providing & Fixing of water meter conforming to IS
and tested by Municipal Board complete
50 mm dia nominal bore
Each
1
Sterilization of all cold water supply lines as per
specifcation with chlorine dosing.
Item
1
Making 50mm Diam. water connection with local
authority including approvals / liasioning, excavtion
& back filling, cutting and making good of existing
Authority supply line etc. complete (Fees Payment
by Client)
Item
1
TOTAL OF INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY CARRIED OVER TO SUMMARY
-00
S IV
EXTERNAL DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
4.1
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of
UPVC waste pipe conforming to IS : 4985-2000 class
IV (6 Kg/Sq.cm) including all moulding fittings
conforming to IS : 7834 (Part I to Part-7) 1987 such
as tees, bends, reducers, coupling, adaptor etc.
solvent welded joints as per manufacturer
recommendation including cutting and making good
the walls, floors, R.C.C. work etc.
210 mm diameter
Rm
50
Providing and laying cement concrete 1:5:10 (1
cement : 5 coarse sand : 10 graded stone aggregate
40 mm nominal size) alround uPVC pipes including
bed concrete as per standard design.
210 mm diameter
Rm
50
4.1.1
4.2
4.2.1
Page | 229
4.3
4.3.1
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
4.4.2
4.4.2.1
Providing and fixing square-mouth S.W. gully trap
grade ‘A" complete with C.I. Grating, brick masonry
chamber with bricks of class designation 75 in
cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand) inside
plaster above trap 12 mm thick m cement mortar
1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) finished with a
floating coat of neat cement outside plaster 12 mm
thick in cement mortar 1:3 (1cement :3 coarse
sand) 10 cm thick foundation concrete 1:5:10 mix
(1cement :5 coarse sad : 10 graded stone aggregate
40 mm nominal size) space between chamber, and
trap filled-with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1cement :2
coarse sand :4graded stone aggregate 20 mm
nominal size) and water tight C.I. cover with frame
of 300 x 300 mm size (inside) the weight of cover to
be not less than 4.50 kg frame to be not less than
2.70 kg as per standard design.
180x150mm size P type With FPS bricks
Each
4
Construction brick masonry manhole with 75 class
designation bricks in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement :
4 coarse sand) RCC top slab with 1:2:4 mix (1
cement : 2 coarse sand 4 graded stone aggregate
20mm nominal size) foundation concrete 1:4:8 mix
(1 cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 graded stone
aggregate 40 mm nominal size) inside plastering 12
mm thick with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3
coarse sand) finished with floating coat of neat
cement and making channels in cement concrete
1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size) finished with a
floating coat of neat cement complete as per
standard design.
Inside size 90 x 80 cm and 60 cm deep including
F.R.P. cover with frame (600 x 600 mm internal
dimensions capable to bear 10 T Load).
With FPS bricks
Each
2
Inside size 120 x 90 cm and 90 cm deep including
F.R.P. cover with frame (600 x 600 mm internal
dimensions capable to bear 10 T Load).
With FPS bricks
Each
1
Page | 230
4.5
Providing and fixing of orange colour safety rest of
minimum 6 mm thick plastic encapsulated as per
IS:10910 on 12 mm dia steel bar conforming to IS:
1786 having minimum cross section as 23 mm x 25
mm and over all minimum length 263 mm width as
165 mm with minimum 112 mm space between
protruded legs having 2 mm as per standard
drawing and suitable to withstand the bend test
and chemical resistance test as per specifications
and having manufacturer's permanent identification
mark to be visible even after fixing, including fixing
in manholes with 30 x 20 x 15 cm cement concrete
block 1:3:6 ( 1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded
stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size ) complete as
per design.
Each
2
4.6
Excavating trenches of required width for pipe,
cables etc including excavation for sockets, &
dressing of sides, ramming of bottoms, depth upto
1.5m including getting out the excavated soil & then
returning the soil as required, in layers not
exceeding 20 cm in depth including consolidating
each deposited layer by ramming, watering etc and
disposing of surplus excavated soil as directed,
within lead of 50m.
4.6.1
4.6.2
All kinds of soil
Pipes, cables etc exceeding 80 mm dia but not
exceeding 300 mm dia
RM
50
Making 210mm Diam. Sewage connection with
existing sewage line
Item
1
Rm
Rm
Rm
10
25
10
4.7
TOTAL OF EXTERNAL DRAINAGE CARRIED OVER TO SUMMARY
SV
EXTERNAL
STORM
INSTALLATION
5.1
Providing and laying non-pressure NP2 class (light
duty) RCC pipes with collars jointed with stiff
mixture of cement mortar in the proportion of 1:2
(1 cement : 2 fine sand) including testing of joints
etc. complete.
5.1.1
5.1.1
5.1.1
5.2
WATER
DRAINAGE
150 mm dia RCC pipe
250 mm dia RCC pipe
300 mm dia RCC pipe
Providing and laying cement concrete 1:5:10 (1
cement : 5 coarse sand : 10 graded stone aggregate
40 mm nominal size) haunching bed concrete for
R.C.C. pipes as per standard design.
Page | 231
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
150 mm dia RCC pipe
250 mm dia RCC pipe
300 mm dia RCC pipe
Rm
Rm
Rm
10
25
10
5.3
Constructing Road gully chamber with bricks of class
designated 75 in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement : 5
coarse sand), foundation concrete 1:4:8, inside &
outside 12 mm thick cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement :
3 coarse sand) finished with a coat of neat cement
including excavation, refilling and disposal of
surplus earth as directed by Engineer-in-charge
complete as per standard design.
5.3.1
5.3.2
500 x 450 x 450 mm size .
F.R.P. Catch Basin Cover/grating with frame (450 x
450 mm) with fixed in 15 cm thick cement mortar
1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size) (Medium Duty )
Each
4
Each
4
600 x 600 x 600 mm size
F.R.P. Catch Basin Cover/grating with frame (500 x
600 mm) with fixed in 15 cm thick cement mortar
1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size) (Medium Duty )
Each
4
Each
4
RM
45
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.4
Excavating trenches of required width for pipe,
cables etc including excavation for sockets &
dressing of sides, ramming of bottoms, depth upto
1.5m including getting out the excavated soil & then
returning the soil as required, in layers not
exceeding 20 cm in depth including consolidating
each deposited layer by ramming, watering etc and
disposing of surplus excavated soil as directed,
within lead of 50m.
5.4.1
5.4.1.1
All kinds of soil
Pipes, cables etc exceeding 80 mm dia but not
exceeding 300 mm dia
Page | 232
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.6
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
Providing and constructing Rain water Harvesting
Pit of 4000 dia. x 3000 mm size depth (internal) in
overall size with inlet & outlet connection with Upto
1500mm from ground level Ist class brick 230 mm
thick in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse
sand) inside and outside 12 mm thick plaster with
cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) with
a floating coat of neat cement on inside surface,
After 1500mm depth 500 mm thicksand bed; then
500mm thick gravel and 500mm thick boulders. C.I
(heavy duty) manhole cover 560 mm (weight not
less than 208 kg) including necessary excavation
backing filling, disposal of surplus earth, Providing
and fixing of C.I manhole steps complete as per
standard design.
Constructing Rain Water Harvesting Pits.
350mm diameter boring with 150mm dia, upvc
slotted pipes located centrally in 350mm diameter
bore filled with boulder.
Item
2
Meter
60
Providing and fixing 210mm dia. UPVC pipes (6
Kg/sqcm) including all fittings, excavation and back
filling for connecting over flow from rain water
harvesting pits to external network.
Rm
30
Constructing masonry valve Chamber 1000 x 1000
x1000 mm, inside with 75 class designation brick
work in cement mortar 1:5 (1cement: 5 fine sand)
for sluice valve/butter fly valve, with C.I. Surface
box 100x100x75 mm (inside) with hinged cover
fixed in cement concrete slab 1:2:4 mix (1cement : 2
coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm
nominal size) necessary excavation foundation
concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 fine sand : 10 graded
stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) and inside
plastering with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3
coarse sand) 12 mm thick finished with a floating
coat of neat cement complete as per standard
design.
With F.P.S. bricks
Each
2
Waste Water Sump Pumps (For Harvesting pit)
Flow rate
: 10.0 LPS
Head
: 15.0 Mtrs.
Min. Motor HP : 5.0 (Each)
Set of 2 pumps (1duty +1 stand by)
Each
2
SUB - PANELS FOR 2 NOS 5.0 HP SUMP PUMPS.
Each
1
Page | 233
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
Cubical type sectionalised floor standing switch
board of 31 MVA fault capacity at 415 V complete
with 3.5 strip, 40 A capacity Aluminium Bus - Bar
Electrolytic grade, cable alley, switchgears of
following capacity & as per specifications.
INCOMER
40 A TP MCB with (0-40A) ammeter with 3 CT and
selector switch, (0 - 500 V) voltmeter with selector
switch, phase indication light with protection fuse.
- 03 Set
OUTGOINGS
32A TP MCB, 32 A DOL starter, overload relay, start
/ stop push buttons, phase indication lights with
protection fuse, on / off / trip indication lights with
protection fuse, including single phase preventer. 03SET
5.8
5.8.1
5.9
5.9.1
5.10
5.10.1
5.11
5.11.1
Providing and fixing G.I. Pipes complete (IS:1239
medium class) with G.I. Fittings e.g. elbows, tees,
reducers, unions, plugs etc.and clamps and jointing
with holdite or teflon tape including chase cutting
and making good the walls etc. wherever requird
for waste connection from W.B. , A.S.P., Sump
Rising main etc. Complete.
80 mm nominal bore
Rm
30
Painting G.I. pipes and fittings with paint of any
colour such as chocolate, grey or buff etc. over a
coat of primer (of approval quality)
80 mm nominal bore
Rm
30
80 nominal bore
Each
4
Providing and fixing water type cast iron butterfly
valves tested to 15kg/sqcm pressure including
flanges.
80 nominal bore
Each
4
Providing & fixing dual plate spring actuated non
return valve conforming to IS 5312 with C.I. body
complete with bolts, nuts, washers & inserted
rubber gasket etc. as required complete as per
direction of Engineer incharge.
Page | 234
5.12
Making Storm connection with municipal line
including approvals/ liasioning, excavation & back
filling, cutting and making good of existing
municiapal line & approval from Pollution Control
Board etc. complete (Payment by Client)
Item
1
Set
1
Set
1
TOTAL OF EXTERNAL STORM WATER DRAINAGE CARRIED OVER TO
SUMMARY
S VI
WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE PUMPS
6.1
Raw Water Treatment Feed Pump set
Supplying, installing, testing & commissioning of
horizontal / vertical centrifugal filter feed water
pumps CI head & Base, SS-304 impeller along with
motor, pressure guage with isolation cock, isolation
valve, NRV on delivery line, isolation valve, stainer
Pumps shall be suitable for 415 ± 10% volts 3 phase
50 Hz A.C supply & shall be having the following
requirement complete with foundation and
associated civil works.
Suction & Delivery Header - SS 304
Control Valve On suction and Delivery - Ball Valve
Only (No Butterfly Valve Accepted).
Flow Prevention - Only Check Valve
Suction & delivery header including all pipes,
suction & delivery sides valves, NRV, Pressure
gauges & accessories complete.
Flow Rate
: 2.0 LPS (1 duty + 1 stand by)
Head
: 35 M
Min. Motor HP : 2.0 H.P. (Each)
6.2
TREATED WATER TRANSFER PUMP
Supplying, installing, testing & commissioning of
horizontal / vertical centrifugal filter feed water
pumps CI head & Base, SS-304 impeller along with
motor, pressure guage with isolation cock, isolation
valve, NRV on delivery line, isolation valve, stainer
Pumps shall be suitable for 415 ± 10% volts 3 phase
50 Hz A.C supply & shall be having the following
requirement complete with foundation and
associated civil works.
Suction & Delivery Header - SS 304
Control Valve On suction and Delivery - Ball Valve
Only (No Butterfly Valve Accepted).
Flow Prevention - Only Check Valve
Suction & delivery header including all pipes,
suction & delivery sides valves, NRV, Pressure
gauges & accessories complete.
Page | 235
Flow Rate
: 3.0 LPS (1 duty + 1 stand by)
Head
: 55 M
Min. Motor HP : 5.0 H.P. (Each)
6.3
Sump Pumps
Submersible pumps complete with non-clog type
impeller, minimum solid handling capacity of 3-15
mm, suitable for operation on 415 ± 10 V, 50 Hz AC
power supply, 2900 RPM. The pump shall be
complete with guide wire for lifting and lowering of
pump, Galvanized lifting chain, etc. as per
specifications. The pump shall be complete with
automatic built-up water level controller with
necessary starter panel with length of control /
power cable upto the panel.
Two nos. of pump installed in one sump pit 1
working & 1 standby with automatic / manual
operation as required.
Waste Water Sump Pumps (For pump room)
Flow rate
: 2.0 LPS
Head
: 10.0 Mtrs.
Min. Motor HP : 2.0 (Each)
Set of 2 pumps (1duty +1 stand by)
6.4
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of
pump controllers cum level controllers with level
indicators in 16G powder coated steel sheet metal
panels including the following:
TOTAL OF WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE PUMPS CARRIED OVER TO
SUMMARY
S VII
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
7.1
Dual Media Filter
Supplying, storing, handling, installation, testing &
commissioning of Vertical FRP Dual Media Filter
tested to 5.0 Kg/sqcm consisting of intial charge of
media consisting (300mm bed depth of anthracite,
filtering sand and support media), with frontals and
manual multiport valve of 40 NB .
7.2
Capacity : 2.0 LPS
Working Pressure : (2.5 ± 1.5)MWC
Activated Carbon Filter
Supplying, storing, handling, installation, testing &
commissioning of Vertical FRP Activated Carbon
Filter tested to 5.0 Kg/sqcm consisting of intial
charge of media consisting (900mm bed depth of
activated carbon of Iodine value 350-400 and
support media), with frontals and manual multiport
valve of 40 NB .
Capacity : 2.0 LPS
Working Pressure : (2.5 ± 1.5)MWC
MOC of vessel : FRP
Each
2
Each
6
Each
1
Each
1
Page | 236
7.3
Water Softener
Supplying, storing, handling, installation, testing &
commissioning of Vertical FRP Softener tested to
5.0 Kg/sqcm consisting of intial charge of resin with
mild steel frontals and manual multiport valve of 40
NB . HDPE Brine tank of min. 200 Liters complete
with brine ejector and brine valve.
Capacity : 2.0 LPS
Working Pressure : (2.5 ± 1.5) Kg/cm²
MOC of vessel : FRP
7.4
Test kit shall for conducting a PPM hardness test on
effluent water samples drawn from sample cock
installed on softeners.
Each
1
Each
1
TOTAL OF WATER TREATMENT PLANT CARRIED OVER TO SUMMARY
S. VIII
ELECTRICAL WORKS FOR PLUMBING INSTALLATION
WORKS
8.1
CUBICAL PANEL BOARD - PLUMBING
i) For 2 x 2.0 HP Filter Feed Pumps (1 duty + 1 stand
by)
ii) For 2 x 5.0 HP Treated water Transfer pumps (1
Duty + 1 St. by)-only feeder to sub panels.
iii) For 2 x 2.0 HP Waste Sump Pumps (1 Duty + 1
Stand by) - (only isolator).- pump room
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
Cubical type sectionalized floor standing switch
board of 31 MVA fault capacity at 415 V complete
with 3.5 strip, 160 A capacity Aluminum Bus - Bar
Electrolytic grade, cable alley, switchgears of
following capacity & as per specifications.
A)
INCOMER
100 A TP MCCB with heavy duty solid neutral link
with (0-100A) ammeter with 3 CT and selector
switch, (0 - 500 V) voltmeter with selector switch,
phase indication light with protection fuse. - 01 Set
B)
i)
OUTGOINGS
For 2 Nos. - For 2 x 2.0 HP Filter Feed Pumps
Page | 237
12 A TP MCB with 10 A DOL starter, overload relay,
96 mm (0-25A) ammeter with single CT, start / stop
push buttons, on / off / trip indication lights with
protection fuse, single phase preventer. - 01 set.
ii)
iii)
For 2 Nos.- 5.0 HP Treated water Transfer pumps
12 A TP MCB with 10 A DOL starter, overload relay,
96 mm (0-25A) ammeter with single CT, start / stop
push buttons, on / off / trip indication lights with
protection fuse, single phase preventer. - 01 set.
For 2 x 2.0 HP Waste Water Transfer Pumps pump room
25 A TP MCB with 10 A DOL starter, overload relay,
96 mm (0-25A) ammeter with single CT, start / stop
push buttons, on / off / trip indication lights with
protection fuse, single phase preventer. - 01 set.
For supply, installation, testing & commissioning of
plumbing control panel as per above details (with
standrad items supplied by Manufactures)
Item
1
8.2.1
8.2.1.1
8.2.1.2
Power cabling (XLPE) insulated and PVC sheathed,
armoured, Aluminium Conductor of 1.1 KV grade
on existing cable trays).
3C x 10 Sq. mm
3C x 6 Sq. mm
RMT
RMT
35
15
8.2.2
8.2.2.1
Control Cabling (PVC insulated and PVC sheathed,
armoured, Copper Conductor of 1.1 KV grade on
existing cable trays).
5C x 1.5 Sq. mm
RMT
50
RMT
10
RMT
5
RMT
4
8.1.1
POWER & CONTROL CABLING
Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of power
and control cabling, as per Standard specification
including end termination as required.
8.2
8.3
8.3.1
Earthing Strip / Wires.
Providing and fixing 25 x 5 mm copper strip in 40
mm GI Pipe.
Providing and fixing 25 x 5 mm copper strip on
surface or in recess for connections etc. as required.
8.3.2
8.3.3
Providing and fixing 4.0 mm dia. Copper wire on
surface or in recess for loop earthing as required.
Page | 238
8.3.4
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
Supply & laying of rubber mat of size 1000 mm & 12
mm thick.
RMT
2
Supply and installation of ladder type 16G ms
cadmium plated 'U' shaped channel 40mm x 20mm
cable tray of following sizes:
150 mm wide
300 mm wide
RMT
RMT
3
2
Set
1
TOTAL OF ELECTRICAL WORKS CARRIED OVER TO SUMMARY
S IX
FIRE FIGHTING PLANT ROOM EQUIPMENTS
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
fire authority approved fire fighting pumps,
electrically driven generally as specified and shown
in equipment schedule complete with:
9.1
TERRACE LEVEL - FIRE PUMP
Supplying, storing, handling, shifting, installation,
testing and commissioning, supervision of testing of
electric driven terrace pump suitable for automatic
operation of horizontal end section centrifugal type
sychoronous speed of 2900 rpm TEFC confirming to
IP : 55 & Flexible coupling & coupling guard
mounted on common bed plate of fabricated mild
steel channel or cast iron type as required.
Capacity : 900 lpm
App.head : 35 m
App. H.P. : 15 HP
PANELS:
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
following integrated, cubicle type,dead front,
extensible, sheet steel control panel. The panel shall
be suitable for 440 volts, 50 cycles, 4 wire supply
The following components and accessories shall be
mounted with ineach control panel.
One no 60 amps TP incoming MCCB with the
following:
0-500 volts 96 x96 square mm voltmeter with
slector switch and control fuses- 1 SET
0-100 amps 96 x96 square mm ammeter with CT's
and slector switch- 1 SET
Phase indicating lamp with toggle switches.
Indication lamps for ON/OFF/TRIP status
Outgoing Feeders / Starters as below:
Page | 239
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.3
9.3.1
60 ATP MCCB with star / delta as starter suitable for
15 HP motor for Downcomer Pump - 1 Set
Provision in control panel to connect flow switch
for autmatic operation of roof fire pumps.
Supply and installation of pressure gauge panel as
per the requirement & comprising:
Pressure gauges & pressure switches with ball valve
and 2 x 1.5 sq mm copper conductor wiring to
motor starter panel
Water piping from system upto the gauge panel
along with valves etc.
Sheet metal enclosure with glass paneling etc. as
approved
Set
1
Each
2
Each
12
Each
12
Each
24
Each
Each
12
12
Providing, fixing, testing & commissioning of
resilient rubber lined single arch vibration
eliminators suitable for raw water up to 45 deg. C
temperature, working pressure 8.8 Kg/cm2 and test
pressure 14 Kg/cm2 for :150 mm dia
TOTAL OF FIRE FIGHTING PLANT ROOM EQUIPMENTS CARRIED OVER
TO SUMMARY
SX
10.1
10.1.1
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
NOTE : Contractor shall obtain, from the local fire
authority, completion certificate with respect to
his work as required for occupation of the building
without any extra cost.
Supply, installation, testing, trial run and
commissioning of hydrants all complete as required
and as approved
Internal hydrants / landing valves generally as
specified and all complete with:
63mm dia single outlet landing valve IS marked with
suitable size bolts, nuts, washers and gaskets.
Landing valve shall be as per IS code.
First aid hose reel with 25 mm dia, 30 m long rubber
hose, ball valve, piping, nozzle and pressure guage
as per IS code.
63mm reinforced rubber hoses (RRL) with male and
female SS coupling, IS marked- 15 m. as per IS code.
standard short size SS branch pipe with nozzle of
20mm nomnal bor outlet with instaneous type 63
mm dia coupling complete as per IS code.
Fire Axe
Page | 240
Aluminium 1000x1800 door for recessed fire hose
cabinet. The door shall have a front glass with lock
and key arrangement & shall be painted with post
office red colour (approval shall be taken on the
basis of submitted sample before ordering).
1200x600x2100 Recessed type mansoary box of
accommodating fire hose reel, landing valve, hose
pipes, fittings, 1 No. CO2 & 1 No. Dry podwer type
portable fire extinguishers & accessories.- By Civil
Contractor.
10.1.2
Supply, installation, testing, trial run and
commissioning of hydrants all complete as required
and as approved (at roof level).
Internal hydrants/landing valves generally as
specified and all complete with:
63mm dia single outlet landing valve IS marked with
suitable size bolts, nuts, washers and gaskets.
Landing valve shall be as per IS code.
63mm reinforced rubber hoses (RRL) with male and
female SS coupling, IS marked- 15 m as per IS code.
standard short size SS branch pipe with nozzle of
20mm nomnal bor outlet with instaneous type 63
mm dia coupling complete as per IS code.
Fire Axe
Aluminium Powder coated 900x1800 door for
recessed fire hose cabinet. The door shall have a
front glass with lock and key arrangement & shall
be painted with post office red colour (approval
shall be taken on the basis of submitted sample
before ordering).
10.2
Each
12
Each
By Civil
Contrat
or
Each
3
Each
6
Each
Each
3
3
Each
3
900x600x1800 Recessed type mansoary box of
accommodating fire hose reel, landing valve, hose
pipes, fittings, 1 No. CO2 & 1 No. Dry podwer type
portable fire extinguishers & accessories.- By Civil
Contractor.
Each
By Civil
Contrat
or
Providing, installing, testing & commisioning of fire
brigade inlet connection (fire department
connection) consisting of 4 Nos. 63 mm dia
instantaneous inlet arranged on a 50 mm dia
header, 1 No. 150 mm diameter sluice valve, 1 No.
150mm dia. Non-return valve and wall mounted
box of M.S. construction with glass door to house
the above mentioned components. as per IS code.
Set
1
Page | 241
10.4
10.4.1
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.7.1
10.8
10.8.1
10.9
10.9.1
10.10
10.11
10.11.1
10.11.2
10.11.3
10.11.4
10.11.5
10.12
Supply, fabrication & laying heavy grade IS marked
black mild steel piping complete with all fittings,
pipe supports, clamps etc. as approved with
weleded jointing for external hydrant system. Thes
pipes shall be provided with 2mm thick weather
proof treatment like covering with pypkote
complete.
150 nominal bore
M
45
Excavation upto hard murram as per general
profiles and back filling
Meter
45
Making 1:2:4 cement concrete supports and thrust
blocks generally as per required and approved.
Cum
8
Supply and installation of Butterfly Valves with
mating flanges generally as specified all complete.
150 nominal bore
Each
2
Providing and laying cast iron non-return valve IS
marked with flanges genertally as specified
complete.
150 nominal bore
Each
2
Supply, installation testing and commissioning
double flanged MS pot strainers with M.S. body and
SS 40-grade mesh strainer.
Size 150mm
Each
1
Each
3
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
65
115
10
10
25
Each
15
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning C.I.
flanged double air valves size 25mm with 25mm SS
isolation valve etc. all complete.
Supply, fabrication & laying heavy grade (Class C) IS
marked black mild steel piping complete with all
forged fittings, pipe supports, clamps, painting etc.
as approved with threaded and welded jointing for
Wet Riser System.
Note: a. Threaded joint upto 50mm diameter pipe.
b. Welded joint above 50mm diameter pipe.
150 mm nominal bore (Class C)
100 mm nominal bore (Class C)
80 mm nominal bore (Class C)
65 mm nominal bore (Class C)
25 mm nominal bore (Class C)
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning
brass orifice plates in pipelines to reduce pressure
from 8 kg. to 3.5 kg/sq.cm.
Page | 242
10.13
Preparation of working drawing, getting approval
from statutory/ local fire authority at all stage of
work including inspection of authorities, obtaining
licences from authorities including incidental
changes etc. complete in all respect.
Job
1
TOTAL OF FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM CARRIED OVER TO SUMMARY
S XI
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS & EXIT SIGNAGES
11.1
Supply, storing, handling, shifting, installation,
testing and commissioning of portable fire
Extinguishers as described below:
4.5 kg carbon dioxide extinguisher, IS marked, with
high pressure discharge tube, horn, control valve,
CCE approved cylinder
Each
31
Providing & Fixing of stored pressure Fire
Extinguisher ABC powder type (Mono Ammonium
Phosphate Powder) Magnetic Pressure Gauge
having the facility to check at site, Discharge Time
less than 9 Secs, Controllable discharge mechanism,
Range minimum 4 Meters, applicable on Class A,B,C
and electrically started Fire, A Rating- 21A, B Rating
55B as per BS EN-3 BIS 15683 marked, Can
Construction : Deep drawn & CO2 Mig welded,
Valve Construction : Forging & Machining, Internal
Coating of Can : Epoxy Powder coating, External
Coating ofCan : Epoxy Polyster Powder coating,
Sheet metal thickness : 1.60MM, Helium
LeakDetection Tested, Warranty 5 Years.
6 kg Mono ammonium phosphate (ABC) type
cartridge operated extinguishers
Each
30
Providing and fixing signages printed on
photoluminescent U1000 aluminium sheet of 1.0
mm (+-10%) containingLumigen II as base chemical,
covered under UV stablized coating and of
appropriate size (Glo-lite or eq. Make) including
fixing on wall, door, ceiling etc. with proper clamps,
hangers, cleats, anchor fasteners etc. complete in
all respects as directed by Engineer-in-charge
Square
Inch
2160
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.2
TOTAL OF PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS & EXIT SIGNAGESCARRIED
OVER TO SUMMARY
12
12.1
DISMANTLING
Cleaning and desilting of gully trap chamber,
including removal of rubbish mixed with earth etc.
and disposal of same, all as per the direction of
Engineer-in-charge.
each
10
Page | 243
12.2
Disconnecting damaged overhead/terrace PVC
water storage tank of any size from water supply
line and removing from the terrace including
shifting at ground level as per direction of Engineerin- charge.
each
12.3
Dismantling W.C. Pan of all sizes including disposal
of dismantled materials i/c malba all complete as
per directions of Engineer-in- Charge.
each
5
24
TOTAL OF DISMANTLING
Page | 244
VIII) List of approved makes for Civil works
SL. NO.
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
NAME OF MANUFACTURER
1
Epoxy, grouting mortar/admixtures
MBT, Sika, STP, Endura, Dubond, Kerakoll, GIB
2
Waterproofing chemicals
UMB, Kryton, xypex, Cico, Pidilite, dupont, GIB
3
Expansion/ rebar/anchor fastener
Hilti, Bosch, Fisher
4
Aluminium bldg. Expansion joint
Manufactured by m/s Vexcolt and supplied by m/s
Tristar intec pvt. Ltd, m/s Watson Bowman, Acme
and supplied by Sanfield india ltd., manufactured by
m/s c/s Expansion joint and supplied by m/s Z-tech
india pvt. Ltd, Manufactured by, j. Sons, Metco, CS
group, P.D.Projects
5
Plywood ( for formwork)
Duroply (Green marked, BWR grade) of Plywood
industries ltd., Green Plywood,Century
6
Aluminium sections
Domal,Sheuco, Wicona, Hindalco,Jindal or equivalent
7
Float glass/ mirror /Toughened glass
Saint Gobain, Modiguard, Eternia
For Structural Glazing - SF below 0.2 & VLT above 50%
8
Aluminium composite panels
Alstrong, Alucobond,
equivalent
9
Powder coatings paints
Berger/ Polycoat(Nerolac)/Jonson & Nicholson,Asian
Paints,Rapid Coat
10
Asphalt emulsion
STP / Karnak Chemical Corporation
11
Polysulphide sealants
Pidilite Industries ltd./Stp Or Equivalent
12
Silicone sealants
Remmers/Protecta,G.E.BayerSilicone/Dow
Corning/Wacker
13
Paints
ICI / Berger/ Jenson & Nicholson/ Asian Paints,
Nerolac
14
Texture paints
Spectrum, Unitile, Oikos or equivalent
15
External Paint
Asian paints Ultima, SKK paints or equivalent.
Renobond,Pilkingtoh
or
Page | 245
16
Silicon water repellent solution
Remmers,Protekta,G.E. Bayer silicon (i) P
ltd.,Metroark P ltd or “Silicon Waterpeller” by STP ltd
or approved equivalent
17
Chequerred precast ceramic tiles
Pavit or Equivalent
18
Cement
Birla Uttam, Vikram, Jk, Acc, Lafarge or equivalent
19
Steel
Tata Tiscon ,Sail, RINL (Primary Steel Producers only)
TMT 500 only.
20
Brick tiles
Unistone or equivalent
21
Wall cladding
Unistone or equivalent
RMC
RMC india, ACC,Ultratech
22
NOTES :
1
Contractor has to take approval from consultant/Architects for using any one of the above
approved makes as mentioned above.
2
In case, any other item/ material required to complete the work for which makes are not
specified above, the Contractor shall take prior approval of the Architects/Consultants
Page | 246
IX) List of Approved Plumbing and Fire Fighting Makes
SL. NO.
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
NAME OF MANUFACTURER
1
2
3
4
5
Vitreous China Sanitary ware
Concealed Cistern
Plastic W.C. seats Covers
Stainless Steel Sinks
C.P. Fittings & Accessories
KOHLAR /PARRYWARE/ HINDWARE
SCHELL/KOHLAR/ TOTO/ Hindware
KOHLAR /PARRYWARE/ HINDWARE
JAINA/ STAR / VIJAY
SCHELL/ JAQUAR/KOHLER
6
7
8
9
Rubber Insulation
CPVC pipes/fittings and valves
G.I. Pipes /M.S.Pipes IS 1239/3589
G.I.Fittings (Malleable cast iron)
Soil, Waste & Rain water pipes & Fittings –
uPVC
Soil, Waste & Rain water pipes & Fittings –
CAST IRON (IS: 3989.
S.S. Hinged Grating
Check Valves (Dual Slim type)
Butterfly Valve
Ball valves (15 to 40mm)
Gate Valve
Gunmetal valve (full way valve) Class-I
C.I. double flanged sluice valve
Diaphram Valve
Foot Valve
Pressure Reducing Valve (PRVs)
Stoneware Pipes & Gully - IS 651
RCC Pipes IS 458
C.I. Manhole cover & frame IS 1726
FRP Manhole COVERS ETC
Anti corrosive tape for pipe protection
Garden Irrigation System
Anticorrosive Bitumastic Paint
Epoxy Paint
Hydro-Pneumatic System
Pumps
PLC
Pressure Vessel
Pressure Sensor
Clear Water Pumps
Submersible Drainage Pumps
Filter/Softener
PH Meter
Water Meter
Electrical Switchgear & Starters
ARMAFLEX/ VIDEOFLEX
ASTRAL /ASHIRWAD
JINDAL HISSAR/PRAKASH SURYA
DRP-M/UNIK SS
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
I
Ii
Iii
Iv
31
32
33
34
35
36
ASTRAL /JIN FINOLEX
NECO/KOPILANS/RIF
CHILLY / JAINA/ VIJAY
DRP / ZOLOTO / SANT
DRP / ZOLOTO / AIP
DRP/TBS/AIP / ZOLOTO
DRP/ ZOLOTO / SANT
DRP/ ZOLOTO / SANT
KIRLOSKAR/ SHIVA-DURGA
As approved by water treatment manufacturer’s
DRP/ KIRLOSKAR/ KARTAR/ ZOLOTO
DRP/ ZOLOTO /AIP
Locally ISI approved
Locally ISI approved
NECO/KOPILANS/RIF
THERMODRAIN / POOJA
PYPKOTE/MAKPOLYKOTE
JAIN/HARVEL
ISI
ISI
DP-HOLAND/GRUNDFOSS/ WILLO
AS PER MANUFACTURERS SPEC'S
AS PER MANUFACTURERS SPEC'S
AS PER MANUFACTURERS SPEC'S
DP-HOLAND/GRUNDFOSS/WILLO
DP-HOLAND/GRUNDFOSS/WELLO
BRISANZIA /ION EXCHANGE/PENTAIR
VATS/ HANNA (italy)
kaycee/ kent
L&T OR EQUIVALENT
Page | 247
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
SLOTCO OR EQUIVALENT
ISI
ISI
EQUIVALENT
EQUIVALENT
RESISTOFLEX
DRP/LEADER/EMARALD/ZOLOTO
ENERCON OR EQUIVALENT
DRP /VS
FIEBIG/GURU
EQUIVALENT
IMPACT ENGINEERS/ELEGANT
STUDOR/McALPINE
NEWAGE / GETACH / FIRE SHIELD
51
Cable Trays
1100 Volt Grade XLPE Cables
PVC Insulated Copper Wires
Lugs (Tinned Copper)
Power Aux. Contactors
Vibration Eliminator Pads & Connections
Suction Strainer/Pot Strainer
Meters, Indication Lamp
Forged Steel Fittings
Pressure Gauge
Measuring Instruments
Electrical Panels
Air Admittance valves
Fire fighting equipment (Hydrant, Hose
Drum, F.B Inlet, Branch)
Fire Extinguishers
52
Fire fighting first-aid hose reel tubing
NEWAGE/JYOTI/DUNLOP/ FIRE SHIELD
53
Fire pumps
MATHER + PLATT /KIRLOSKAR
54
Motors
KIRLOSKAR/SIEMENS/ABB
55
M.S. Pipes
PRAKASH SURYA/JINDAL HISSAR
56
Sprinkler heads
VIKING/TYCO/H.D./NEWAGE/GETECH
57
58
59
60
M.S. FORGED FITTINGS
C.I. Double Flanged Non-Return Valves.
(80mm diameter and above)
Welding Rod
Alarm Control Valve
DRP / AIP / SANT/ ZOLOTO
ADWANI/ VICTOR
NEWAGE/ VIKING/TYCO
61
Flow Switch
DANFOSS/ VIKING
62
Dash Fasteners
HILTI/ canon
63
Automatic Air Vent
DANFOSS/ IBP
64
Water level indicator & controller
ITAL/ TECHNIKA
65
Pipe Clamps / Hangers / Support
CAMRY/ CHILLY
66
Clamps & Support
CAMRY/ CHILLY
Paint
Shalimar/ Asian
50
67
NOTES :
FIRE SHIELD /SAF GUARD/GETACH
DRP-M / V.S. / SS
1
Contractor has to take approval from consultant/Architects for using any one of the above
approved makes as mentioned above.
2
In case, any other item/ material required to complete the work for which makes are not
specified above, the Contractor shall take prior approval of the Architects/Consultants
Page | 248
X) LIST OF TENDER DRAWINGS
BIRLA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY, MESRA
EXTENSION CAMPUS, SECTOR 01, NOIDA
S.No.
Drawing Title
Drawing No.
1. Architectural Drawings
1.1. Existing Drawings
1.1.1. Floor Plans -Existing
1
Existing Site Layout plan
BIT-N/EXT/FP-01
2
Existing Ground Floor Plan
BIT-N/EXT/FP-02
3
Existing First Floor Plan
BIT-N/EXT/FP-03
4
Existing Second Floor Plan
BIT-N/EXT/FP-04
5
Existing Third Floor Plan
BIT-N/EXT/FP-05
6
Existing Terrace Plan
BIT-N/EXT/FP-06
1.1.2. Elevations -Existing
7
Existing Elevation- Front & Left
BIT-N/EXT/EL-01
1.1.3. Sections -Existing
8
Existing Section through- A-A & B-B
BIT-N/EXT/S-01
1.1.4. Demolition plans -Existing
9
Site Layout (Demolation plan)
BIT-N/EXT/DM-01
10
First Floor ( Demolition plan)
BIT-N/EXT/DM-02
11
Second Floor ( Demolition plan)
BIT-N/EXT/DM-03
12
Third Floor ( Demolition plan)
BIT-N/EXT/DM-04
1.2 Proposed Drawings
1.2.1 Floor Plans -Proposed
13
Site Layout plan (Ground Lvl.)
BIT-N/AR/SP-01(A)
14
BIT-N/AR/SP-01(B)
15
Site Layout plan (Terrace Lvl.)
Ground Floor Plan
16
Ground Floor Plan (Annex Building)
BIT-N/AR/FP-01(A)
17
First Floor Plan
BIT-N/AR/FP-02
18
Second Floor Plan
BIT-N/AR/FP-03
19
Third Floor Plan
BIT-N/AR/FP-04
20
Fourth Floor Plan
BIT-N/AR/FP-05
21
Terrace - Floor Lvl. Plan
BIT-N/AR/FP-06
22
Terrace - Mumty Lvl. Plan
BIT-N/AR/FP-07
BIT-N/AR/FP-01
1.2.2 Elevations - Proposed
23
Elevation-A
BIT-N/AR/EL-01
24
Elevation-B,D
BIT-N/AR/EL-02
25
Elevation-C
BIT-N/AR/EL-03
26
Elevation-E,F
BIT-N/AR/EL-04
Page | 249
27
Elevation-G,H
BIT-N/AR/EL-05
28
Schedule of openings
BIT-N/AR/EL-06
1.2.3 Sections - Proposed
29
Section through- 1-1' & 2-2'
BIT-N/AR/S-01
30
Section through- 3-3'
BIT-N/AR/S-02
31
Section through- 4-4'
BIT-N/AR/S-03
32
Façade Sections- (01-05)
BIT-N/AR/FS-01(A)
33
Façade Sections- (06-07a)
BIT-N/AR/FS-01(B)
1.2.4 Details
34
Staircase Detail-01
BIT-N/AR/ST-01
35
Staircase Detail-02
BIT-N/AR/ST-02
36
Staircase Detail-03
BIT-N/AR/ST-03
37
Lift Detail-01,02 & 03
BIT-N/AR/LW-01
38
Toilet Detail-01
BIT-N/AR/T-01
39
Toilet Detail-02
BIT-N/AR/T-02
41
Toilet Detail-03
BIT-N/AR/T-03
42
Toilet Detail-04
BIT-N/AR/T-04
43
Toilet Detail-05
BIT-N/AR/T-05
44
Toilet Detail-06
BIT-N/AR/T-06
45
Toilet Detail-07
BIT-N/AR/T-07
2. Structural Drawings
2.1 . Structural Drawings (Main Block)
46
Column Strengthening Layout
BIT-N/SR/MN-01
47
Column Strengthening details
BIT-N/SR/MN-01(A)
48
Fourth floor Roof Layout
BIT-N/SR/MN-02
49
Fourth floor Roof beam details
BIT-N/SR/MN-02(A),(B)
50
Stair case details
BIT-N/SR/MN-03
2.2 . Structural Drawings (Annex Block)
Foundation Layout, Column layout, Plinth beam layout &
51
Details
BIT-N/SR/AN-01
52
Column Details
BIT-N/SR/AN-01(A)
53
All Roof layout
BIT-N/SR/AN-02
54
All Roof beam details
BIT-N/SR/AN-02(A)
3 . PHE Drawings
55
56
Plumbing - Site Layout
BIT-N/PHE/PB/SP-01
Plumbing - Ground Floor Plan
BIT-N/PHE/PB/FP-01
57
Plumbing - Annex Ground Floor Plan
BIT-N/PHE/PB/FP-02
58
59
Plumbing - First Floor Plan
BIT-N/PHE/PB/FP-03
Plumbing - Second Floor plan
BIT-N/PHE/PB/FP-04
60
61
Plumbing - Third Floor Plan
BIT-N/PHE/PB/FP-05
Plumbing - Fourth Floor Plan
BIT-N/PHE/PB/FP-06
Page | 250
62
63
Plumbing - Terrace Flooor Paln
BIT-N/PHE/PB/FP-07
Plumbing (Water Supply)- Ground Floor Plan
BIT-N/PHE/WS/FP-01
64
65
Plumbing (Water Supply)- Annex Ground Floor Plan
BIT-N/PHE/WS/FP-02
Plumbing (Water Supply)- First Floor Plan
BIT-N/PHE/WS/FP-03
66
67
Plumbing (Water Supply)- Second Floor Plan
BIT-N/PHE/WS/FP-04
Plumbing (Water Supply)- Third Floor Plan
BIT-N/PHE/WS/FP-05
68
Plumbing (Water Supply)- Fourth Floor Plan
BIT-N/PHE/WS/FP-06
69
Plumbing (Water Supply)- Terrace Plan
BIT-N/PHE/WS/FP-07
4. Fire Fighting Drawings
70
Fire Fighting - Ground floor Plan
71
Fire Fighting -Annex block Ground floor Plan
72
Fire Fighting - First Flooor
BIT-N/FF/FP-01
BIT-N/FF/FP-01(A)
BIT-N/FF/FP-02
73
Fire Fighting - Second Flooor
BIT-N/FF/FP-03
74
Fire Fighting - Third Flooor
BIT-N/FF/FP-04
75
Fire Fighting - Fourth Flooor
BIT-N/FF/FP-05
76
Fire Fighting - Terrace
BIT-N/FF/FP-06
77
Fire Fighting System chart & Details.
BIT-N/FF/FD-01
5. Schedule for Finishes & Fixtures
78
Schedule of Finishes for External Facade
79
Schedule of Fixtures for Toilets
BIT-N/SF/EL
BIT-N/SF/TF
Page | 251
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement